Suchergebnisse

The Mercury November. 1893 ADVERTISEMENTS. IReabing IRailroab The "Royal "Route" To thS StUd^ts oF New and Direct Line To and From QETTT5BURQ. Fast, Frequent and Superbly Equipped Train Service Between NEW YORK, PHILADELPHIA, Allentown, Pottsville, Williamsport, Reading, Harrisburg and Interior Pennsylvania Points, with through connections to and from all parts of the Middle States, New England and the West. Visitors to America's Greatest Battlefield can obtain through tickets and baggage checks, via this new and most picturesque route, at all principal stations and ticket offices throughout the country. I. A. SWEIGARD, C. G. HANCOCK, General Manager. Gen. Pass. Agt. Barber Sfy°P> CHARLES C. SEFTON, PROPRIETOR. BALTIMORE STREET. THE PLACE FOR STUDENTS TO GO. ONLY FIRST-CLASS WORK yHU$rc af]d ^ffc Qoris^Vatopy. Chartered 1850, offers Classic, Normal, Music and Art courses for Diploma and Degrees ; comprises three large brick buildings, situated on a beautiful eminence, a lovely campus, library, apparatus, hot and cold mountain water, steam heat, gas light, electric bells, a suite of rooms nicely furnished for every two or three students, music lessons on Pipe Organ, Reed Organ, Piano, Violin, Guitar, Mandolin, Banjo, and Cornet. Lessons in Drawing, Crayoning, Pastel, China and Oil Painting. German and French languages taught and spoken. Special attention paid to Elocution and Voice Culture. Normal course with Diploma for teaching. Strict attention given to Physical, Social, and Religious culture. Kee Mar College is located in a most attractive, refined, and healthful city of 14,000 people. SEND FOR CATALOGUE AND JOURNAL TO Rev. C. L. KEEDY, A. M., M. D.F President, Hagerstown, Mdr QANDERS & OTAYMAN Beg to call attention to their splendid exhibit of the leading makes of Pianos and Organs Including the famous ESTEY ORGAN, WEBER, DECKER BROS., ESTEY, FISCHER, AND IVERS AND POND PIANOS. Also a full line of Sheet Music, Music Books, and Musical Instruments of all kinds, including Violins, Mandolins, Banjos, Guitars, Cornets, Autoharps, &c. SANDERS &. STAYMAN, 13 NORTH CHARLES ST., BALTIMORE, MD. 934 F STREET, N. W., WASHINGTON, D. C. Music Sent " On Selection." Catalogues Free. We are Sole Agents for the Wonderful "AEOLIAN," an Orchestra in Your Own Parlor, With You as Musical Director. Spalding's Livery Stable, STRATTON ST., GETTYSBURG, PA. Branch Office, E. S. Faber's Cigar Store. Hacks, Carriages, Wagonettes, Double Teams, Riding Horses, Large Wagons Capable of Holding Sixty Persons at a Time. COMPETENT GUIDES FOR THE BATTLEFIELD. CHAS. J. SPALDING, Proprietor. -#|i ll1llllllltllllll1llll"lllll'lll)llll'illHIIIIIIIIIUIIIIIH-ll'IIIIMHIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIl;lll||||llll ((Sp- Gettysburg Carriage Works, CHAS. J. SPALDING, Proprietor. WEST MIDDLE STREET. BUILDER OF oattep§ * and ^ferp's ^upmii>hep§, TRUNKS, LEATHER GOODS, AND VALISES, 12 W. MARKET ST., YORK, PA. Special Attention to Mail Orders. H. S. Benner, Choice Family Groceries, Chambcrsburg St., Gettysburg, Pa. Coffees, Teas, Flour, Fish, and Canned Goods. Queensware, Glassware, Etc. PITZBH HOUSE. A temperance house. Pleasant and home-like. Teams and Guides to all points of interest on the battle-field. REASONABLE RATES. 127 ChambersboFg St., Gettysburg, Pa. JOHN E. PITZER. MEMBER POST 9, G. A. R. J. W. EIGHOLTZ & GO., DEALERS IN PIANOS, Or^GR^S, IWUSIC, MUSICAL* IJSlSTftTjJVIEjMTS, ST^IfiGS, Ete. 12 BALTIMORE ST., GETTYSBURG, PA. SAMUEL* FABE$, -&pine Cigars ^ Smokers' Mieles-^ CHAMBERSBURG ST., GETTYSBURG. J. H. MYERS, Fashionable Tailor, Clothier* — AND— You alcuays find the Iiatest Styles for Gents' LCJardrobes. No. 11 BALTIMORE STREET, GETTYSBURG, PA. ADVERTISEMENTS. in College prises ©octets Baboes Bbtf3e nDebals Stationery The most successful designers of College and University Badges in the Country Estimates Designs on Applieation BAILEY BANKS BIDDLE Chestnut and Twelfth Streets Philadelphia, "Pa. Mary had a Little Lamb, (Stamp jour Memory.) It's wool was all the go— We make it up in BUSINESS SUITS for S1 5.00 you know. These Custom-Made Suits are popular throughout America— because they represent the very Quintessence of Nobby Oresi, and are essential to every business man who cares one lota for economy and APPEAR-ANCE. Send us 6 cents in stamps, stating kind of gar-ment or suit desired, and we will forward you SAMPLES of Cheviots, Cassimeres, etc., Self-measurement rules and fashion plate. YOU DO THIS and we do the rest. Balti more cheapest market. KEELER the largest custorc producer. Full Dress Suits, ■ $25.00 Up. Trousers, . $4.00 Uf. Frock Suits, - • $18.00 Up Overcoats, ■ • ■ $18.00 Up. JOnN M. KEELER, S N. Calvert St. Baltimore, Hd, "Suffer no longer the extortions of local tailors Correspondence Solicited With Responsible Parties Desiring to Act as Agents. OEM'S AGME HALL (JMIEE IUfflEItt, ^ ruitrmtm 5 and 7 W. Baltimore Street, Annex 6 and 8 S. Charles St., BALTIMORE, MD. NEW SPRING STYLES Of Suits and Overcoats now ready at 20 to 30 per cent, under com-petitors' prices. Write for Samples and Price List. WILLIAM SMALL, DIM DQOR nniER AND Doon DUIDEH 6 WEST MARKET STREET, YORK, PENNA. w. s. SCHRODER, DEALER IN Hats and CaPs? Boots and ShogS? No. 6 Balto Street, Gettysburg. ADVERTISEMENTS. p. D. SCHRIVER, Draper, • • Importer, • • fl^D JVterehant Tailor, 23 Baltimore Street, GETTYSBURG, PA. The College Mercury. Vol. I. Gettysburg, Pa., November, 1893. No. 7. THE COLLEGE MERCURY, Published each month during the college year by the Students of Pennsylvania (Gettysburg) College. EBITO-RIAL. STAFF. Editor: JULIUS F. SEEBACH, '94. Associate Editors ; FREDH. BLOOMHARDT,'94. FRANK E. FICKINGER, '94. HENRY E. CLARE, 95. WALDO D. MAYNARD, '95. PAUL \V. KOLLER, '94. ROSCOE C. WRIGHT, '95. WJLMEK A. HARTMAN, '95. Alumni Association Editor : D. FRANK GARLAND, Baltimore, Md. Business Manager : BENJAMIN R. LANTZ, '94. Assistant Business Manager : CHARLES F. KLOSS, '94. rr f One volume (ten months), . . . . $1.00 lERMS:i Single copies, 15 Payable in Advance. All Students are requested to hand us matter for publication. The Alumni and ex-members of the College will favor us by send-ing information concerning their whereabouts, or any items they may think would be interesting for publication. All subscriptions and business matters should be addressed to the Husiness Manager. Matter intended for publication should be addressed to the Editor. Address, THE COLLEGE MERCURY, Gettysburg, Pa. CO/N TENTS. EDITORIALS, . 107 THE MOST PRECIOUS THING IN THE WORLD, . . . log COLLEGE LOCALS, no ALUMNI, 114 FRATERNITY NOTES, . 116 ATHLETICS, 117 TOWN AND SEMINARY, 120 LITERARY SOCIETIES, .,,,.,.,.,,. 12.1 ]\I EVER in the history of the institution has * there been as much enthusiasm displayed in athletics as this year. From the very be-ginning the interest has never once flagged, and each struggle of our foot-ball team with its rivals has but strengthened the feeling. But, notwithstanding this encouraging feature, there have been serious drawbacks to the highest development of athletics, especially this season, and the blame lies on the students in general. First in order stands the lack of an athletic field. We have been expecting material aid from some of the patrons of the college, and rightly; but there is no need of looking for the consummation of our wishes until we apply ourselves actively and individually to the task. Such an effort was to be made last year, and all the members of the Athletic Association were asked to canvass, but the plan fell through. Whose fault was it ? Next in order stands the throat enthusi-asm of many that makes them utterly oblivious of the fact that they have pocket-books. This was noticeable at the home game with F. and M. If there is one thing sure, it is that foot-ball cannot be carried on by faith and noise. Money is needed, especially the money of those who forget to pay. Self-respect, if not love for their college, should prevent such action on the part of those to whom this applies. The third hindrance is the lack of system in the business methods of the Associa-tion and the committees in charge of the finances. This is not a fault peculiar to our-selves or to athletics alone. To judge from the various comments of exchanges, it is general, but what we want is a remedy here. It is folly to expect the interest of athletics to ioS THE COLLEGE MERCURY. move on smoothly without careful planning, attention to details, and observance of the time set aside for the business meetings of the Association. Let there be more interest taken in these things. Personal, individual responsi-bility has been the lack so far—let it be so no more. THERE has been much said at different times to the effect that the future success of our college depended on better equipment and a more diversified course of study. It is true that, in these times of progress, the col-lege with the greatest number of courses, the most complete departments, and the largest corps of instructors forges ahead of her rivals in a material sense, but such advancement does not always measure the success of an in-stitution. While all these things are necessary, and must be kept up to the highest notch of efficiency, there is another, still more neces-sary, that touches the student-body more nearly. The equipment may be never so per-fect, but, if there is lack of earnest application on the part of the students, its full efficiency is lost. What is needed then is a greater sense of obligation, for present opportunity is very present duty, and duty neglected is a debt un-paid, an account dishonored. It speaks ill for the morality of the young man whose parents keep him at college, laboring under the fond delusion that he will be an honor to them, to find him scattering their money and hopes like so much sand. That young man is common enough, but he is a credit to no one and a bane' to his college. The fewer there are of such creatures within college walls the better, and the more we strive to prevent the increase of such an clement here the brighter will grow the fame of our Alma Mater. It is worth the effort, for in its wake will follow the full regard of our superiors, with that will come sclf-respect, and after these will come, as a neces-sary consequence, that much to be desired state af affairs — student self-government! j Can we not push the venture to a glorious end ? if * p\0 we not want a well-organized Press Association here ? It would add greatly to the name of our Alma Mater, and help us to bring her more prominently before the public. There were the beginnings of one last year, and its work was very encouraging, but the time has come for thorough and permanent organization. By it the various influential dailies and weeklies can be brought to publish accurate news of our doings, and thus many misconceptions be removed from the public mind. It is well known how our news is ac-credited to other colleges of almost similar name. Let a number of the students organize themselves, correspond with the city and their \ county papers, and thus rouse an interest in their own college in all parts of the State that will never die, but keep on increasing. Who- ; ever will take the initiative will surely succeed and his shadow will never grow less. * * * IN a late issue of The Wittcnberger appeared I the following resolutions passed by the Faculty, together with an expression of the appreciation of the students under its training: Resolved, That, during this college year, examinations be dispensed with, with the proviso that any student who fails , to reach a grade of 80 per cent, will be required to take ex-aminations ; andprovidedfurther, That absences which arc I not made up, and failures to recite, shall seriously detract from the term grade. Resolved, That this action shall not interfere with the right of a professor to give any class a test at any time. The editors of THE MERCURY feel sure that they voice the sentiments of the students in asking the Faculty to consider this action with I a view to adopting something similar. Vari-ous plans of this kind have been tried at many of our larger institutions with great success, and, if there is any good thing in the educa-tional line, we do not want to fail to lay hands on it and " hold fast." Under the present sys-tem, with a large class of the students, little THE COLLEGE MERCURY. 109 study is done until the close of the term. The other system will offer an incentive. May we not expect some definite action ? THE MOST PRECIOUS THING IN THE WORLD. '""TIME," Webster says, " is a particular part of duration, whether past, present, or future." This is manifestly true ; but what is the significance of " duration " here ? Turning the leaves of the dictionary we find this : " Duration ; continuance in time." Now we are back to our starting point, and have de-scribed a circle, the emblem of eternity. Evi-dently, even Webster found it a hard task to define time. We all know what it means, but have difficulty in expressing ourselves. This subtle thing that so resists all definition has a peculiar property of increasing in worth as it is used wisely; time, improved, so en-riches the possessor that all succeeding time will bring him more for its exchange. It is equally true, that time, misused, is continually falling in value, until, at last, it is exchanged at a rate much below par. Time is commonly divided into past, present, and future; but the mystic line that separates one from the other is hard to determine. Even while we say, " This is the present," it joins the past and the future takes its place. Noise-lessly, often without observation, the great j changes are made. " Still on it creeps, each | little moment at another's heels." Sometimes it passes with the speed of electricity; again, . every moment seems burdened with a weight of lead. Not only our conditions, but our characters affect the passage of time. " Time-travels in divers paces with divers persons." The past is constantly growing, and increas-ing in value. We can learn lessons from its mistakes and trials, its successes and joys. 1 But we must bear in mind that it is gone for-ever and past all recall; therefore, let it bury its dead. The future, though indefinite and intangible, ' has a special charm. It is so delightful to dream of what may come to pass in that far, sweet sometime. But day dreams, though be-witching, do not count for much in this matter-of- fact world; and, for every-day practice, " The Future is to be made, and the Present is the time to make it." We are selfish creatures, and use everything for the gain we imagine it secures. If pos-sible, we mean to gain something every day. The intention may be almost unsuspected in ourselves, but it is there, nevertheless. We constantly have a choice of many things in exchange for our time, and we take what we consider the most valuable. This is not say-ing that we always choose the best. Often our judgment is at fault; sometimes we are perverse and look no farther than present • good. This idea of choosing the best is im-portant. We cannot have all things; there-fore, we do well, if we think carefully, and then take only the best and greatest. At times we are so placed that there is little choice. Only one way is open, and we are obliged to do our unpleasant tasks, day after day. The only choice then is between fretting for what is withheld out of God's wise care for us, and patient doing whatever He gives. The drudgery that duty requires, when cheerfully done, has its own reward in the way of a special blessing. Time is used, misused, and not used. One who does not use his time is like a miser, keeping his gold hidden in a chest, and not allowing a starving beggar even a peep at its yellow brightness. He who misuses his time may be compared to a spendthrift, thinking only of the present, and regardless of the morrow. But the one who uses time is like an economical man, who buys only what he really wants, and always remembers that " A penny saved is two-pence earned." Some people, while meaning to use their time well, manage to waste a great deal of it. There is such a thing as economy of time, and it is just as important as Political Econ- no THE COLLEGE MERCURY. Dili}-. It is a sad thing to waste time, for it never, never comes back again. Surely, time is the most precious as well as the most slippery thing in the world. It is valuable, for everything that any one ever has is received in exchange for time. It is " legal tender " for knowledge, pleasure, money; for crimes, heart-aches, and tears. Some set a higher price on it than others; we know this by the different methods people have of spend-ing their days. Unlike many precious things, it is not amount, but use, that makes us rich in this treasure. " Part with it as with money, sparing; pay- No moment, lint in purchase of its worth; And what it's worth, ask death-beds; they can tell." The fact that different ones place different values upon their time is illustrated every-where, but perhaps most forcibly among a body of students. The four years of a college course are a blessing that few possess. Some of the favored few treat it in a way that at last can bring nothing but regret; some carelessly, just letting the days drift on, and some, wisely, as a sacred opportunity. There are the stud-ents who go to college because they are sent, and who are sent because something must be done with them. Perhaps they remain four years and then go home, with what? Has there been gain in knowledge? Has there been development, physical, mental, or moral ? Has some weaker brother been helped to re-sist temptation ? No. It would be better for all the rest of the students if that one had never come to them. Then there are students who study when they feel like it; who go to recitation unprepared, or worse still, prepared in a way that gives no benefit, if that suits them better; who please themselves and do not worry over anything, not even duty. Others go to the opposite extreme and study continually, forgetting that college life offers lessons which are not in books and can be learned only by personal contact with their fellows. But there are a few who are awake to ah opportunities. They not only study with their might, but take an inter-est in athletics, the work of the literary socie-ties, and, above all, each other. There is no telling what ideas revolve in your neighbor's brain until you interest yourself in him; then you may be surprised to find that he needs just you, with your help and sympathy. It is not best to work always. No one can work all the time, but some mistaken people are foolish enough to try. There is a vast difference between wasting time and playing. One of the best uses to which time can be put is to simply and heartily have a " good time," and it is not well to make the " good times " so few that we forget how to enjoy them. Every one who is living has time. It is a precious possession, and is given to us for a purpose. What is this purpose? Can it be that because of wrong doings in a former ex-istence we are given a chance for improvement here? Are these days of grace? Or is it because we have tried- to do our poor little best somewhere else that we are given this happy world in which to do better and to help others on ? Ah! there is the secret; if we only help some one else, though it be but a little, our time is well spent. God only knows why time is given to us; sometime we may learn. " Look not mournfully into the Past, it comes not back again ; wisely improve the Present, it is thine; go forth to meet the shadowy Future without fear and with a manly heart." E. M. L, '96. COLLEGE LOCALS. FRED H. BLOOMHARDT and WILMER A. HARTMAN, Editors. THE month of October usually brings with it some occasion which lingers long in the memory of the Gettysburg student. A few years ago, Comte de Paris and the sur-viving generals of the battle held a reception in Brua Chapel. Last year the " Corn Ex-change Regiment " visited the college in a body. None the less enjoyable was the re-ception tendered to the Columbia Club, of THE COLLEGE MERCURY. 111 Philadelphia, in Philo. Hall, October 7th. As the distinguished party reached the " Tiber," the campus became aglow with fire-works, while the welcome of the boys, ex-pressed by their " yells," nearly drowned the music of the Grand Army Band. Mr. Harry Olewine, '97, of Hazelton, opened the programme with a piano solo. President McKnight, in a very pleasant address, spoke the words of welcome. Mr. C. O. Shaar, '96, of Steelton, then sang a solo, after which Mr. W. H. Sellheim, '94, of Philadelphia, for the students, presented to Mrs. John Wiseman, who donated the splendid Howard clock in the tower of Recitation Hall, a large basket of roses. Mr. R. O. Moon, of the Philadelphia Bar, responded in fitting terms to the compli-ment. Other speeches were made by Corporal J. L. Smith, Director of Public Safety A. M. Beitler, Councilman Franklin M. Harris, John E. Hanifen, Dr. Lehman, and David Watts. Director Beitler was presented with a paste-board revolver with which to arm his police-men, and Corporal Sm'th with one of "Wood-ward's " famous inkstands, to be used when he writes a new volume of the history of the " Corn Exchange Regiment." Frequent inquiries have led the editors to seek information concerning the probability of securing electric lights in college. An arc light will soon dispel the darkness on the campus, but none will be placed in the build-ings and rooms, much to the disappointment of the student body, which, if allowed to de-cide it, would, we believe, to a man declare for electric lighting. The extra expense would be borne cheerfully, for then there would be no more worry and trouble with lamps. Rumor also says that a portion of the beau-tiful new power-house will be devoted to the use of the college for a course in electricity, but nothing authentic can be obtained about it. The lecture course committee of the Y. M. C. A. has been extremely fortunate in securing the " Ollie Torbett Concert Co." for October 31st. This company, it will be remembered, gave a concert here last December. In addi-tion to the Swedish Sextette, the company consists of Miss Ollie Torbett, the violinist, and Mr. Moquist, the pianist. The programme, we understand, will be given entirely in Eng-lish, or nearly so, if desired. The popular prices, 50 and 35 cents, will be charged. Every person who can do so should embrace this opportunity of hearing one of the most famous concert companies be-fore the American public to-day. We trust that they will be greeted with even a larger audience than last year. The final selection of members for the Glee Club was made on Thursday, October 19th. They have all been assigned to their respective places, and regular practice is the rule they have promised to observe. The following is the list as it stands: First Tenors. W. H. NICHOLAS, J. C. NICHOLAS, C. G. BIKLK, N. S. HEINDEL, I-'. E. FlCKINGER, W. B. DUTTF.RA, M. J. KLINE, ~\. C. BOWERS, J. W. OTT, C. J. STEI'HENSON. Second Tenors. C. NICHOLAS, W. O. IUACII. First Bass. W. A. KUMP, A. C. CARTY. Second Bass. H. R. SMITH, D. E. RUE, E. GAIil I . W. H. Nicholas has been elected leader of the Glee Club. Already the members have made great strides forward under his efficient leadership, and we are1 assured that this year's work will surpass last year's in many ways. We may congratulate ourselves on this bright outlook. Another addition has been made to the Guitar Club in the person of Stable, '97. All of the clubs are now filled. The opening concert of the season will be given November 24th, in Brua Chapel. By a notice on the bulletin-board we learn that the Prohibitionists of College are to have a preliminary oratorical contest preparatory to a grand final with the choice speakers of the various colleges of the State. Let all take part, and may the best one be chosen to rep-resent our own " Gettysburg." The Literary Society of the Preparatory Department has taken measures to establish a reading-room and library in the near future. This is a step in the right direction, and one that cannot be commended too highly. On Thursday evening, October 5th, Rev. W. E. Main, Teacher of Elocution, of Hagers- ti2 THE COLLEGE MERCURY. town, gave a free lecture on " The Chained Giant, How to Release Him." There was a fair-sized audience in Brua Chapel, which listened attentively to the many excellent points brought out by the speaker. Mr. Main desires to form a class in college, which should be largely attended. We are pleased to see the boys' old friend and janitor, Mr. Gwinn, again on the campus, after a severe attack "of malarial fever. Mr. Harlan E. Glazier, of Dryden, N. Y., formerly of Union College, is the latest acquisition to the Sophomore Class. Dr. Bikle attended the sessions of the Maryland Synod, at Baltimore, a short time ago. Miss Anna C. Karcher, of Germantown, and Miss Mary H. Cruwys, of Bryn Mawr, will be guests at the home of Dr. and Mrs. H. B. Nixon for several.months. Our campus is a favored spot. Dr. Breidenbaugh and Rev. L. S. Black-were enthusiastic spectators of the Dickinson- Gettysburg foot-ball game, while attending Synod at Carlisle. Dr. Day, of Africa, conducted Chapel exer-cises, Monday, October 9th. After these exercises an opportunity was given for asking questions concerning his work, which was fully used by the students. Mr. B. R. Lantz, '94, spent the week October 9th-16th at his home in Hagerstown, Md. He saw everything at the " great and only fair," and insists that the "Columbian Exposition of 1893 " is not in it with Hagers-town. " Matt " Kemp, the erudite manager of the observatory, wishes to announce to " all whom it may concern " that he receives visitors on Thursday night only. At a recent meeting the Class of '95 elected the following officers: President, W. A. Hart-man;' Vice-President, E. H. Wert; Secretary, J. E. Byers ; Treasurer, W. E. Apple, and Historian, F. M. Keffer. Prof. B.—" What is the meaning- of ' spor-tula'?" ' K., '95—" I think it means a picnic." " Socio" (translating "fuhr bergari wie bergufiter)—" And they rode the hill up and they rode the hill down." S., '94 (disgusted with Hardy)—" He ought to have his head rubbed before he tries to write solid analytics. Perhaps he would make it a little pla(i)ner." Prep, (translating Vergil)—" Three times—I tried to—cast—my arms about—her neck— that is as far as I got, Professor." Prof. K.—" I think that was far enough." " Sweitzer's " new instrument for measuring the moisture in the air is the " chronometer." His time in playing on his mandolin is also run by this same instrument. Dr. N. must have taken a course in poetry at Johns Hopkins besides his Ph.D. This is his latest: "And this is the force which we'll talk about later, Which piles up the water about the equator." Prof. H. to Mr. G., '94—" Mr. G.,What is a ' One-Price Store'?" Mr. G.—"A Jew store." Mr. W., '95, was engaged the other day in hunting the precipitate among the bottles. Mr. E., '95, on the evening of the reception to the Columbia Club, asked " Where that derfiVati.on was from ?" One of the " co-eds " of '97 inquired the other evening, as she went down the carnpus, "Why they never light the lamp-post any more?" We wonder who would be able to tell her? Dr. M., to a bright Junior—" With what did you acidify that ?." Junior—" ' Hydraulic ' acid." A chest of rice was received on Baltimore Hill, Friday evening, October 6th. Particulars will be given to any one calling at 17 Middle. M.*S. Q. K., '94 (imparting knowledge to a coming orator) —" In using monosyllables, you must always accent them on the first syllable." A Senior, who is quite a prodigy in natural philosophy, announces the startling informa-tion that a " horse power " is the " power of a horse." THE COLLEGE MERCURY. i r Who was the man that put a nickel in the collection-basket and took out four pennies ? Mr. N., '94, in sanitary science—" Boiling kills the life out of these here bacteria." We clip the following from the Harrisburg Telegraph: "John Hofferand , both of Harrisburg, have been taken to the State Lunatic Hospital here." Anxious student—"Shall we have Greek j to-day?" " No ; Dr. Baugher has gone away to attend j his funeral." The reading public is informed by F., '95, that the Bigloiv Papers are written in " verse and poetry." S., '94, to K., '94—" Say, Matt, where's the transom instrument ?" Pres. "Plainfield" (in society)—"We will now have a piece of music consisting of the Misses Keith and Overdear." S., '96, wants to know if the Old Testament is the only Hebrew that is extinct. Dr. H. (in Biblical)—" Who was Samuel's mother ?" R., '96—" I don't know ; but Eli was his father, and his mother used to take him a little coat eveiy year." L., '98—" If ever I join a fraternity, it will be that one with the blue and orange flag for a badge. It seems to be the biggest one around here." Y. M. C. A. NOTES. Our Y. M. C. A. continues in its usual un-obtrusive manner to keep before the minds of the students the importance and pleasure of being in the service of the Master. The topics discussed at each meeting are purely Scriptural ones, which elicit remarks from numbers of young men present, and the prayerful discus-sion of which cannot be otherwise than helpful in spiritual growth. There are now in the hands of the students, copies of the annual letter from Rev. John Aberly, the " Students' Missionary to India." The desire is there earnestly expressed that the Students' Missionary be supported en-tirely by the students, which can be done only " by co-operation and systematic, regular giving." All students will be given an oppor-tunity to aid in this most laudable undertak-ing, and it is hoped that our standard in mis-sionary work, heretofore somewhat low, may be considerably raised during the coming year. The Bible classes which have been organized meet regularly each week, and it is believed much profitable work is being done in this way. There is still ample material for addi-tional classes. At a recent business meeting three delegates were elected to represent the Y. M. C. A. at the State convention soon to be held at Wilkes- Barre. The sum of $25 was subscribed for State work. Good music is now, as ever, a prominent feature in our Y. M. C. A. devotional meet-ings. Let all students attend and help to make it better. It is a matter of comment that the new stu-dents have not been systematically canvassed to obtain their applications for membership. This is unfortunate, especially at the begin-ning of the school year, and it is hoped that the committee will soon begin and complete a thorough canvass of the building. GENERAL COLLEGE NEWS. On September 1st the thirty-fifth anniver-sary of the founding of Missionary Institute, Selin's Grove, was celebrated with appropriate exercises. The faculties of the various colleges of the land seem determined to do away with " haz-ing" altogether. Nearly every daily paper contains an account of some expulsion or dis-missal. At Princeton, three students were dis-missed and cannot enter any other college, three expelled permanently, two until January 1st, and two until March 1st, for hazing a Freshman. Professor Josiah Jackson, who has taught higher mathematics in State College for 15 years, died suddenly, October 10th, at Chester, while on a leave of absence. The college journal is an opening to the field of practical journalism, and yet there seems to be an inherent disposition on the part of most of our students to M4 THE COLLEGE MERCURY. neglect the college journal, never con-tributing anything unless almost compelled to. Such should not be the case. Students who have a college paper to support ought to take enough interest in it at least to keep it alive without being continually asked and coaxed to contribute. By mutual consent all old stale articles should be debarred from a college journal; there is certainly enough [ originality in most schools to furnish four or five literary articles a month. Fellow-students, please take notice and prepare something now, that you may be ready to answer " yes " when the hustler comes around.—The Midland. In a college in Western Pennsylvania it is customary for the Junior Class to furnish music for the Senior address. On a recent occasion as the Senior Class was marching to the plat-form headed by the President of the college, the Juniors began, " See that mighty host ad-vancing, Satan leading on."—Ex. Of President Cleveland's cabinet officers, Gresham graduated at Bloomington Univer-sity; Lamont'and Morgan, Union; Smith, Union, Ga.; Olney, Brown; Herbert, Univer-sity of Virginia; Bissell, Yale; Carlisle re-ceived a common school education.— The Occi-dent. Last year the United States spent $155,- 000,000 for education, while great Britain spent S}5,000,000, and France only $25,000,000.— Ex. HORSE POWER. 'Tis strange, to say the least, In this advancing hour, The grinding mill of college Is still run by horse power.—Brunonian. Two Chinese women have taken the exami-nation for admission to the medical depart-ment of the University of Michigan.—The (Occident. Freshman year—" Comedy of Errors." Sophomore year'—" Much Ado About Nothing." Junior year—"As You Like It." Senior year—"All's Well that Ends Well." —Ex. Nearly half of the men who have graduated at Monmouth College have selected their j wives from the girls who were with them in > college.—The Occident. ALUMNI. FRANK E. FICKINGER, Editor. '39. The children of Loysville Orphan Home are gathering funds for the purpose of erecting a monument to the founder of the Home—Rev. Father Willard. They have al-ready contributed $10 themselves, and will be very grateful for every assistance ren-dered them. Address Charles A. Widle, Superintendent, Tressler Home, Loysville, Perry County, Pa. '41. Rev. Dr. E. Miller has resigned the Lutheran pastorate at Shrewsbury, Pa., to take effect April 1st, 1894. '41. Rev. Dr. M. J. Allcman recently dedi-cated a neat little church near Roundtown, York County, Pa., which he is serving as pas-tor pro tern. The church is in a live Lutheran community, and ouglit to flourish. '53. Rev. P. Bergstresser, D. D., is now to be addressed at Rockwood, Pa., where he located a few days since. '55. Dr. Huber will preach on next Sunday at the dedication of Messiah Lutheran Church, Philadelphia, Pa., of which he was formerly the pastor, and of which Rev. M. H. Valen-tine, '82, is now the pastor. Dr. Valentine, '50, and Prof. Charles H. Huber, '92, will also take part in the ceremonies of the week. '57. Dr. H. L. Baugher assisted, on the 22cl ult, in the dedication of the new Lutheran Church of the West Fairview charge, near Harrisburg, Pa., of which Rev. Nicholas is pastor. '57. Rev. J. A. Earnest, D. D., of Mifflin-burg, Pa., was elected president of the Central Pennsylvania Synod, at its recent session at Bellefonte, Pa. '60. Rev. George U. Wenner, D. D., of Christ Lutheran Church, New York city, celebrated the silver jubilee of his ordination and the twenty-fifth anniversary of his pas-torate on October 22d. A reception was tendered him by his congregation on the fol-lowing Monday evening. '63. Rev. Dr. Wolf delivered the address at the laying of the corner-stone of the St. James THE COLLEGE MERCURY. ii5 Lutheran Chapel at Frederick, Md., on Sunday afternoon. '67. The Lutheran Board of Publication have extended a call to Rev. Charles S. Albert, 1). D., pastor of St. Mark's Lutheran Church, of Baltimore, to become Literary Editor. Dr. Albert has accepted the position and resigned his present field, to take effect January 1st. '69. At Penbrooky a few miles northeast of Harrisburg, Pa., a new congregation has been organized by Rev. W. L. Heisler. A lot has been secured on which it is proposed to erect a $5,000 brick church. It will only be a matter of a few years when Penbrook will be part of Harrisburg. '70. Rev. J. M. Reimensnyder and family, of Milton, Pa., are greatly bereaved by the I death of their daughter, Miss Anna C, who was taken from them recently. Dr. Baugher officiated at the funeral ceremonies. '72. Rev. John Brubaker, while his wife has been lying- ill in Gettysburg, has been serving the Mt. Joy congregation near town. '72. Rev. J. H. Leeser presented strong petitions to the West Penna. Synod for restor-ation to the ministry, from which he has been deposed, but Sjmod refused to reinstate him. '74. The Rev. C. M. Stock, pastor of St. Mark's Lutheran Church, of Hanover, was recently surprised by a gift from his congrega-tion of a purse containing money to defray expenses to the World's Fair. '74. Rev. J. A. Wirt, of Hughesville, Pa., has enlarged his lecture-room and dedicated the same on October 22d. Dr. E. J. Wolf, of the Seminary, took part in the dedication cere-monies. '75. Rev. M. L. Beard, for the last six years paster of the Boonsboro' charge, Md., has been elected pastor of the Middletown charge in the same State as successor to Rev. P. Bergstresser, D. D. '75. Rev. J. Milton Snyder has resigned as pastor of the Funkstown (Md.) charge, resig-nation taking effect October 1st, 1893. '75. The First Lutheran congregation, of Altoona, Pa., of which Rev. E. D. Weigle is pastor, has been offered $45,000 for their pres-ent church property. They own a lot on another street, and will probably build a new church next summer. 'jy. Mr. Benjamin K. Miller, Jr., Esq., of Milwaukee, Wis., has declined the offer of the professorship of English ' and American law in the Imperial Japanese University at Tokio. 'JJ. Rev. C. S. Trump barely escaped being elected President of the Maryland Synod of the Lutheran Church, recently in session in Baltimore. 'jy. Rev. J. J. Young, D. D., pastor of St. John's Lutheran Church, New York city, has entered upon his duties there and was installed on Sunday, October 22d. Receptions were held on Monday and Tuesday evenings following. '']']. Rev. H. B. Wile, of Carlisle, is now, and has been for quite a while, preaching to the Indians of the Indian Training School every Sunday afternoon. 'So. Rev. J. A. Metzger, of Hanover, was elected Secretary of the West Penna. Synod, which convened a short time ago in Carlisle. '82. Rev. H. H. Weber, General Secretary of the Church Extension Board, took ill at the meeting of the Central Pennsylvania Synod at Bellefonte, Pa. '84. M. D. Detweiler, Esq., of Harrisburg, Pa., was complimented by the Grand Jury of the September Quarter Sessions as follows : " District-Attorney Detweiler by his skill and ability, energy and perseverance in bringing criminals to the bar of justice for prompt trial, his untiring industry in the methodical ar-rangements and management of the multitude of cases that are pressed upon the attention of the court and grand jury, by which time and expense are economized, has gained for him-self, not only our thanks but the gratitude of the public." '85. Rev. H. M. Heilman has taken charge of a new Lutheran Mission in Altoona, Pa. '86. Rev. Prof. O. G. Klinger, of the Pre-paratory Department, took a trip to the World's Fair about the middle of October. '87. Rev. Sydney E. Bateman's congrega-tion, All Saints' Lutheran Church, of Phila-delphia, Pa., are about to erect a beautiful and commodious chapel on their lot recently pur chased. n6 THE COLLEGE MERCURY. '88. Rev. Leander Goetz, of Newberry, Pa., was married lately to Miss Rebecca Lucas, of East Carver, Mass. '89. Rev. C. B. Etter, of the Second Church, of Akron, O., has already a membership of 62. '89. Rev. W. L. Rutherford, who resigned as pastor of St. Mark's, Steelton, Pa., is re-considering the step, as his congregation unanimously refused to accept his resignation. '89. Rev. John VVeidley has been doing ex-cellent work as pastor of Bethany Mission Church at Pittsburgh, Pa., constantly increas-ing his membership. '90. Chas. Fager is filling the position of Professor of Chemistry and Physiology in the Harrisburg High School. '93. Mr. A. C. Hain is teaching Latin at Hartwick Seminary and at the same time pur-suing a course in theology in the same insti-tution, and is not assistant professor of Ger-man as stated in our last. We beg the gentle-man's pardon. '93. J. Ranson Plank and W. H. Deardorff are attending Jefferson Medical College, Phil-adelphia. '94. John Rice is employed in Altoona, Pa., on the City Passenger Railway. '95. Mr. Ivan Hoff, now studying law at Westminster, Md., spent a few days in our midst recently, witnessing the F. and M. foot-ball game on Saturday, October 14th. '95. Mr. Luther H. Waring left New York September 30th, on the North German Lloyd steamship, " Elbe," for Bremen. He expects to remain abroad two years, studying at Leip-sic University and traveling in Great Britain, France, Italy, Greece, Switzerland, Egypt, Palestine, etc., and hopes to cover Germany itself pretty thoroughly. F-RATE-RNITy MOTES. PAUL W. ROLLER, Editor. PHI KAPPA PSI. Bro. Garrett B. Levan, of Harrisburg, spent a few days recently in our midst. Bro. Horace Witman left school to take in the sights of the World's Fair for several weeks. Bro. Carroll Graff, '97, was initiated October 12th. . Bro. Howard Sadtler, of Baltimore, paid us a flying visit not long ago. A new walk has been placed in front of our chapter-house, and interior improvements will begin shortly. Bro. Bowers, '93, has returned to Seminary Our chapter now numbers nine active mem-bers. PHI GAMMA DELTA. Bro. Madara, '95, has entered the College of Physicians and Surgeons at Baltimore in-stead of the University of Pennsylvania, as stated in our last issue. Bro. G. Baum, '93, is pursuing a course in architecture at the University of Pennsylvania. Bro. Chas. S. Albert,'67, of Baltimore, Md., has been elected editor-in-chief of the Luth-eran Publication Society. Bro. Huber, '92, preached in the Messiah Lutheran Church of Philadelphia, on the 15th in st. Bro. Herr, '97, recently passed a few days with friends at York, Pa. Bro. Anstadt, '90, was licensed by the West Pennsylvania Synod at its recent session. The marriage of Bro. Blint, '90, to Miss Emma A. Munro took place in the First Bap-tist Church at Lock Haven, Pa., on the 26th inst. We" were pleased to see Bro. Garland in our midst recently. The National Convention of Phi Gamma Delta was held at Minneapolis, Minn., on the 18th inst. SIGMA CHI. Our chapter has been greatly strengthened by the addition of four brothers : Monath, '97; Bixler, Jr., '98; Sigafoos, '94, and Olewine, '97- Bro. M. V. Miller, '95, is studying medicine under a physician at Gilberts, Pa., preparatory to entering the Medico-Chirurgical Institute, of Philadelphia. THE COLLEGE MERCURY. 117 Bros. McPherson, '83, and Loudon, '96, represented the local chapter at the Congress (if College Fraternities at the World's Fair. Bro. Stuckenberg, '96, has engaged in busi-ness at Cincinnati, O. Bro. Fox, '95, of Washington, D. C, spent a few days with college friends at the opening of the present term. Bro. Hays, Dickinson, '94, and Manager of the Dickinson Foot-ball Team, was the guest of Bro. McPherson on Saturday, October 7th. Bro. Humrichouse, '97, has entered the business firm of his father at Baltimore. Bro. H. M. Wolf, '84, of Mifflinburg, Pa., visited the family of Bro. Bikle last month. Pro. Monath recently spent a few days with friends at Hagerstown and his parents at Chambersburg. Bros. Bixler, Jr., and Bixler, Sr., and Ole-wine spent Tuesday, October 17th, in Balti- j more. Bros. McPherson and Zeigenfuss,'66, assisted in re-habilitating the Alpha-Rho Chapter of our fraternity at Lehigh University on the evening of September 14th, 1893. Bro. Frank Hersh, '92, who has been spend-ing his vacation at his home in Gettysburg, has returned to his duties at Pittsburgh, Pa. PHI DELTA THETA. Bro. Shaw, who did not return at the begin-ning of this year, paid a visit to our chapter recently. Bro. Ehrhart, '93, has been engaged to lead the Mandolin Club. Bro. Van Camp, '94, and Eckels, '95, paid a visit to the Dickinson chapter September 30th. The convention which was to have been held this month at Syracuse, N. Y., has been postponed one year at the request of the N. Y. Alpha, owing to its financial stringency. ALPHA TAU OMEGA. Bro. G. M. Brown, '85, paid the chapter a short visit recently. Bro. Brown has been seriously ill during the summer, but has re-gained his health again. Bro. Bacon, '94, now of the firm A. D. Bacon & Co., Harrisburg, Pa., recently spent a day in Gettysburg, looking up old acquaint-ances. Bro. George Kyner, attorney-at-law, Cham-bersburg, Pa., made a short business call in Gettysburg recently. Bro. W. H. Menges, '96, was royally enter-tained by the N. Y. Beta Theta Chapter at Cornell while on a visit to Ithaca with the foot-ball eleven; also by the Penna. Tau Chapter at the University' of Pa. ATHLETICS. HENRY E. CLARE, Editor. THE College foot-ball team opened its. season very creditably, September 30th, by a well-contested game with Cornell Uni-versity, at Ithaca, N. Y. The Cornell players expected a hard contest, but they did not ex-pect the Gettysburg team to plow repeatedly through their heavy rush-line, making at times gains, of 10 and 15 yards. This was " the revelation of the surprising strength of their opponents," as the Cornell Daily Sun puts it, and necessitated, as the Ithaca daily journal said, " the hardest kind of work to prevent them from scoring." The team played with a vim and determination that surprised the spectators and brought forth repeated ap-plause. The game was called at 3.13 P.M. Gettys-burg put the ball into play, and advanced it about 20 yards into Cornell's territory. Here the ball was lost and forced back. The ball then passed from one side to the other, some-times being in Cornell's territory, and then again in Gettysburg's. Several times it looked like a touch-down for Gettysburg, but each time excellent tackling on Cornell's part pre-vented it. Then Cornell having the ball, passed it to Robbins, who tried to run around the end. He was tackled by Moser, who re-ceived such an ugly gash above the eye that he was partially stunned, and was unable to hold him. Thus, having a clear field, he made Cornell's first touch-down at the end of 23 minutes. Goal was kicked. In the second half, Cornell succeeded only by the most desperate work in making two touch-downs. Probably it was this work that ixS THE COLLEGE MERCURY. Harper s Weekly referred to when it said: " Cornell was called upon to do actually desperate work to keep the Gettysburg team ' from scoring." They failed goal on one of the two touch-downs, making the score 16-0. Twenty-five minute halves were played. The team was well pleased with its delightful trip, and the treatment received while at Ithaca. The result of the Cornell game sent a thrill of enthusiasm through the boys, and all those who love their Alma Mater and have her welfare at heart. All were proud that it had been so conclusively proved that Gettysburg College could, in some respects, rank with the best institutions of the land. The feeling of those days of elation are beyond description. But the joy and pride were all short-lived and destined to be blasted. The Faculty of that institution, the Seminary, which we have lately learned to regard with awe, issued a decree which caused dismay throughout the camp. It was to the effect that no Seminarian would be allowed to play foot-ball on the College team. Coming as it did on the eve of one of our hardest contests, it was doubly disastrous to our hopes: Three old experienced players, the captain, quarter-back, and right guard, were compelled to leave the team, their places being filled by inexperienced players. The prospects, which before seemed so auspicious, now assumed a far different aspect. Not-withstanding this disastrous set-back, the team decided to fulfill all its engagements, and re-organized at once. The next game scheduled was with the University of Pennsylvania, at Philadelphia, Fa., October 14th. The game was called at 2.30 P. M. From the beginning, the 'Varsity team had things its own way. The Gettys-burg team, in its crippled condition, was no equal to a team whose average weight was easily 30 pounds more than its own, and one that had been in training for several months. Nevertheless they made a stubborn resistance, and forced the 'Varsity team to work hard for what they got. The 'Varsity team succeeded in running up a score of 74-0, which result may be ascribed to the action spoken of in the previous paragraph, namely, the Seminary de-cree. Thirty-minute halves were played. Umpire, Buehler. Referee, Schoff. The next game on the schedule was the one with Dickinson, at Carlisle, October 1 ith. The team left here on the morning of the nth, and played the game in the afternoon, begin-ing at 2.30. The Dickinson boys turned out in great crowds to see the game, expecting this contest to be Gettysburg's Waterloo. They counted only on the crippled condition of Gettysburg's team, forgetting the determina-tion and endurance of the " High-Water Mark " men, although wounded. The Gettys-burg team went into the contest with that spirit which has characterized all its games. They knew that Dickinson had been espe-cially preparing for this game, and to this end had procured outside help. But, notwithstand-ing this, and the disadvantage of playing on a strange ground, the Gettysburg team, by its superior playing and training, rolled up a.score of 24 to 14, in their favor. Nothing could have been more of a sur-prise to the Dickinson boys. They had been confident of success, and were totally un-prepared for anything else. A more despond-ent lot of fellows than they could scarcely have been found as they, thoroughly crest-fallen, wended their way in groups to their re-spective hiding-places. Not only were the Dickinson boys humiliated, but all their sym-pathizers, and on the following morning Dr. Reid, their president, strictly charged the students, assembled in chapel, that if they did not defeat Gettysburg in the return game on November 4th, the team would not be allowed to play any longer. We certainly pity the boys, and would be a little easy with them in the return game, but we have a reputation to sustain, and therefore warn them not to come over here with as much confidence as they evinced on the nth. By taking our advice their disappointment will not be so keen. A royal reception awaited the team on its return. When the news of victory reached Gettysburg, the students at once prepared a glorious welcome for the victors. As soon as the train stopped, they were carried to a con-veyance and hauled in triumphal procession through the town to the music of the band. Drs. McKnight and Bikle delivered speeches on the occasion. October 14th witnessed a far different scene. It was the first game played on the home grounds this season. The Franklin and Mar-shall team came here with the expectation of rolling up a nice score, but they also were destined to feel the pangs of disappointment. THE COLLEGE MERCURY. 119 The game was an exceptionally hard one, the ball being kept near the centre of the field throughout most of the game. Gettysburg succeeded in keeping it on F. & M.'s side of the centre line most of the time. F. & M. scored a touch-down in the first half by what the spectators said was a forward pass, but this was not recognized by the umpire, an F. & M. man. In the second half, the ball was kept almost continually in F. & M.'s territory, and several times the ball was dangerously near its goal, but was fumbled. Gettysburg scored one touch-down making the score 4-4. The F. & M. boys were glad to escape with this, as it looked very bad for them in the sec-ond half, and several touch-downs for Gettys-burg were only prevented by unfortunate fum-bles. The game was very interesting and showed up some fine playing. A very strong second team has been organ-ized by Captain Emmert, which promises to do some exceljent work. The excellent work of the team this season can be attributed to the efficient coaching of Mr. Harry Buehler. He certainly deserves the thanks of the college for his interest and labors. Although much interest is manifested by the students in foot-ball, yet the support which it receives falls far short of what it should be. If the home games arc not better supported by the students, this season will be, financially, a failure. Two-thirds of the crowd on the field October 14th were there without tickets. None should be allowed on the field without a ticket. One who claims to be interested in athletics should be ashamed to show his face on the grounds without one. Let each one lend his aid in making this a profitable season. The action of the West Pennsylvania Synod, asking that the students of the college be pre-vented from playing foot-ball, caused not a little surprise when it was announced. Coupled as it is with several other recommendations, and passed at a time when a full vote of the Synod could not be had, it is not such a sur-prising thing. It is a satisfaction to us that its advocates did not dare to bring it up earlier, but chose a time when all such measures are rushed through, when only a partial vote can be had. Again it is a satisfaction that they so openly evinced their hostility to all modern im-provements and movements which have brought this college abreast with the times, and not only to foot-ball. The surprising feature of the request is that the ministers of this Synod should for a mo-ment suppose the students of this age to be satisfied with the sports ©r so-called sports which they delighted in while at college. The carrying of calves to the third and fourth stories of the dormitory and letting them jump out the windows, raids on farm-houses, and carrying away wagons, fodder, etc., and plac-ing them in the halls of the building, the blow-ing up of professors, and other puerile sports too numerous to mention are above the dig-nity of the student of 1893. Again, it is surprising that these ministers with their broad scope of vision should fail to see the advantage derived from foot-ball, both for the college and for the student. Numerous benefits could be enumerated, but they are all so apparent to the mind disposed to be reasonable that it is unnecessary. In conclu-sion, we will say that no fear is entertained for the perpetuity of foot-ball at this college. The students of the institution have too much con-fidence in the intelligence and reasonableness of the Board of Trustees to suppose for a mo-ment that they would do anything detrimental to the college or anything which would reflect on their judgment and wisdom. A game of foot-ball was played with the Bucknell University team, Saturday, Septem-ber 21st, at Lewisburg, Pa. The teams lined up 10.30 A. M. Bucknell won the toss and took the ball. By repeated runs around the ends and through tackles, the Bucknell boys succeeded in making a touch-down in a few minutes. One more touch-down was made by them in the first half, making the score 12-0 in their favor. In the second half, Gettysburg took the ball and forced it almost to the goal-line, where it was lost by fumbling. Several times Gettysburg carried the ball near the goal, but it was lost each time through the careless playing of some of the team. In this half Bucknell made another touch-down. About four minutes before the end of the half, Buck-nell had the ball near the centre. Smith took it and kicked it near the goal-line, but here it was fumbled again, and Bucknell secured the ball. Smith again received the ball, and made a drop kick from the field as time was 120 THE COLLEGE MERCURY. called. Thus the score stood 23-0 in favor of Bucknell. Owing to the crippled condition of the team. Manager Kloss had canceled this game, but the Bucknell manager protested so vehe-mently, and so many at home were dissatis-fied, that the only thing to be done was to go and do as well as possible. The two half-backs had been sick the whole of the previous week, and, for the same reason, the line was broken up, leaving the team without practice. This sad condition would not have prevented them from scoring against Bucknell, or prob-ably winning the game, had not the ball been fumbled so frequently by several of the players. This became a feature of the game, and discouraged the better players. Only the six first points were really earned ones for Bucknell, the others being given to them by this careless playing. Bucknell's team was probably 15 pounds heavier on an average than ours, yet in bucking the line our team : was the superior. The team is being changed somewhat, and better results are looked for on the 28th. TOWN AAJTD SEMINTVRg ROSCOE C. WRIGHT, Editor. XOWN. REV. JOEL SVVARTZ, 1). D" has resigned as pastor of St. James Lutheran Church, in which charge he has labored faithfully for 12 years. Action will betaken on his resigna-tion at the congregational meeting in January. The Potomac Synod of the Reformed Church convened in the Reformed Church of Gettysburg, Rev. T. J. Barkley, pastor loci, on October 17th. The Synodical sermon was preached by Rev. J. G. Noss, of Silver Run, Md. On Sunday evening, (Ictober 8th, Ur. Day, our missionary from Africa, gave an excellent address in the College Church on the work which is being done in the African Mission field. Dr. Day sails for Africa the last of ()ctober. The members and friends of the 6th Penna. Cavalry visited the field of Gettysburg, Sep-tember 30th, in charge of General Leiper. In the evening a camp-fire was held in the court-house, at which a programme consisting of songs, addresses, and humorous recitations was rendered. Captain Long conducted the party over the field. Geo. J. Benrier, Esq., and Hon. David Wills, attorneys for Win. H. Tipton, the battle-field photographer, have filed a plaintiff's statement claiming $10,000 damages against Gen. Daniel E. Sickles. The claim grew out of the diffi-culty caused by Tipton's attempt to photo-graph some New York regiments last July, when Sickles interfered. S. McSwope, Esq., has been retained as counsel by General Sickles. The case will come up at the November court. On October 5th a large flag-staff was dedi-cated at General Meade's headquarters, on Cemetery Ridge. The pole is the tallest in the State, being 150 feet high. It is made of Oregon pine, and was turned at Cramp's ship-yards, Philadelphia. The services were held under the auspices of the Loyal Legion Commandry of Pa. The following programme was rendered. Salute—Light Battery C ,. 3d U. S. Artillery. Music—"Hail Columbia," ' . G. A. R. Band. Prayer—Chaplain, H. C. McCook. Address Brevet-Major-Gen. D. McM. Gregg. Address, . . Governor Pattison. Unfurling of flag by Master George Gordon Meade, grand-son of General Meade. Salute, Light Battery C. After the dedicatory services the veterans and visitors visited the battle-field in charge of Captain Minnich, returning to Harrisburg in the evening. The members of the 21st Penna. Cavalry arrived here October 5th, from their reunion at Chambersburg. They dedicated a monu-ment on the Baltimore Pike, at which Major Robert Bell delivered one of the addresses/ Work on the power-house at the corner of Washington and Railroad Streets, which was suspended for some time, has been resumed. Arc lights have been put at all street cross-ings, and in many of the stores. Electric cars leave the town for Round Top every half-hour. The opposition to the road which was manifest last spring has subsided, and the electric rail-way is now looked upon in its proper light as an improvement to the village of Gettysburg. The old veterans have not torn up the road as THE COLLEGE MERCURY. 121 some apparently misguided persons wished them to do, but rather consider it a great privi-lege to visit the historic battle-field for a sum much less than that charged during the past years. Rev. Harpster and wife, late of Canton, Ohio, visited friends in Gettysburg the first of the month. Rev. Mr. Harpster resigned the pastorate of the Lutheran Church of Canton, to enter the India Mission Field. SEMINARY. Rev. Archibald E. Dietz, a member of the class of '92, and at present pastor of the Luth-eran Church at Rhinebeck, N. Y., was mar-ried October 18th, to Miss Carolien Wells Secor of that place. THE MERCURY extends congratulations. Dr. J. G. Morris will give his lectures on Science and Revelation this fall instead of next spring. The contract for the new ' building will be given out October 21st. The number of students this year is 74, as compared with 68 last year. This' is the larg-est number in the history of the institution. All of the rooms in the dormitory are occu-pied, many of the s'tudents rooming in town. At the recent session of the Central Penn-sylvania Synod held at Bellefonte, Messrs. John M. Axe, Ed. Wolf, Frank Snyder, Samuel Ulrich, W. C. Dunlap, and Bruce Wolf were licensed. Rev. McGill of the class of '93 is studying law in Louisville, Kentucky. The following gentlemen were licensed at the recent session of the Maryland Synod: G. Albert Getty, A. Pohlmann, A. O. Mullen, C. L. Ritter, W. G. Slifer, Henderson Miller, Henry H. Sloop, and A. C. Stup. Revs. J. F. W. Kitzmeyer, of Davis, W. Va., and W. H. Minnick, of Middletown, Md., were ordained. Rev. George H. Reen, of Mansfield, Ohio, was married October 18th, to Miss Ida Bell Gilbert, at the home of the bride's parents, Captain and Mrs. Calvin Gilbert, on Cham-bersburg Street, Gettysburg. May happiness attend them ! August Pohlmann, of the present Senior Class, has been accepted by the Board of Foreign Missions to go as a missionary to Africa. He has taken up his residence in Bal-timore in order to attend medical lectures in the University of Maryland, and will read his last year of theology in connection with it. Dr. Day now has the promise of the helper he asked for while here. The Seminary Faculty has adopted the plan of marking attendance at chapel exercises in the morning. It would not do to give the reason for this action, but there is »a con-spicuous absence of the we-can-do-as-we-please air from the faces of the theologucs. The contracts have been awarded for the new Seminary building, and ground was broken on Thursday, October 26th. The building surpasses every one's conception in its completeness and adaptability. In addition to the chapel, library, and other rooms, it is to contain what has long been wished for, a gymnasium and its bathing adjuncts. LITE-R7VRLI SOeiETIES. WALDO D. MAYNARD, Editor. A GREAT deal of interest is now mani-fested in certain colleges in inter-collegi-ate debates and oratorical contests. In various colleges in Illinois, Ohio, and Wisconsin it is considered a greater honor to win a debate than to be victorious in an athletic contest. The University of Wisconsin has two socie-ties which have had men training all summer for a joint debate. Why would it not be a good plan for Phrena. and Philo. to pursue some such plan as this ? By taking the best debaters for the contest, it would have a tendency to arouse greater interest in debate on the part of those who are inclined to disregard this branch of society work. The societies might have one of these joint debates each term or oftener if they proved a success. We have an oratorical con-test, why not have a joint debate? We think, judging from the experiences of others, our efforts could be turned in this direction with a great deal of profit. Why could we not have in this State an inter-collegiate debate? Harvard and Yale 122 THE| COLLEGE MERCURY. have such a contest each year, and likewise many of the Western colleges. The interest in athletics, which seems to be the predominant spirit in colleges of to-dav, might be replaced during this season of the year by something which would tend to awaken a greater interest in literary pursuits. We often hear the statement made that the true purpose for which one goes to college is lost sight of. We fear that often there are sufficient reasons for such remarks, and there is among a certain class no little prejudice against sending a young man to college. We think that some of this opposition might be overcome if the educational part of college life was brought more directly before the public. We have a number of smaller colleges in the State, and provision could easily be made for such contests. They have been found to accomplish wonderful results in other States.- Why shall not the literary societies of Gettysburg College be the originators of an inter-collegiate debate? If we cannot extend it throughout the whole State, let it be con-fined to those colleges which are a compara-tively short distance from each other. PHENA. NOTES. The first of Phrena.'s series of meeting's for the consideration of historical subjects was held October 6th. The hall was filled both by the students and a goodly number of people from town. All were well pleased with the pro-gramme and the manner in which each per-formed his part. The subject on this occasion was " The American Revolution." The following is the programme : (Iration—" The Sowing of the Seed," . . MUSIC. Essay—" Lexington—its significance," . Recitation—" The Declaration of Inde-pendence, . S. C. Burger. Essay—" Washington at Valley Forge," . . H. W. Shinier. MUSIC. Recitation—" Resistance to British Aggres-sion," L. C. Manges. Oration—" Arnold, the Traitor," . Lafayette—A Character Sketch, . MUSIC. Essay—" Franklin at the Court of France,1 Recitation—" The American Sailor," . . Oration—"Our Heritage," MUSIC. R. C. Wright. I. O. Moser. W. D. Ernest. E. M. Stahl. W. C. Spayde. P. D. Hoover. J. W. Ott. Messrs. Ireland and Turnbaugh, '97, have been elected members of the society. The following were recently elected officers of Phrena.: President, Lantz, '94; Vice-Presi-dent, Wright, '95 ; Recording Secretary, Moser, '96; Critics, Bell, '95 ; Stahl and Barndt, 94; Librarian, Leidich, '95 ; Assistant Librarian, Ott, '97 ; Monitor, Biklc, '97 ; Chaplain, Bru-baker, '96. A committee has been appointed to re-cata-logue the books in the Library,. PHILO. NOTES. On September 29th, the society rendered its second programme in its series of American Author's Evenings. Those who participated in the exercise did credit both to themselves and the society. Philo. is to be congratulated upon the success which has characterized these special meetings. They are not only entertaining but there is a great deal of instruction and information to be gathered from them. We give below the programme rendered at that time. Whittier was the author under consideration. Vocal Solo, C. F. Wiest. Selection—" Proem," C. II. Brosius. Essay—" Effect of .Religious Faith and Training on Whittier's Career," . . . . M. Kemp. Essay—" Mo.'g Megone," N. C. Barbehefm Selection—'!' Toussaint L'Ouverture," . . R. W. Mottern. Selection—"The Hero," . U. K. Apple. Piano Solo, H. Olewine. Essay—" The Pennsylvania Pilgrim," . . C. F. Wiest. Selection—" The Hive at Gettysburg," . . C. W. Loudon. Essay—"Snow Bound," E. H. Wert. Selection—" Barclay of Ury," W. H. Sellheim. Selection—" My Soul and I," M. G. Rietz. Criticism of Whittier, J. S. English. Flute Solo, H. R. Smith. Debate. instrumental Duet, Messrs. Erb and Ibach. October 13th Philo. elected the following officers: President, Bloomhardt, '94; Vice- President, Rietz, '95 ; Recording Secretary, Manifold, '96; Corresponding Secretary, Criljy, '95 ; Marshal, Abel, '97 ; Critics, Miss Himes, '94, Sigafoos and Allison, '94. The following gentlemen have been elected members of the society: Auckerman, '97; Beltzhoover, '97 ; A. B. and C. R. Coble, '97 ; Wheeler, '97, Witman, '95, and Keffer, '95. The re-cataloguing of the Library has been completed. Under the new system, one can learn at once if the Library contains the book for which he is looking. ADVERTISEMENTS. Wanamaker's. PROFESSIONAL CARDS. What makes Wanamaker's so dis-tinctively Wanamaker's is the spirit that actuates the merchandising—all the time striving to serve our customers better and better, shortening the road from producer to consumer and saving to patrons every possible penny of cost. How well we have done it is a matter ! of history, how well we shall do is what concerns us. The look is always ahead. \ Every part of the store shows points of unusual interest. Sporting Goods. Things for wear. Things for home helping. And there are lower-than-ever prices on many of them. JOHN WANAMAKER. SEND FOR CATALOGUE OF 1 Uth^VTTT^ yOUJSG IflQIZS* NEAR. BALTIMORE, 1VID. This widely known, thoroughly equipped, and extensively patronized School will open its 41st Annual Sesson, Sept. 13th, 1893. All the Departments of a High Grade Seminary. Address, Rev. J. H. TURNER, A. M., Principal, LUTHERVILLE, MD. CHRty-iES S. DUflCR^, '82, ATTORNEY AND COUNSELLOR-AT-LAW, Baltimore Street, . GETTYSBURG, PA. CHflS. E. STAHliH, '87, ATTORNEY-AT-LAW, Baltimoi-e Stx-eet, GETTYSBURG, PA. DR. CHAS, B, STOUFFER, OFFICE, STAR AND SENTINEL BUILDING, GETTYSBURG. PA. fj fiber's Y)vlio Store, Baltimore Street, GETTYSBURG, PA. Prescriptions Carefully Compounded. ISatest Styles ii} Hats, Shoes, AND Gents' paraishings, R. M. ELLIOTT'S. N. B.—Stiff Hats made to Fit the Head in two minutes. A. D. BUEHLER&CO., Headquarters for Stationery and Blank Books. LOWEST CASH PRICES. VI ADVERTISEMENTS. DECKER BROTHERS' PIANOS. Absolute Evenness of Touch, Richness and Brilliancy of Tone, Extraordinary Singing Quality, Unequaled Workmanship, Power of Standing in Tune longer than any other Piano made, are among the characteristic qualities of DECKER BROS. PIANOS, 33 Union Square, flerja York. Used in Philo. Hall at Gettysburg College. GO TO C.A.BLOCHER'S Jeujelpy Stove iov Souvenir *" Spoons, Sword Pins, &c. ReP^nS a SPecraTtLj. Post Office Corner, Centre Square. DKEKA Fine Stationery and Engraving House, 1121 Chestnut St., Philadelphia. COLLEGE INVITATIONS^ ! WEDDING INVITATIONS CLASS STATIONERY i VISITING CARDS SOCIETY STATIONERY BANQUET MENUS PROGRAMMES, BADGES DIPLOMAS AND MEDALS STEEL PLATE ENGRAVING FOR FRATERNITIES, CLASSES AND COLLEGE ANNUALS. All work is executed in the establishment under the personal supervis-ion of Mr. Dreka, and only in the best manner. Unequaled facilities and long practical experience enable us to produce the newest styles and most artistic effects, while our reputation is a guarantee of the quality of the productions of this house. ADVERTISEMENTS. vn R. H. REININGER, Merchant * Tailor. & * % & THE BEST WORK AT THE LOWEST PRICES. Suits from $12.00 to $40.00. Pants from $4.00 to $12.00. NEXT DOOR TO POST OFFICE, UP-STAIRS. CENTRAL SQUARE. PETE THORNE, Shaving $ Hair Cutting Parlors. Pl-RST eUASS ARTISTS. CENTRAL SQUARE. FLEMMING & TROXEL, Billiard AND Pool "Rooms. BALTIMORE STREET. flJVIOS ECI^E^T, DEALER IN Hats, Shirts, Shoes, Ties, Umbrellas, . Gloves, Satchels, Hose, Pocket Books, Trunks, Telescopes, Rubbers, Etc., Etc. AMOS ECKERT. SPECIRIi TO STUOEflTS. Fine Tailoring. JOSEPH JACOBS, Merchant Tailor, Chambersburg Street, (Below Eagle Hotel) GETTYSBURG, PA. Red Front Cigar Store . R. H. RUPP, Proprietor. JSlo. 8 Baltimore St., Gettysburg. The place for a fine Cigar or a good chew. Solid Havana filler, 5 for 25c. An elegant article. A FINE ASSORTMENT OF PIPES AND SMOKING MIXTURES. V11I ADVERTISEMENTS. ESTABLISHED 1876. PE/NKOSE MgE-RS, YVZ/rroindKER ™ JEWELER. Liat*ge Stock of Ldatehes, Clocks, Jexxtelfy, ete., on Hand. That Man is Out GETTYSBURG SOUVENIR SPOONS. COLLEGE SOUVENIR SPOONS. WHO BUYS HIS BASE BALL, . BICYCLE, . . LAWN TENNIS <-^- ^£-a OUTING, YACHTING AND BOATINQ SUPPLIES, 10 BALTIMORE STREET, GETTYSBURG, PA. Students' Headquarters IS AT J. R. STINE & SON'S CLOTHING STORE The Cheapest Clothing and Gents' Furnishings in Gettysburg. MERCHANT TAILORING ELSEWHERE . THAN AT . A. Q. SPALDING & BROS. CHICAGO, NEW YORK, PHILADELPHIA, To8Mulis.ui St. 243 Broadway, 1032 ChestuutSt. DnnLEnELD LIVERY. Rear of Washington House, Opposite W. M. R. R. Depot. GETTYSBURG, PA. m^. All Kinds of Teams. Good Riding Horses. -:o: A SPECIALTY. COME AND SEE US. J. R. STINE & SON, THE LEADING CLOTHIERS, MAIN STREET, GETTYSBURG, PA, The Battlefield a Specialty, With First-Class Guides. DAVID McCLEARY, Prop.

The issue of minority rights protection has been actively implemented in international legal practice at the United Nations and the Council of Europe levels since the 1990s. The problem of political representation of minority interests began regulating at the level of Organization for Security and Co-operation in Europe with the establishment of the High Commissioner on National Minorities office. At the level of this institution with international experts participation were developed the next documents: the Lund Recommendations on the Effective Participation of National Minorities in Political Life (1999), the Warsaw Guidelines to Assist National Minority Participation in the Electoral Process (2001), the Bolzano/Bozen Recommendations on National Minorities in Inter-State Relations (2008), the Ljubljana Guidelines on Integration of Diverse Societies (2012), the Graz Recommendations on Access to Justice and National Minorities (2017), etc.The purpose of article is to highlight the international legal framework for ensuring the effective political representation of minority ethnic groups and the practice of their implementation in European countries. The author has analyzed three levels of political representation of minority ethnic groups: 1) central (nationwide); 2) regional and local (self-government); 3) advisory (consultative).During the XX – early XXI centuries the institution of ethnic party became established from the multi-ethnic areas of Western Europe to the countries of Central and Southeastern Europe. The electoral system should facilitate minority representation and influence. Where minorities are concentrated territorially, single-member districts may provide sufficient minority representation (Italy, Albania, etc.). Proportional representation systems, where a political party's share in the national vote is reflected in its share of the legislative seats, may assist in the representation of minorities (Finland, Slovakia, etc.). Some forms of preference voting, where voters rank candidates in order of choice, may facilitate minority representation and promote inter-communal cooperation (Bosnia and Herzegovina). Lower numerical thresholds for representation in the legislature may enhance the inclusion of national minorities in governance (Poland, Serbia, etc.). A number of European countries (Croatia, Slovenia, Romania, Hungary, etc.) use a reserved number of seats in one or both chambers of parliament or in parliamentary committees. Ethnic minority representation at the government level is realized through the establishment of specialized central executive bodies, which are usually represented in the structure of culture and education ministries. Representatives of ethnic minorities are involved in these government institutions. The Republic of Croatia has a positive experience of ethnic minority representation in the judiciary and law enforcement agencies.Effective ethnic minority participation is realized through the functional system of local self-governments, which are formed on territorial and non-territorial levels. A number of European ethnic communities have the territorial autonomies (Italy, Spain, France, Denmark, Finland, Moldova) owing to the processes of regionalization and decentralization. The corporative model of minority non-territorial autonomy is represented by so-called Sámi Parliaments in northern parts of Norway, Sweden, Finland and Russia. The personal model of minority non-territorial autonomy is the most common in the world. It is provided through non-governmental organizations. Advisory (consultative) bodies functionate as a channel for dialogue between government and ethnic communities for protection of education, linguistic and cultural rights. They are formed at the Government (Austria) and President (Ukraine) levels as well.Given the European states experience, the following aspects of minority representation should be improved: 1) re-establishment Hungarian and Romanian single-member districts; 2) review of legislative norms regarding the principles of ethnic party institutionalization; 3) application of open-list proportional representation for minority parties in the regions of Ukraine with a multi-ethnic population. ; Починаючи з 1990-х років питання захисту прав етнічних, мовних і релігійних меншин активно впроваджується в міжнародно-правову практику на рівні ООН та Ради Європи. Однією з важливих постала проблема політичного представництва інтересів меншин, яка починає регулюватися на рівні ОБСЄ з запровадженням посади Верховного Комісара у справах національних меншин. На рівні цієї інституції за участі міжнародних експертів вироблені Лундські рекомендації про ефективну участь національних меншин у суспільно-політичному житті (1999), Варшавські рекомендації щодо сприяння участі національних меншин у виборчому процесі (2001), Больцанські/Боценські рекомендації щодо національних меншин у міждержавних відносинах (2008), Люблянські рекомендації щодо інтеграції різноманітних суспільств (2012), Грацькі рекомендації щодо доступу до правосуддя і національних меншин (2017) та ін.Метою статті є висвітлення міжнародно-правового формату забезпечення ефективного політичного представництва інтересів етнічних меншин та практики їх застосування в європейських країнах. Автор розглядає три рівні політичного представництва міноритарних етнічних груп: 1) центральний (загальнодержавний); 2) регіональний та локальний (самоврядування); 3) дорадчий (консультативний).У контексті аналізу політичного представництва етнічних меншин важливу роль займає інститут етнополітичної партії. Впродовж XX – початку XXI ст. він розширив свій ареал із поліетнічних регіонів Західної Європи до країн Центральної та Південо-Східної Європи. Справедливому представництву етнічних меншин у органах влади сприяє створення одномандатних округів (Італія, Албанія та ін.), пропорційна виборча система (Фінляндія, Словаччина та ін.), преференційне голосування (Австралія), зниження відсоткового бар'єру для проходження до парламенту етнополітичних партій (Польща, Сербія та ін.). Ряд країн Європи (Боснія і Герцеговина, Косово, Хорватія, Словенія, Румунія, Угорщина) застосовують практику резервування місць у парламенті для організацій етнічних громад. Представництво меншин на рівні уряду реалізується шляхом створення спеціальних органів центральної виконавчої влади, які зазвичай представлені в структурі міністерств культури та освіти. До роботи в цих урядових інституціях залучаються представники етнічних груп. Позитивний досвід репрезентації етнічних меншин у судових і правоохоронних органах має Республіка Хорватія.Ефективна політична участь та представництво у владі етнічних меншин реалізується через функціональну систему місцевого самоврядування, яка створюється на екстериторіальній та територіальній основі. Корпоративна модель екстериторіальної автономії меншин представлена так званими саамськими парламентами на півночі Норвегії, Швеції, Фінляндії та Росії. Найбільш розповсюджна у світі персональна модель екстериторіальної автономії етнічних меншин забезпечується шляхом створення неурядових організацій. Завдяки процесам регіоналізації та децентралізації ряд етнічних громад Європи мають статус національно-територіальних автономій (Італія, Іспанія, Франція, Данія, Фінляндія, Молдова). Дорадчі (консультативні) органи слугують каналами для діалогу між державною владою та етнічними громадами в питаннях використання земельних ресурсів, житла, захисту освітніх, мовних і культурних прав. Вони формуються як на рівні уряду (Австрія), так на рівні президентської влади (Україна).Враховуючи досвід цих держав, потребують вдосконалення наступні аспекти політичної репрезентації етнічних меншин: 1) відновлення адміністративних меж угорськомовного та румунськомовного виборчих одномандатних округів; 2) перегляд законодавчої норми щодо принципів інституціоналізації етнополітичних партій; 3) застосування на регіональному та локальному рівнях пропорційної системи відкритих списків із можливістю репрезентації партій меншин у регіонах України з поліетнічним складом населення. ; Починаючи з 1990-х років питання захисту прав етнічних, мовних і релігійних меншин активно впроваджується в міжнародно-правову практику на рівні ООН та Ради Європи. Однією з важливих постала проблема політичного представництва інтересів меншин, яка починає регулюватися на рівні ОБСЄ з запровадженням посади Верховного Комісара у справах національних меншин. На рівні цієї інституції за участі міжнародних експертів вироблені Лундські рекомендації про ефективну участь національних меншин у суспільно-політичному житті (1999), Варшавські рекомендації щодо сприяння участі національних меншин у виборчому процесі (2001), Больцанські/Боценські рекомендації щодо національних меншин у міждержавних відносинах (2008), Люблянські рекомендації щодо інтеграції різноманітних суспільств (2012), Грацькі рекомендації щодо доступу до правосуддя і національних меншин (2017) та ін.Метою статті є висвітлення міжнародно-правового формату забезпечення ефективного політичного представництва інтересів етнічних меншин та практики їх застосування в європейських країнах. Автор розглядає три рівні політичного представництва міноритарних етнічних груп: 1) центральний (загальнодержавний); 2) регіональний та локальний (самоврядування); 3) дорадчий (консультативний).У контексті аналізу політичного представництва етнічних меншин важливу роль займає інститут етнополітичної партії. Впродовж XX – початку XXI ст. він розширив свій ареал із поліетнічних регіонів Західної Європи до країн Центральної та Південо-Східної Європи. Справедливому представництву етнічних меншин у органах влади сприяє створення одномандатних округів (Італія, Албанія та ін.), пропорційна виборча система (Фінляндія, Словаччина та ін.), преференційне голосування (Австралія), зниження відсоткового бар'єру для проходження до парламенту етнополітичних партій (Польща, Сербія та ін.). Ряд країн Європи (Боснія і Герцеговина, Косово, Хорватія, Словенія, Румунія, Угорщина) застосовують практику резервування місць у парламенті для організацій етнічних громад. Представництво меншин на рівні уряду реалізується шляхом створення спеціальних органів центральної виконавчої влади, які зазвичай представлені в структурі міністерств культури та освіти. До роботи в цих урядових інституціях залучаються представники етнічних груп. Позитивний досвід репрезентації етнічних меншин у судових і правоохоронних органах має Республіка Хорватія.Ефективна політична участь та представництво у владі етнічних меншин реалізується через функціональну систему місцевого самоврядування, яка створюється на екстериторіальній та територіальній основі. Корпоративна модель екстериторіальної автономії меншин представлена так званими саамськими парламентами на півночі Норвегії, Швеції, Фінляндії та Росії. Найбільш розповсюджна у світі персональна модель екстериторіальної автономії етнічних меншин забезпечується шляхом створення неурядових організацій. Завдяки процесам регіоналізації та децентралізації ряд етнічних громад Європи мають статус національно-територіальних автономій (Італія, Іспанія, Франція, Данія, Фінляндія, Молдова). Дорадчі (консультативні) органи слугують каналами для діалогу між державною владою та етнічними громадами в питаннях використання земельних ресурсів, житла, захисту освітніх, мовних і культурних прав. Вони формуються як на рівні уряду (Австрія), так на рівні президентської влади (Україна).Враховуючи досвід цих держав, потребують вдосконалення наступні аспекти політичної репрезентації етнічних меншин: 1) відновлення адміністративних меж угорськомовного та румунськомовного виборчих одномандатних округів; 2) перегляд законодавчої норми щодо принципів інституціоналізації етнополітичних партій; 3) застосування на регіональному та локальному рівнях пропорційної системи відкритих списків із можливістю репрезентації партій меншин у регіонах України з поліетнічним складом населення.

Author's introductionIndigenous peoples are racialized, but this is not the only defining element of their identity. The sociological study of indigenous peoples informs political sociology, as indigenous peoples are a type of non‐state actor with a distinct perspective on the state and international governing organizations. The colonial power structure forced indigenous peoples to the margins of their homes and territories, which then changed rapidly around them without consideration of their voices. Today, indigenous peoples are recapturing the space to speak and they are challenging the societies that nearly overtook them and their lifeways.Author recommendsS. James Anaya 1996. Indigenous Peoples in International Law. New York, NY: Oxford University Press.This book examines the historical and contemporary issues regarding indigenous peoples and international law. Key topics include human rights, self‐determination, and negotiations with states and international institutions. The appendix includes the text of selected international doctrine related to indigenous rights. Anaya now serves as the Special Rapporteur on the situation of human rights and fundamental freedoms of indigenous peoples.Roxanne Dunbar‐Oritz 2006. 'The First Decade of Indigenous Peoples at the United Nations.'Peace and Change 31: 58–74. DOI: 10.1111/j.1468-0130.2006.00342.xThis explores the role of indigenous peoples at the United Nations from 1974 to 1984. During this decade, the United Nations commissioned a study of the status of the world's indigenous peoples, a Conference on Indigenous Peoples of the Americas was held in Geneva, and the drafting of the Declaration on the Rights of Indigenous Peoples (approved by the General Assembly in 2007) began.Alexander Ewen 1994. Voice of Indigenous People. Santa Fe, NM: Clear Light Publishers.A publication including speeches by indigenous leaders to open the International Year of the World's Indigenous People at the United Nations on Human Rights Day in 1993. These speeches were given to a nearly empty General Assembly chambers.Ronald Niezen 2003. The Origins of Indigenism: Human Rights and the Politics of Identity. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press.Indigenous forms of resistance are distinguished from ethnic groups due to their political status. Niezen explores the emergence of the concept of indigenism, the international movement of indigenous peoples. The book examines the international response to indigenous peoples' assertions of sovereignty, diversity and commonalities across indigenous peoples, how assertions of self‐determination influence indigenous‐state and indigenous‐international governing organization relations, and the political implications of indigenous peoples' assertions of self‐determination. A brief concluding chapter names the key projects of indigenism: affirming local claims of difference, using the language and symbols of states in claims of self‐determination, and embracing the universal concept of human rights to protect and develop identity.Y. N. Kly and D. Kly 2001. In Pursuit of the Right to Self‐Determination: Collected Papers and Proceedings of the First International Conference on the Right to Self‐Determination and the United Nations. Atlanta, GA: Clarity Press.This book is a collection of conference papers from the First International Conference on the Right to Self‐Determination and the United Nations. It includes explorations of self‐determination in many political contexts: internal autonomy, secession, assimilation, restorative justice, nomadic, and international law. It also includes papers on interventions in a diverse array of cases. Conference resolutions and the titles and web addresses of pertinent documents are included.Franke Wilmer 1993. The Indigenous Voice in World Politics. Newbury Park, CA: Sage Publications.Writing from a world‐systems theory perspective, Wilmer explores indigenous perspectives on development, colonization, and civilization. She contrasts this with the priorities of indigenous peoples, particularly self‐determination, and concludes with a consideration of indigenous voices in world politics. The book also includes many resources in its appendices, including a chronology of events related to indigenous activism, a list of international documents pertaining to indigenous peoples, and the organizations participating in the UN Working Group on Indigenous Populations meetings.Online materialsUN Permanent Forum on Indigenous Issues http://www.un.org/esa/socdev/unpfii/ This is the official website of the United Nations Permanent Forum on Indigenous Issues. It includes links to all of the forums held, along with the extensive documentation produced by each series of meetings. News headlines are posted regarding indigenous issues within the UN system, and the organization's newsletter The Message Stick, is available here. Films and webcasts can be viewed, which document indigenous participation in the UNPFII.International World Group for Indigenous Affairs http://www.iwgia.org This organization publishes extensive reports on the status of indigenous peoples globally. There are annual reports and topical reports, as well, exploring political, social, and economic issues. The page also features a news blog which offers updates on indigenous issues, particularly political issues.The Indian Law Resource Center http://www.indianlaw.org The Indian Law Resource Center is a news blog about the latest legal issues on indigenous lands around the world. It features many resources available regarding key legal decisions and publications by the Resource Center on their work to gain justice for indigenous peoples, along with the annual report of their current work.International Indian Treaty Council http://www.treatycouncil.org One of the first organizations to work with the United Nations, the International Indian Treaty Council's website offers a host of documentation regarding indigenous peoples and the United Nations, including multiple drafts of the Declaration on the Rights of Indigenous Peoples. It also includes documentation on the many cases examined and fought by the International Indian Treaty Council. This website is an extensive reference for global indigenous claims. It also offers content in Spanish.Sample syllabusStudies of indigenous peoples and politics might contribute to units on justice or the state. This segment might also fit in a course on racial or ethnic diversity. I explore self‐determination in greater detail as it is a key issue to many indigenous peoples and it encompasses everything from the right to territory to linguistic rights to rights to traditional medicine, and more. This segment might also fit into more advanced courses analyzing rights or inequality. I do not recommend readings for the Examining Self‐Determination section as the readings will vary depending on your focus (topic or geography).Topics for lecture or DiscussionWeek I: Introduction and OverviewDefinitions, Problems, and Issues: who are indigenous peoples? What is their role in national and international politics?Reading:Keri Iyall Smith, 'A Review of the study of the Political Status of Indigenous Peoples in the Global Context', Sociology Compass 1/7 (2007), pp. 756–774.Week II–IV: Examining Self‐DeterminationExplore case studies of self‐determination at the local and global level. Exemplars might include: Native Hawaiians (Kanaka Maoli), Zapatistas, Inuit of Canada and the formation of the Nunavut Territories, and the role of indigenous peoples in the United Nations.Films and videosHomeland: four portraits of native actionThis film looks at the protection of American Indian homelands as a human rights issue and explores four different movements in Native America to protect the environment and indigenous lands: Penobscot, Gwich'in, Northern Cheyenne, and the Dine/Navajo people. The Penobscots are struggling with the state of Maine to sanction a polluting paper mill, the Gwich'in fight drilling in ANWR, the Northern Cheyenne are seeking to stop methane gas wells, and the Dine/Navajo are fighting to stop uranium mining.Peyote roadThis film explores the use of peyote by the Native American Church and the American perspective on the use of peyote. It follows the case of the landmark decision, Employment Devision v. Smith, along with the legislative change that followed this decision. The film also offers a look into the Native American Church with depictions of the role of peyote in ceremonial life.In the light of reverenceThis film explores sacred sites and the conflicts that American Indians face when trying to gain access to these sites to practice their religious beliefs. The film explores four different cases, including the Wintu seeking to gain access to Mt. Shasta and fighting the New Age believers who desecrate ceremonial lands, the Hopi dispute with private land‐owners over a peak in the Four Corners region, and Lakota Sioux seeking to gain access to Mato Tipila/Devil's Tower.Adoption of the U.N. declaration on the rights of indigenous peoplesThis is a brief film that documents the occasion of the adoption of the Declaration on the Rights of Indigenous Peoples. http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=azVhsiLNDZkFocus Questions

What are political challenges to indigenous peoples – locally and globally?
What might be political opportunities for indigenous peoples – locally and globally?
What strategies will allow indigenous peoples to attain their claims?
Who are the indigenous peoples in your area? What are their claims? How has your community responded?

Project idea1. Socratic Dialogs. I use this technique to discuss complex problems from many perspectives. During the Socratic Dialog, the students do all of the talking, with minimal intervention on the part of the professor to referee the conversation as needed.During the term, we will often debate topics in Socratic Dialogs. In Socratic Dialogs, the class will respond to a well‐formulated question that requires personal responses from participants. The responses to the question will lead to a broader discussion, allowing the class to arrive at a consensus. You will be graded on your participation in Socratic Dialogs, both as Respondents and Questioners. Active participation will be rewarded! Respondents: Respondents will work in pairs to respond to a general question posed by the professor. They must also study the text closely and research the issue at hand in order to be prepared for follow up questions from the professor and classmates. Respondents will be assigned a question one week in advance to allow them to prepare. Each student will act as a Respondent twice during the semester. Questioners: When you are not a respondent, your role is to contribute to the conversation actively by asking questions, offering additional responses to questions, etc ... Use your own experiences to guide you in offering responses or asking questions.Some sample Socratic Dialog Questions include:Are tribal courts − in their contemporary or historical forms – an exercise of tribal sovereignty?Are Native Americans sovereign, even as domestic dependent nations?Is tradition a relevant source of legal doctrine for tribal law in contemporary times?How can sacred sites be preserved and sacred practices remain legal, given that American Indians exist within a foreign culture and state?Land has been called an engine of sovereignty. How can land – scarred by colonial history – also be an engine of justice for American Indians?2. Take Home Exam QuestionsIn my classes on indigenous issues I have used take‐home exams in the past. I find this to be a good way to keep the students thinking about issues as they are working, which is always my goal when writing examinations. These exams are designed to help students think creatively and critically about course readings, using them in a way that is different than what we did in class. These two questions focus on American Indian tribes and the American legal system, and the conflicts between these two political bodies.
A. Why do we have a course that examines the clash between American Indian and American criminal justice systems? Provide at least three reasons. Use citations to support your claims and examples to illustrate your points. Be sure that you always explain why or how – do not assume that I know what you mean.B. As we learned at the beginning of class, legal structures are very important tools for communities, allowing them to express and protect their values. How does the clash of cultures continue to threaten sovereignty and simultaneously empower the authority of the American federal government? What can tribes do to escape the 'clash' with their sovereignty intact?

10The Students' Attitudes Toward the Instructor's Code Switching in EFL Classroom Yesi Sehiling S1 Sastra Inggris, Fakultas Bahasa dan Seni Universitas Negeri Surabaya, Indonesia yesisehiling@gmail.com Abstract English has a big influence in the world. It can be seen that almost all of the country around the world put English as one of the foreign language which is taught in any level of the institutions. In Indonesia, English is taught from kindergarten until university level which is called as English as Foreign language. It is because the awareness that almost information around the world is provided in English, which is the key to make the generation moves forward following modern era.Because English is a foreign language, it may be hard to be learned to Indonesian society. So, to make it interesting, English should be delivered as enjoyable as possible and in the right way so that the learner can get the English learning well. Teaching English in Indonesia is usually delivered in English. But, there are some instructors sometimes use Indonesian to switch the code from English when teaching in the classroom. This study focuses on the use of code switching by the instructor and the students' attitudes toward the teacher's code switching in EFL clasroom. In fact, the researcher would like to know whether the language choice in teaching EFL classroom may influences the students' attitudes toward the language or not. This study used qualitative approach. The instruments which are used are some notes, video recorder and the researcher itself. To collect the data, this study uses observation, interview and questionnaire. The Objects of the study are in EFL classrooms (senior high school, English department and Indonesian department). The subjects of the study are the English teacher and the students. The findings of the study show that the use of code switching may be as simply talks and within any reason and perpose. The further findings indicate that the students' attitudes toward code switching by the instructor are largely influenced by the students' English proficiency. The less proficient students preferred the instructor to use both language which English should be minimized and Indonesian more explored. The more proficient students preferred the instructor to minimize the use of code switching if it is not needed enough and more explore English. Keywords: code switching, attitude, language attitude, EFL. Introduction Language is the most important thing for human life. By using language, the people can express their thought and sense to others (Humaidah, 2009: 2). But the most main function of language (Whatmough, 1957 :12) is to communicate each other. Communication is a kind of interaction which uses code that must be dealt by the speaker and the listener. If between the deliverer and the interlocutor does not know their code each other, their communication means nothing. Even though what they deliver consist some information, they will not be able to get what information is. In global world, people are obligated to be bilingual or multilingual which international language is included. It aims to make the people are able to interact with all the people around the world. Besides, all the world information must be provided in International language. By being able to understand International language, the people can access the information. English is an international language. It has a big influence. Almost all the countries in the world learn English. Indonesia does too. English is an important subject of school in Indonesia. It is taught in any level of school started from kindergarten, elementary school, junior high school, senior high school and university. It is hoped that the availability of English language as the subject of their school can contribute to the students' English language competence, which is the key to access information in the world. Besides, learning English aims that they are able to communicate using international language and have relation in international world considering international relationship is very important for life. In Indonesia, English is most taught as foreign language in formal setting. They are put in the classroom where the learning takes place. In this situation, the classroom is called as EFL (English as Foreign Language) classroom considering that Indonesia is non-English speaking country. According to Yletyinen (2004: 4), in EFL classroom, the learner learns English in an environment where there is only a little natural use of the language. Furthermore, the foreign language is treated equally to the other subjects with its homework and test. In EFL classroom in Indonesia, the teacher teaches the students English in order to make the students understand English by listening, reading, doing written and oral activities. The language of teaching is usually English. However, there are teachers sometimes change from English to Indonesian and vice versa in delivering the subject. This phenomenon is called as code switching. Code switching is very common in bilingual and multilingual societies. Wardhaugh (2006: 101) says that code switching is changing of codes from one code to another code or to mix the code in the same conversation. In the other words, code switching is the use of two or more languages in the same conversation. The code switching usage (Uys, 2000: 2) by the teacher in the class may have any reason or purpose such as the teacher uses code switching as strategy (Yletyinen, 2004: 53; Uys, 2000: 11) to explain in order to make the students understand what she/he has told or may be because she/he has less competence (Yletyinen, 2004: 72) in speaking English so she/he uses much Indonesian. This problem is very interesting topic to be discussed in this study especially related to student's attitude toward this phenomenon. Attitude is something that is got by the people through interaction with an object or accident. Attitude is not brought since baby but it is created through learning process in environment. There are factors that can change someone's attitude that are feeling, knowledge, experience and motive. Language is also related to attitude. Attitude toward language is called as language attitude. Language attitude is someone's attitude in choosing and deciding which language to be used. Language attitude is quite influenced by background and something happen in the environment. The students of Senior High School are in the high level of learning in school world under university students. They are expected to have good English skill after they graduate. In this case, the way of teaching them must also different from the previous grade. The capacity of using English rather than Indonesian of the teacher must influence the student's ability of English especially in speaking. In simply, using code switching by the teacher whether it is favored or disfavored by the students is focused in this study. There are earlier studies related to this paper done by Yletyinen (2004) which is titled the function of code switching in EFL Classrom. Then, Arrifin and Husin (2011) which is titled Code Switching and Code Mixing of English and Bahasa Malaysia in Content-Based Classroom and Alenezi (2010) which is titled Students' Language attitude Towards Using Code Switching as a Medium of Instruction in the College of Health Sciences: An Exploratory Study. Both of the studies analyze the language attitude towards code switching as a medium of instruction. The present study focused on the situation of code switching which is used by the teacher in the classroom and the student's attitude toward code switching by the instructor too. Research Question This research is guided by the following questions: Under what situation does the teacher use code switching in the classroom? How do the students take attitudes toward the teacher's code switching in the classroom? Purpose of the Study Related to the background of the study and the research question, the purposes of the study are: Describe the situation of the instructor's code switching in the classroom. Describe the students' attitudes toward the instructor's code switching. Significance of The Study The result of the study is hoped that can give contribution to sociolinguistics especially in the term of code switching and the attitudes toward code switching. But the most contribution may be for the teacher who teach EFL classroom in guiding the class to optimize positive attitude of the students toward English to get the better result of students' competence. Moreover, this study can give description to the people who will have research as this present study. Method Research method is the most important part of a research because it shows how the study is organized. This study uses qualitative method. Qualitative method is research procedure that produces descriptive data in the form of written words from the people or attitude that can be researched. This chapter consists of research design, subject, object, and the location, sources of the data, data collection techniques, instruments and data analysis. Research Design This study uses descriptive qualitative and quantitative data. According to Bodgan and Taylor on Margana's Disertasi (2012), descriptive qualitative uses data in the form of word, phrase, or clause whether written or spoken which is used to give overview of a certain description of phenomena about code switching. The quantitative data (Litosseliti, 2010: 52) enabless the the researcher to compare relatively large numbers of the students' attitudes in EFL classroom of the research which is as the main focus of the present study. Objects, subjects and location The objects of the study were classrooms of Senior High School, Indonesian department and English department that Senior High School was the main object and the others were to compare the result of the data. However, not all classrooms of the departments were researched but only one class of each department which was chosen randomly by the instructor. The objects were taken to compare the result considering their different level. Why should those objects be compared? Firstly, Senior High School is the highest level of obligated education program by Indonesian government. After graduating from this level, they were not obligated to continue their education in university. So that's why, they have to be given good skill in order to be able to get good enough job. It is quite related with their English skill because people who have good English competence and performance will get good/higher position than low English competence one of a company. Secondly, Indonesian department are the higher level of Senior High School. The perception is that the students of Indonesian have higher competence than Senior High School. But they may favor Indonesian rather than English considering their choice to choose Indonesian department rather than English department. Thirdly, English department is the department which the society use most English in their communication in the context of learning. All the students may have good English ability considering their ability to interact each other using English in the class. This object was used to compare and to get more varied data considering the different level and the English competence. The subjects of the study were all the societies in each classroom including the English teacher and the students. In this case, the teachers followed to answer Question 1 and the students followed to answer Question 2. Talking about the location, all of them are in East Java. Senior High School took place in SMA 1 Wonoayu. It is located in Pagerngumbuk village, Wonoayu, Sidoarjo. And, Indonesian department and English department took place in Universitas Negeri Surabaya which is located in Lidah Wetan village, Lakarsantri, Surabaya. Most societies of the institutions are multilingual (Javanese, Indonesian, and English). But, the language which is most used in classroom is Indonesian considering Indonesian is the formal language in Indonesia. However, it is the exception of English subject which English is most used. Moreover, the location takes place around the researcher's environment that could help the researcher to get the data easier. Data and Sources of Data This present study classifies the data into two types. They are linguistics and information data. The linguistics data is the situation of code switching by the teacher and the students' attitudes toward the code switching. The information data is obtained when the researcher conducted interview of the instructors about the reason of the use of code switching in the classroom and the interview and questionnaire of the students about the acceptability of the code switching by the instructor. The questions of the interview of the teacher was not listed but developed by each situation in each classroom. In the other hand, the interview of the students were listed which can be seen in Appendix 4 and the questionnaire which is adopted from the Likert scale (Arrifin and Husin, 2011) which was drawn below. No. Statement Strongly Agree Agree Disagree Strongly Disagree There were three kinds of source of data in the present study. They were people, place, and papers. The people were the instructors and the students of the institutions. The place was in the classroom. The papers were from the related theories which were gotten from the books, previous studies and internet. Research Instrument The instrument is used to facilitate and get the data. In this study, the data were collected by direct observation, questionnaire and interview. In doing the research, some tools were used to save the data by using some notes and video recorder. The gotten data is analyzed and related to the theories/previous studies. Question 1 : Under what situation does the instructor use code switching in the classroom? In order to answer question 1, direct observation and interview were used. Interview was used for the teacher to get more information about the reason of using code switching. In the interview activity, it was not made interview sheet because the interview was done directly based on the situation of code switching in each classroom. See Appendix 1,2 and 3 to get more details information. Question 2: How do the students take attitudes toward the teacher's code switching in the classroom? In order to answer question 2, questionnaire, interview and direct observation were used for the students. Questionnaire sheet was used to answer the Question. The interview and direct observation were also used to strengthen the data. The tools were video recorder. The data from the instrument was analyzed which also needed some theories relating to the study in analyzing the data. However, the researcher was the key instrument to answer those two questions. The researcher as the instrument means that the researcher became the determiner in collecting data. She paid attention, followed, took a note and analyzed the data. Data Collection Technique Data collection technique of this study was done by doing observation, interviewing, and giving questionnaire. Observation Direct observation was used to get the data. It was done to see the phenomenon of code switching by the instructor directly and how the students take attitudes toward the use of code switching by the instructor and to take a note the whole learning activity in the classroom. The direct observation was also video recorded. Interview This study uses spoken interview to collect the data. Both teacher and the students were interviewed. The tool was video recorder. Interview for the teacher (see Appendix 1,2,3) was done after the observation. In contrast, interview for the students (see Appendix 4) was done before the observation. The students who were interviewed was chosen randomly based on their English competence, higher competence and lower competence. The categorization of their English Competence was based on their score. Each instructor has their characteristic of giving score and categorizing the students whether they are less competence or more competence. The teacher of senior high school had requirement that the students who have score under 80, they are categorized as less competence and upper 80 as more competence. The lecturer of English department did say so. Whereas the lecturer of Indonesian department gave score under 70 for less competence and upper 70 for more competent students. Questionnaire Questionnaire was used for the students. There were 8 statements of the questionnaire. The questionnaire was given to all students in the classroom according to their presence when the research was done. Data Analysis In analyzing the data, there are some steps below: The data were classified according to the situation or specific time of the use of code switching by the instructor and the students' attitudes toward the use of code switching. However, the data collections of the interview were transcribed. The data were then analyzed based on the theories and previous studies. The data were interpreted and made conclusion about the result of the study and also provided some suggestion for the future study by the researcher. Results and Discussion The use of code switching The data reveal a clear pattern of instructor's language use in the classroom. All of the institutes above showed the use of code switching English-Indonesian or Indonesian-English by the instructor was common practice phenomenon. The characteristics of each institute also influence the frequent of the use code switching or the languages whether the more frequent was English or Indonesian. Senior high school institute used code switching balance whether English-Indonesian or Indonesian-English. It was different with Indonesian department that the institute used more frequent in Indonesian and unaware in using English. On the other side, the lecturer of English department used English more frequent in the classroom and Indonesian was just used in simply talks or just to give more explanation and example. Eventhough the institutes had their own characteristics, here the results of the code switching use in each institute were summerized into one. Those, code switching by the instructors in the classroom happened under situation below: Code switching happened in explaining the material which was used to make the explanation clearer to be understood by the students. According to Yletyinen (2004: 53), there are different strategies for explaining the material being taught by mentioning repetition, reformulation, clarification and exemplification. In the present data, code switching in explaining material is common which was happened in all the institutions whether in senior high school, Indonesian department and English department of university. This result supports Yletyinen's thesis (2004: 53) and Uys (2000: 44) which they found that the teacher has to clarify his/her message by code switching to the students' mother tongue and thus making the students more understand the material and do what the teacher asks to do. However, the code switching was most used in the senior high school. Code switching was used as the student's requirement. This reason of code switching is the same result with Youkhana (2010: 15) that the students tend to ask the teacher to change the code into mother tongue because they discomfort to the English used because it makes them confused to understand the instructor's speech. Code switching was used in joking. According to Weng, this function of code switching is called as poetic function that the speaker inserted some jokes, stories, some poetic quotation in the conversation. Joking (Uys, 2000: 44) in mother tongue is more understandable and felt rather that in foreign language because mother tongue has stronger role to catch the meaning. This finding is supported by Wardhaugh (2006: 112). He said that code switching can be used for humorous effect. In other words, code switching has purpose of joking. Code switching happened in simply talks which were with unawareness. This phenomenon is often happened. It was found in the three institutes in the research. The code switching was spoken accidentally, since it was not required. According to Yletyinen (2004: 95), this code switching is called lapse. Lapse was most frequent happened in Indonesian department which the instructor delivered her speech most in Indonesian and slipped English words sometimes. It is different with senior high school and English department which are commonly slipped Indonesian words. Code switching was used when the instructor was disappointed with the students. This code switching (Yletyinen: 2004: 89) is called as teacher admonition. She said that the mother tongue sometimes has more power in the foreign language classroom. This is also called as expressive function of code switching (Weng's article: 4) that the teacher uses code switching to express the emotion and mother tongue is often inserted to express the true feelings. This strategy by the instructor will make the students more alert, they response better to their mother tongue. Furthermore, they know that they do not have an excuse by appealing not to understand the teacher. In this case, code switching used when reprimanding students is the effective strategy. Code switching happened to get the students' attention. This is named directive function (Weng's article: 4). In the direct observation, the teacher asked "How many groups that have finished the assignment?" Almost of the students just kept silent. Then, the teacher asked again "berapa banyak group yang sudah menyelesaikan tugasnya?" The students answered the question by raising hands. Implicitly, The use of mother tongue had a purpose that was to get the students attention the teacher's speech. According to Yletyinen's thesis (2004: 70), code switching can be used in helping the less competent students to answer a question that the teacher asks. Yletyinen's statement supports the idea above that the teacher changed the code into Indonesian to help the students who most of them were less competent to understand the teacher's question and answer it. The use of Indonesian here was also aimed to help the students understand the question so that the students could answer the teacher's question. Not only that, code switching (Wardhaugh, 2006: 112) that is by choosing the preferred language of the students, the message will be easier to catch. The students' attitude This study shows that code switching of English and Indonesian is a common communicative behavior in the classrooms. However, this study is aimed to explore students' attitude towards the language of teaching in English class and the effects of the instructors' code switching to the students' English performance. The findings of this study indicate that the students' attitude toward code switching in the English class was largely influenced by the students' English language competence. Although in fact, The classrooms had each characteristics which senior high school class was the neutral one which was not in Indonesian department class or English department class. It is because the students commonly more favor the language they took as their majure than another one. The students of Indonesian department showed their favor to Indonesian much and the students of English department showed their favor to English. It was proved by their decision of taking those majure. So, eventhough they were in English subject classroom, they tended to consider their own majure. In the other hand, the students of senior high school take attitudes about code switching that were purely influenced by the students' English competence. The results show that the students with less proficiency prefer their teacher to use both English and Indonesian in the same capacity or larger use Indonesian. Alenezi (2010: 7) said that the students more desirable and believe that code switching of the teacher makes the course easy to understand. They would get difficulties to catch the meaning of the speech if the instructor used English a lot. Meanwhile the students with higher proficiency prefer their teacher to use more English. The findings are supported by the Arrifin's and Hussin's (2011: 237) study that the students with less English proficiency were more tolerant to the instructors' code switching compared to the more proficient group. The students with higher proficiency might believe that the use of English by the teacher could improve their language competence specifically in vocabulary. Weng's article also found that it can help the students to understand new vocabulary. The results are rather different in the English department which shows that the students were sometimes confused about the use of code switching by their lecturer that did not add their vocabulary. They believed that for adding vocabulary, it depends on their desire and their effort by reading English books, watching movie and listening the musics. They further argued that the use of code switching should be minimized. The argument was also founded in David's article (2008: 78) that it should be minimized because it is bad for the learner. It assumed that if the teacher often used that, it can make the bad behavior to the next generation and will be more difficult to avoid. However, all the students agreed that the use of code switching can increase their comprehension toward the lesson. Riegelhaupth (2000: 210) argued that bilinguals use the language that the people they speak to know best. In this case, the use of code switching has function to repeat the speech for better comprehension. The results also showed that code switching by the teacher had each effect to their psychology aspect. The lower proficient students were not confidence to speak English to the teacher who was using code switching. They tended to use Indonesian because they were afraid of making mistakes or troubles to their speaking if they use English. They thought that they had poor vocabulary and poor understanding of grammar. But if the teacher spoke in English, they would try speaking English too then use Indonesian to the words which they did not know the meaning. Different with the lower proficient students, the higher proficient students were still confidence to speak in English to the teacher who was using code switching even though in a simple sentence. However, sometimes, they tended to use Indonesian or code switching because they did not want to be seen showing off their English competence. Again and again, the students of English department had different results. The lecturer's code switching did not influence their confidence. Whatever language the lecturer used, they were still confident to speak English but sometimes they followed the language the lelcturer used just to respect him. It is supported by Spolsky (1998: 49) that one tends to respect people who are socially superior to one self. Conclusion and Suggestion Conclusion This chapter is summary of the findings in order to make the reader get a better understanding through reading the findings of this thesis. Actually, the main objective of this present study is to investigate the students' attitude toward the instructor's code switching behavior in EFL classroom. After doing the research, the results are: The first finding is the situation of code switching phenomena by the instructor which is about the reason or the purpose of using code switching in the classroom that is drawn commonly below: Code switching happened in explaining the material which was used to make the explanation clearer to be understood by the students' code switching was used as the student's requirement Code switching was used in joking Code switching happened in simply talks which were with unawareness. Code switching was used as admonition which is used when the instructor was disappointed with the students. Code switching happened to get the students' attention. There are also additional findings that the instructors' frequency of using English or the Indonesian is largely influenced by the characteristic of the classroom. Senior high school institute used code switching balance as a mean the same frequency whether English-Indonesian or Indonesian-English. It was different with Indonesian department that the institute used more frequent in Indonesian and unaware in using English. It is influenced by the students' favor toward Indonesian. On the other side, the lecturer of English department used English more frequent in the classroom and Indonesian was just used in simply talks or just to give more explanation and example. The second finding is the students' attitude toward the instructor's code switching in the classroom. The findings of this study indicate that the students' attitude toward code switching in the English class was largely influenced by the students' English language competence. Although in fact, The classrooms had each characteristics which senior high school class was the neutral one which was not in Indonesian department class or English department class. It is because the students commonly more favor the language they took as their majure than another one. The students of Indonesian department showed their favor to Indonesian much and the students of English department showed their favor to English. It was proved by their decision of taking those majure. So, eventhough they were in English subject classroom, they tended to consider their own majure. In the other hand, the students of senior high school take attitudes about code switching that were purely influenced by the students' English competence. The results show that the students with less proficiency prefer their teacher to use both English and Indonesian in the same capacity or larger use Indonesian. They would get difficulties to catch the meaning of the speech if the instructor used English a lot. Meanwhile the students with higher proficiency prefer their teacher to use more English. The students with higher proficiency might believe that the use of English by the teacher could improve their language competence specifically in vocabulary. The results are rather different in the English department which shows that the students were sometimes confused about the use of code switching by their lecturer that did not add their vocabulary. They believed that for adding vocabulary, it depends on their desire and their effort by reading English books, watching movie and listening the musics. The findings also showed that code switching by the teacher had each effect to their psychology aspect. The lower proficient students were not confidence to speak English to the teacher who was using code switching. They tended to use Indonesian because they were afraid of making mistakes or troubles to their speaking if they use English. They thought that they had poor vocabulary and poor understanding of grammar. But if the teacher spoke in English, they would try speaking English too then use Indonesian to the words which they did not know the meaning. Different with the lower proficient students, the higher proficient students were still confidence to speak in English to the teacher who was using code switching even though in a simple sentence. However, sometimes, they tended to use Indonesian or code switching because they did not want to be seen showing off their English competence. Again and again, the students of English department had different results. The lecturer's code switching did not influence their confidence. Whatever language the lecturer used, they were still confident to speak English but sometimes they followed the language the lelcturer used just to respect him. Suggestion The instructor in EFL classroom should know the students' attitude toward the language used well so that she/he can use the right way in teaching English in EFL classroom in order to get the best result of the students' English competence. This study may be far from being perfect. It is hoped that there will be further researchers who conduct the research on the phenomenon of code switching by the instructor in the classroom and the students' attitude toward it for more detail data/explanation and from many points of view. References Alenezi, Abdullah. (2010). Students' Language Attitude Towards Using Code-Switching as a Medium of Instruction in the College of Health Sciences: An Exploratory Study, vol.7, 1-22 Arrifin, Kamisah and Husin, MisyanaSusanti. (2011). "Code Switching and Code Mixing of English and Bahasa Malaysia in Content Based Classrooms: Frequency and Attitudes".The Linguistics Journal.Vol 5 issue 1 David. (Desember, 2008).Understanding Mixed Code and Classroom Code-Switching: Myths and Realities. Ongkong Institute of Education.Hongkong.Vol 56, No.3 Faris, NurulElfatul. 2012. Alih Kode Dalam Proses Belajar-MengajarKelas VII Mts "AL-KAutsar" Srono Banyuwangi.UniversitasJember, Jember. Gardner-Chloros, Penelope. 2009. Code Switching. UK: Cambridge University Press. Litosseteliti, Lia. 2010. Research Methods in Linguistics. New York: Continuum. Riegelhaupth, Florencia. 2000. Code Switching and Language Use in the Classroom. Research on Spanish in the U.S., ed. Ana Roca, 204-217. Somerville,MA: Cascadilla Press. Spolsky, Bernard. 1998. Sociolinguistics. UK: Oxford University Press. Uys, David. 2010. The functions of teachers' code switching in multilingual and multicultural high school classrooms in the Siyanda District of the Northern Cape Province: Stellenbosch University. Wardahugh, Ronald. 2006. An Introduction to Sociolinguistics. UK: Blackwell Publishing. Wardani, Devi. (2013), Skapbahasasiswaterhadapbahasa Indonesia: studikasus di SMA Negeri 1 Singaraja. E-Journal Program Pascasarjana Universitas Pendidikan Ganesha, Vol. 2 Weng, Pei-shi. Code Switching as a Strategy Use in an EFL Classroom in Taiwan.Tamkang University, Taiwan. Whatmough, Joshua. 1957. Language: A Modern Synthesis. New York: St. Martin's Press. Yletyinen, Hanna. 2004. The functions of code switching in EFL classroom. University of Jvyoskyl: Finland. Youkhana, Sana. 2010. Code Switching in the Foreign Language Classroom. Ogskolan: Jonkoping.

Introducción La vida social humana se sustenta en la cooperación de una forma diferente respecto a otras especies. Los científicos han indagado en la evolución de la cooperación desde distintos puntos de vista (Trivers, 1971; Dawkins, 1976; Axelrod y Hamilton, 1981; Axelrod, 1984; Caporael et al., 1989; Boyd & Richerson, 1990; Wilson & Sober, 1994; Bergstrom, 2002; Boyd et al., 2003; Gintis et al., 2003; Bowles & Gintis, 2004; Gintis et al., 2008; Boyd et al., 2010) pero ninguna de tales explicaciones dan cuenta de la complejidad de las relaciones cooperativas humanas. En este trabajo de tesis se analizan las relaciones cooperativas destacando su relación intrínseca con las relaciones de confianza. ¿Por qué cooperamos? ¿Cuál es la influencia de la confianza en la cooperación y qué papel juega la historia evolutiva en este puzle? Tomando en consideración las formas sociales adoptadas por nuestros antepasados humanos, es posible pensar en ciertos rasgos cognitivos y psicológicos específicos relevantes para entender las relaciones actuales de cooperación y, en un sentido más amplio, las relaciones sociales. El objetivo es, en definitiva, enmarcar las relaciones sociales humanas en un entorno evolutivo para explicar comportamientos sociales que existen en la actualidad. Contenido de la investigación Esta tesis trata de responder a las cuestiones planteadas anteriormente basándose primero en la relación que existe entre la evolución de la socialidad y la cognición humanas, como hipótesis de partida a contrastar en estudios posteriores. Desde esta perspectiva y, utilizando una metodología multidisciplinar procedente de disciplinas tales como la Sociología, Psicología y Antropología, se diseña un plan de investigación que trata de profundizar en mayor medida en dichos temas. El trabajo de tesis parte inicialmente de una revisión crítica sobre estudios que tratan de relacionar el comportamiento social en primates y la evolución del neocórtex –la Hipótesis del Cerebro Social de Dunbar (Dunbar, 1992; Dunbar, 1998; Dunbar & Shultz, 2007; Shultz & Dunbar, 2007; Dunbar, 2010). De dicha revisión, resulta evidente la necesidad de utilizar un enfoque más matizado para explicar la enorme complejidad de las relaciones sociales humanas. Para ello, ofrece un enorme interés el análisis de la influencia del mecanismo psicológico de la confianza. No obstante, los estudios de Dunbar, especialmente aquellos relacionados con las características propias de los grupos sociales humanos en relación a la capacidad cognitiva, son continuamente revisados a lo largo de todo este trabajo. Posteriormente se propone un marco teórico sobre los factores que influyen en la confianza (Parsons, 1970; Barber, 1983; Good, 1988; Yamagishi, 1998; Glaeser et al., 2000; Uslaner, 2002; Six, 2005; Bjørnskov, 2006; Hardin, 2006) y su posible configuración en un entorno evolutivo. Sobre esta base teórica, se diseña el posterior trabajo empírico, siempre teniendo en cuenta la hipótesis de que el ser humano tiene un comportamiento social ampliamente influenciado por un contexto de relaciones dentro de los pequeños grupos en los que ha convivido durante la mayor parte de su historia evolutiva. El marco teórico explica los elementos que conforman la confianza, la tipología y su posible configuración a lo largo de la historia evolutiva. Constituyen el substrato utilizado para llevar a término el análisis de la confianza y del comportamiento cooperativo en los siguientes trabajos empíricos. Los estudios empíricos siguen un plan basado en un diseño propio, procedente de la revisión de la literatura (Fey, 1955; Rosenberg, 1957; Wrightsman, 1964, 1974; Rotter, 1967; Survey Research Center, 1969; Christie & Geis, 1970; Johnson-George & Swap, 1982; Rempel et al., 1985; World Values Survey Association, 2009), con cuestionarios para medir el nivel de confianza general y personal en un grupo. Además se usa un juego experimental – dilema del prisionero con algunas variantes– que demuestra el comportamiento cooperativo real de los individuos. El juego se realiza en condiciones de confianza y de no confianza entre los miembros de un mismo grupo. El estudio piloto se lleva a cabo inicialmente en dos grupos diferentes. Los resultados muestran ya la influencia de las relaciones cercanas de confianza personal en la cooperación y el interés de analizar las redes de confianza (Radcliffe-Brown, 1940; Barnes, 1954; Milgram, 1967; Mitchell, 1969; Wasserman & Faust, 1994; Molina, J.L., 2001; White & Harary, 2001; Newman et al., 2003; Freeman, 2004; Eguíluz et al., 2005; Fowler & Christakis, 2010) en mayor profundidad. Los resultados de este trabajo se confirman en un estudio similar posterior con otros grupos más numerosos y más comparables entre sí. Los nuevos resultados muestran cómo la cooperación se relaciona en buena medida con un compromiso afectivo de reciprocidad que proviene de la confianza personal, como elemento adaptativo hacia una cooperación más exitosa, incluso en condiciones de anonimato y pese a la posibilidad de causar un perjuicio en el individuo a corto plazo. Además, el estudio incluye un análisis en profundidad de las redes de confianza de estos grupos para constatar la importancia que ciertas topologías de redes de confianza pueden tener en la cohesión general de un grupo. La última parte de la tesis presenta una perspectiva más antropológica con la realización de trabajo de campo en dos zonas caracterizadas por su gran diversidad étnica: el norte de Ghana y Oaxaca, en México. Estos lugares permiten estudiar cómo interaccionan los grupos y por qué mantienen sus identidades étnicas a pesar de una historia en común. Se pretende analizar si los mecanismos de la confianza personal que aparecen a nivel individual pueden trasladarse también a grupos más grandes o a sociedades. En este caso, además de la observación directa de los grupos y de la inclusión de su contexto histórico, social, económico y político, se utilizan entrevistas y redes personales de cooperación. En el trabajo de Ghana (Rattray, 1931, 1932; Syme, 1932; Tait, 1961; Hilton, 1962; Hart, 1971; Drucker-Brown, 1975, 1992; Fussy, 1979; Laari, 1987; Awedoba, 1989, 2001; Wilks, 1989; Assimeng, 1990; Kotey, 1995; Schlottner, 2000; Oppong, 2002; Tonah, 2005), se hace un recorrido por el contexto de los grupos y se explican las características de sus redes de confianza y cooperación. En este trabajo, se observa la eficacia de la diversificación étnica como medio para crear pequeños grupos más resistentes a la hora de enfrentarse a entornos difíciles. Se muestra también la adopción de formas culturales que permiten extender los mecanismos de la confianza personal en colectivos mayores. En el último trabajo se comparan los resultados anteriores con los de México (Chance, 1979; Zeithin, 1990; Campbell, 1993; Oseguera, 2004; Reina Aoyama, 2004; Barabas, 2006, 2008; Trejo Barrientos, 2006; Spores, 2008; Joyce, 2010; Nahmad Sitton, 2013), en un análisis cross-cultural para identificar posibles elementos "universales" en las redes de confianza y cooperación y también las influencias culturales. Conclusiones Mediante los anteriores trabajos se muestra que la confianza es uno de los mecanismos cognitivos y psicológicos más anclado en la historia evolutiva humana. Su origen evolutivo se observa en los resultados de esta tesis: al demostrarse la mayor influencia de la confianza personal sobre la confianza general a la hora de influir en la cooperación, la cual necesita de las relaciones cercanas y por tanto del pequeño grupo para su aparición –dadas las limitaciones cognitivas y temporales para mantener este tipo de relaciones con gran número de personas–, y su fuerte conexión con aspectos emocionales inconscientes –uno de los mecanismo más primitivos en los seres humanos. De hecho, tanto en el trabajo empírico como en el de campo, aparece la configuración de redes de confianza en torno a pequeños grupos. La confianza personal también puede extenderse a colectivos mayores. Incluso en las grandes sociedades más desarrolladas los individuos siguen creando sus pequeños grupos en todos los ámbitos de su vida. Sin embargo, en algunas sociedades, donde existen mayores dificultades de supervivencia, como las analizadas en esta tesis, se observan determinadas herramientas culturales que sirven para extender la confianza personal a un mayor número de personas: conceptos tales como grupos étnicos, clanes, linajes, familias, comunalidad, municipalidad en el caso oaxaqueño, valores internalizados, etc… son eficaces en este sentido. De este modo, la cultura provee de los mecanismos necesarios para crear fuertes lazos de cohesión basados en los elementos emocionales. La mayor cohesión y una actitud más abierta de confianza que surgen de tales herramientas culturales ayudan a enfrentarse a los entornos de forma más eficaz. Así pues, se podría predecir que a medida que los entornos resultan más difíciles, aparece una mayor diversificación de los grupos. Con la comparación de los resultados de Ghana y México, se profundiza en mayor medida en los elementos comunes en las redes de confianza y cooperación –aspectos universales–: los grupos pequeños y distintos niveles de emocionalidad implícita en los vínculos de confianza; y aquellos elementos culturales que se adecuan al contexto histórico y a la situación económica de los grupos, para crear una mayor o menor cohesión de sus miembros en función de sus necesidades. De este modo, además de identificarse en el campo diferentes indicadores para medir la confianza, también se identifican ciertas formas culturales que parecen más eficaces que otras a la hora de cohesionar los grupos, a saber, los valores y el sentimiento de identidad y pertenencia grupal, frente a la normatividad. ; Introducció La vida social humana es basa en la cooperació i la confiança d'una manera diferent de la d'altres espècies. Els científics han investigat la cooperació humana des de diferents punts de vista (Trivers, 1971; Dawkins, 1976; Axelrod y Hamilton, 1981; Axelrod, 1984; Caporael et al., 1989; Boyd & Richerson, 1990; Wilson & Sober, 1994; Bergstrom, 2002; Boyd et al., 2003; Gintis et al., 2003; Bowles & Gintis, 2004; Gintis et al., 2008; Boyd et al., 2010), però encara hi ha moltes preguntes sobre l'evolució de la cooperació sense explicació. Aquest treball de tesi analitza les relacions cooperatives emfasitzant la seva relació intrínseca amb les relacions de confiança. Per què cooperem? Quina és la influència de la confiança en la cooperació i el paper de la història evolutiva en aquest trencaclosques? Tenint en compte les formes socials adoptades pels avantpassats humans, és possible pensar en certs trets cognitius i psicològics específics que podrien tenir una importància clau per entendre les actuals relacions de cooperació i, en un sentit més ampli, les relacions socials. L'objectiu de la tesi és, en definitiva, emmarcar les relacions socials en un entorn evolutiu per explicar els comportaments socials que existeixen avui en dia. Contingut de la investigació Aquesta tesi tracta de respondre les preguntes anteriors, a partir de la relació entre l'evolució de la sociabilitat i la cognició humà, com hipòtesi inicial per contrastar els estudis posteriors. Des d'aquesta perspectiva i utilitzant una metodologia multidisciplinària de la Psicologia, Antropologia i Sociologia, es va dissenyar un pla de recerca que pretén aprofundir en aquest plantejament. Amb aquest objectiu en ment, el treball de tesi es basa inicialment en una revisió crítica d'estudis anteriors que intenten relacionar el comportament social dels primats i l'evolució del neocórtex –la Hipòtesi del Cervell Social de Dunbar (Dunbar, 1992; Dunbar, 1998; Dunbar & Shultz, 2007; Shultz & Dunbar, 2007; Dunbar, 2010). Aquesta revisió mostra clarament la necessitat d'un enfocament més matisat per explicar aquesta relació a causa de l'enorme complexitat de les relacions socials humanes. Per això, l'estudi de la influència del mecanisme psicològic de la confiança ofereix un interès enorme. No obstant això, els estudis de Dunbar, especialment aquells relacionats amb les característiques dels grups socials humans en relació amb la seva capacitat cognitiva, sóntinguts en compte al llarg de tot aquest treball. Després d'aquesta revisió es proposa un marc teòric sobre els factors que influeixen en la confiança (Parsons, 1970; Barber, 1983; Good, 1988; Yamagishi, 1998; Glaeser et al., 2000; Uslaner, 2002; Six, 2005; Bjørnskov, 2006; Hardin, 2006) i la seva possible configuració en un entorn evolutiu. En base a aquest marc teòric, es dissenyen els treballs empírics posteriors, sempre tenint en compte la hipòtesi que l'ésser humà té un comportament social àmpliament influenciat per un context de relacions dintre de petits grups. Aquest és el context social en que han viscut els humans durant la major part de la seva història evolutiva. El marc teòric explica els elements que conformen la confiança, la tipologia i la seva possible configuració al llarg de la història evolutiva. Constitueix el substrat utilitzat per dur a terme l'anàlisi de la confiança i del comportament cooperatiu en els següents treballs empírics. Aquests estudis empírics segueixen un pla basat en un disseny propi, a partir de la revisió de la literatura (Fey, 1955; Rosenberg, 1957; Wrightsman, 1964, 1974; Rotter, 1967; Survey Research Center, 1969; Christie & Geis, 1970; Johnson- George & Swap, 1982; Rempel et al., 1985; World Values Survey Association, 2009), amb qüestionaris per mesurar el nivell de confiança personal i general en un grup. També s'utilitza un joc experimental –el dilema del presoner amb algunes variacions– que demostra el comportament cooperatiu efectiu dels individus. El joc es realitza en condicions de confiança i sense confiança entre els membres d'un mateix grup. L'estudi pilot inicial es realitza en dos grups diferents. Els resultats ja mostren la influència de les relacions estretes de confiança personal en la cooperació i l'interès de anàlisi de xarxes de confiança (Radcliffe-Brown, 1940; Barnes, 1954; Milgram, 1967; Mitchell, 1969; Wasserman & Faust, 1994; Molina, J.L., 2001; White & Harary, 2001; Newman et al., 2003; Freeman, 2004; Eguíluz et al., 2005; Fowler & Christakis, 2010) en major profunditat. Els resultats d'aquest treball es confirmen en un similar estudi posterior amb altres grups més nombrosos i més comparables entre si. Els nous resultats mostren com la cooperació s'incrementa en gran mesura si es dóna un compromís afectiu inconscient de reciprocitat que ve de la confiança personal, com un element adaptatiu cap a una cooperació més efectiva i recíproca, fins i tot en condicions d'anonimat i malgrat la possibilitat de causar un prejudici en el curt termini. A més, l'estudi inclou una anàlisi en profunditat de les xarxes de confiança d'aquests grups per determinar la importància que poden tenir certes topologies de xarxes de confiança en la cohesió general d'un grup. En la darrera part de la tesi, s'utilitza una perspectiva més antropològica amb la realització de treballs de camp en dues àrees que es caracteritzen per la seva gran diversitat ètnica: nord de Ghana i Oaxaca, a Mèxic. Aquests llocs permeten estudiar com interactuen els grups i per què es mantenen les seves identitats ètniques malgrat una història i un territori en comú. Es pretén examinar també si els mecanismes de la confiança personal, que funcionen clarament a nivell individual, poden trobar-se també en grups grans o societats de gran escala. En aquest cas, a més de l'observació directa dels grups i la inclusió del seu context històric, social, econòmic i polític, s'utilitzen entrevistes i xarxes personals de cooperació. En el treball de Ghana (Rattray, 1931, 1932;) Syme, 1932; Tait, 1961; Hilton, 1962; Hart, 1971; Drucker-Brown, 1975, 1992; Primmirat, 1979; Laari, 1987; Awedoba, 1989, 2001; Wilks, 1989; Assimeng, 1990; Kotey, 1995; Schlottner, 2000; Oppong, 2002; Tonah, 2005), es mostra el context dels grups i s'explica les característiques de les seves xarxes de confiança i cooperació. En aquest estudi es posa de manifest l''eficàcia del fenomen de la diversificació ètnic com un mitjà per crear petits grups més resistents quan s'enfronten amb entorns difícils. També s'analitza l'adopció de formes culturals que permeten ampliar el mecanisme de la confiança personal a grups més grans. En l'últim treball de la tesi es comparen els anteriors resultats de Ghana amb els de Mèxic (Chance, 1979; Zeithin, 1990; Campbell, 1993; Oseguera, 2004; Reina Aoyama, 2004; Webmoney, 2006, 2008; Trejo Barrientos, 2006; Espores, 2008; Joyce, 2010; Nahmad Sitton, 2013), en una anàlisi intercultural per identificar possibles elements "universals" a les xarxes de confiança i cooperació i així com les influències culturals que modulen aquestes predisposicions humanes en cada cas. Conclusions Els diversos treballs en conjunt mostren que la confiança és un mecanisme cognitiu i psicològic ancorat en la història evolutiva humana, que ha jugat un paper important en l'evolució de la cooperació que caracteritza les societats humanes. El seu origen evolutiu es desprèn dels resultats d'aquesta tesi: es demostra que la confiança personal té més influència que la confiança general en la cooperació, que la confiança necessita relacions properes i, per tant, del petit grup per la seva aparició – tenint en compte les limitacions cognitives per mantenir aquestes relacions amb un gran nombre de persones– i la seva estreta connexió amb aspectes emocionals inconscients – un dels mecanismes més primitiu en humans. De fet, la configuració de les xarxes de confiança en petits grups apareixen tant als treballs empírics com als treballs de camp,. La confiança personal també es pot ampliar a col·lectius més grans. Fins i tot a les societats més desenvolupades les persones continuen creant els grups reduïts en tots els àmbits de la seva vida. No obstant això, en algunes societats, on hi ha importants dificultats de supervivència, com les analitzades en aquesta tesi, hi ha certes eines culturals que serveixen per ampliar la confiança personal a un major nombre de persones: conceptes com grups ètnics, clans, llinatges, famílies, coincidència, "comunalidad" i municipi en cas d'Oaxaca, valors interioritzats, etc. són eficaços en aquest sentit. Així, la cultura proporciona els mecanismes necessaris per a crear uns vincles forts de cohesió basats en elements emocionals. Una major cohesió i una actitud més oberta de confiança derivada de tals eines culturals ajuden a enfrontar-se als ambients més eficaçment. Així, es podria predir que quan els entorns són més difícils, es mostrarà una major diversificació dels grups. Amb la comparació dels resultats de Ghana i Mèxic, s'aprofundeix en major mesura en els elements comuns en les xarxes de confiança i cooperació –aspectes universals–: petits grups i diferents nivells d'emocionalitat implícita en els vincles de confiança; i elements culturals que s'adeqüin al context històric i la situació econòmica dels grups, per crear una més o menys cohesió dels seus integrants segons les seves necessitats. Així, a més d'identificar en el camp diferents indicadors i eines per mesurar la confiança, són també identificades certes formes culturals que semblen més eficaces que altres quan es tracta d'unir els grups, és a dir, els valors i el sentit d'identitat i grup de pertinença, davant les normes i l'autoritat. ; Introduction Human social life is sustained by cooperation in a different way with respect to other species. Scientists have investigated human cooperation from different points of view (Trivers, 1971; Dawkins, 1976; Axelrod y Hamilton, 1981; Axelrod, 1984; Caporael et al., 1989; Boyd & Richerson, 1990; Wilson & Sober, 1994; Bergstrom, 2002; Boyd et al., 2003; Gintis et al., 2003; Bowles & Gintis, 2004; Gintis et al., 2008; Boyd et al., 2010) but many questions about the evolution of cooperation remain open. In this dissertation the cooperative relationships are analyzed emphasizing its intrinsic link with trust relationships. Why do we cooperate? What is the influence of trust on cooperation and which role does human evolutionary history play in this puzzle? Considering the social forms our ancestors lived by, it is possible to think in certain cognitive and psychological traits that might have a key importance in order to understand the relationships of cooperation and, in a wider sense, the social relationships it made possible. The goal is, in short, framing social relationships in an evolutionary framework in order to explain the social behaviors of nowadays. Content of research This work attempts to answer these questions firstly on the basis of the relation between the evolution of human sociality and cognition, as a hypothesis to be tested in the following studies. From this perspective and using a multidisciplinary methodology including Sociology, Psychology and Anthropology, a research plan was designed in order to further examine these topics. This dissertation starts with a critical review of some previous studies that relate the social behavior in primates to the evolution of the neocortex –Dunbar's Social Brain Hypothesis (Dunbar, 1992; Dunbar, 1998; Dunbar & Shultz, 2007; Shultz & Dunbar, 2007; Dunbar, 2010). This review shows the need for a more nuanced approach in order to explain this dependence because of the enormous complexity of human social relationships. To achieve this goal, the analysis of the psychological mechanism of trust offers a huge interest. However, Dunbar's studies, especially those that relate human social groups to cognitive ability, are continuously in the background throughout all this work. Next, a theoretical framework is introduced to characterize trust and the factors that influence it (Parsons, 1970; Barber, 1983; Good, 1988; Yamagishi, 1998; Glaeser et al., 2000; Uslaner, 2002; Six, 2005; Bjørnskov, 2006; Hardin, 2006), as well as their possible configuration in an evolutionary environment. On the basis of this theoretical framework the subsequent empirical work is designed, always keeping in mind the assumption that humans have a social behavior widely influenced by a context of relationships within small groups. They are the social configuration humans lived most of their evolutionary history. In the theoretical framework the elements that make up trust, its typology and its possible configuration in the evolutionary history are explained. This work is the substrate used to groundthe analysis of trust and cooperative behavior carried out in the following empirical works. These empirical studies follow an original plan, grounded in a literature review (Fey, 1955; Rosenberg, 1957; Wrightsman, 1964, 1974; Rotter, 1967; Survey Research Center, 1969; Christie & Geis, 1970; Johnson-George & Swap, 1982; Rempel et al., 1985; World Values Survey Association, 2009), which involves the development of new questionnaires to measure the level of general and personal trust in a group. In addition, an experimental game –a prisoner's dilemma with some variants– is included in order to show the effective cooperative behavior of participants. The game is played in conditions of trust and non-trust among the members of the group. The pilot study is initially conducted in two different groups. The results already show the influence of close relationships of personal trust in cooperation and the interest of analyze trust networks (Radcliffe-Brown, 1940; Barnes, 1954; Milgram, 1967; Mitchell, 1969; Wasserman & Faust, 1994; Molina, J.L., 2001; White & Harary, 2001; Newman et al., 2003; Freeman, 2004; Eguíluz et al., 2005; Fowler & Christakis, 2010) more deeply. The results of this work are confirmed in a subsequent similar study with other more numerous and more comparable groups. The new results show how cooperation relates largely to an affective commitment of reciprocity that comes from personal trust, as adaptive element towards a more successful cooperation, even in conditions of anonymity, and despite the possibility of causing a cost in individuals in the short term. In addition, the study includes an analysis in depth of these groups' trust networks to analyze the importance that certain topologies of trust networks can have on the general cohesion of a group. The last part of the dissertation shows a more anthropological perspective with the completion of fieldwork in two areas characterized by a great ethnic diversity: Northern Ghana and Oaxaca, in Mexico. These locations allow study how groups interact and why they keep their ethnic identities despite a history and a territory in common. To examine whether the personal trust mechanisms present at an individual level can be also extended to larger groups or societies is aimed. In this case, in addition to the direct observation of groups and the inclusion of its historical, social, economic and political context, interviews and personal networks of cooperation are used. The work of Ghana (Rattray, 1931, 1932) Syme, 1932; Tait, 1961; Hilton, 1962; Hart, 1971; Drucker-Brown, 1975, 1992; Primmirat, 1979; Laari, 1987; Awedoba, 1989, 2001; Wilks, 1989; Assimeng, 1990; Kotey, 1995; Schlottner, 2000; Oppong, 2002; Tonah, 2005) shows the context of groups and the features of their trust networks of trust and cooperation are explained . In this work, the effectiveness of ethnic diversification as a means to create small groups more resilient when face with difficult environments is shown. The adoption of cultural forms that allow extend personal trust in larger collectives is also presented. The last work compares the Ghana results with those of Mexico (Chance, 1979; Zeithin, 1990; Campbell, 1993; Oseguera, 2004; Queen Aoyama, 2004; Barabas, 2006, 2008; Trejo Barrientos, 2006; Spores, 2008; Joyce, 2010; Nahmad Sitton, 2013), in a cross-cultural analysis to identify possible "universal" elements in trust and cooperation networks, and also cultural influences. Conclusions The previous works show that trust is a cognitive and psychological mechanism anchored in human evolutionary history. Their evolutionary origin is supported by the results of this dissertation: to demonstrate the higher influence of personal trust than general trust in fostering cooperation. Close relationships are needed for personal trust and they require small groups for its emergence –given the cognitive and temporal constraints required in order to keep such relationships with a larger number of people. Close relationships also involve an emotional dimension –a most primitive mechanism in humans. In fact, small group dynamics was found both in experimental games and in fieldwork. Personal trust also plays a role in large scale societies, where individuals continue to create their small groups in all areas of their life. However, in those societies where survival is more difficult and resources scarce certain cultural tools (such as values or norms) appear whose function is to extend personal trust to a greater number of people: groups such as ethnic groups, clans, lineages, families, commonalities, municipalities (as in the Oaxaca case). Thus, culture provides the necessary mechanisms to create strong bonds of cohesion based on emotional elements beyond the small group. Greater cohesion and a more open attitude of trust arising from such cultural tools help at time to face environments more efficiently. Thus, it could be predicted that more difficult environments show a greater group diversification. In addition, the comparison of Ghana and Mexico results allows a deeper analysis of the common elements of trust and cooperation networks -their universal aspects-: small groups and different levels of emotionality implied in the bonds of trust; and cultural elements that are suited to the historical context and the economic situation of groups, to create a more or less cohesion of its members according to their needs. Thus, in addition to identify in the field several indicators to measure trust, more effective cultural forms to foster cooperation is also identified: the values and the sense of identity of group membership, instead of formal regulations and authority.

[spa] La vida social humana se sustenta en la cooperación de una forma diferente respecto a otras especies. Los científicos han indagado en la evolución de la cooperación desde distintos puntos de vista (Trivers, 1971; Dawkins, 1976; Axelrod y Hamilton, 1981; Axelrod, 1984; Caporael et al., 1989; Boyd & Richerson, 1990; Wilson & Sober, 1994; Bergstrom, 2002; Boyd et al., 2003; Gintis et al., 2003; Bowles & Gintis, 2004; Gintis et al., 2008; Boyd et al., 2010) pero ninguna de tales explicaciones dan cuenta de la complejidad de las relaciones cooperativas humanas. En este trabajo de tesis se analizan las relaciones cooperativas destacando su relación intrínseca con las relaciones de confianza. ¿Por qué cooperamos? ¿Cuál es la influencia de la confianza en la cooperación y qué papel juega la historia evolutiva en este puzle? Tomando en consideración las formas sociales adoptadas por nuestros antepasados humanos, es posible pensar en ciertos rasgos cognitivos y psicológicos específicos relevantes para entender las relaciones actuales de cooperación y, en un sentido más amplio, las relaciones sociales. El objetivo es, en definitiva, enmarcar las relaciones sociales humanas en un entorno evolutivo para explicar comportamientos sociales que existen en la actualidad. Contenido de la investigación Esta tesis trata de responder a las cuestiones planteadas anteriormente basándose primero en la relación que existe entre la evolución de la socialidad y la cognición humanas, como hipótesis de partida a contrastar en estudios posteriores. Desde esta perspectiva y, utilizando una metodología multidisciplinar procedente de disciplinas tales como la Sociología, Psicología y Antropología, se diseña un plan de investigación que trata de profundizar en mayor medida en dichos temas. El trabajo de tesis parte inicialmente de una revisión crítica sobre estudios que tratan de relacionar el comportamiento social en primates y la evolución del neocórtex –la Hipótesis del Cerebro Social de Dunbar (Dunbar, 1992; Dunbar, 1998; Dunbar & Shultz, 2007; Shultz & Dunbar, 2007; Dunbar, 2010). De dicha revisión, resulta evidente la necesidad de utilizar un enfoque más matizado para explicar la enorme complejidad de las relaciones sociales humanas. Para ello, ofrece un enorme interés el análisis de la influencia del mecanismo psicológico de la confianza. No obstante, los estudios de Dunbar, especialmente aquellos relacionados con las características propias de los grupos sociales humanos en relación a la capacidad cognitiva, son continuamente revisados a lo largo de todo este trabajo. Posteriormente se propone un marco teórico sobre los factores que influyen en la confianza (Parsons, 1970; Barber, 1983; Good, 1988; Yamagishi, 1998; Glaeser et al., 2000; Uslaner, 2002; Six, 2005; Bjørnskov, 2006; Hardin, 2006) y su posible configuración en un entorno evolutivo. Sobre esta base teórica, se diseña el posterior trabajo empírico, siempre teniendo en cuenta la hipótesis de que el ser humano tiene un comportamiento social ampliamente influenciado por un contexto de relaciones dentro de los pequeños grupos en los que ha convivido durante la mayor parte de su historia evolutiva. El marco teórico explica los elementos que conforman la confianza, la tipología y su posible configuración a lo largo de la historia evolutiva. Constituyen el substrato utilizado para llevar a término el análisis de la confianza y del comportamiento cooperativo en los siguientes trabajos empíricos. Los estudios empíricos siguen un plan basado en un diseño propio, procedente de la revisión de la literatura (Fey, 1955; Rosenberg, 1957; Wrightsman, 1964, 1974; Rotter, 1967; Survey Research Center, 1969; Christie & Geis, 1970; Johnson-George & Swap, 1982; Rempel et al., 1985; World Values Survey Association, 2009), con cuestionarios para medir el nivel de confianza general y personal en un grupo. Además se usa un juego experimental – dilema del prisionero con algunas variantes– que demuestra el comportamiento cooperativo real de los individuos. El juego se realiza en condiciones de confianza y de no confianza entre los miembros de un mismo grupo. El estudio piloto se lleva a cabo inicialmente en dos grupos diferentes. Los resultados muestran ya la influencia de las relaciones cercanas de confianza personal en la cooperación y el interés de analizar las redes de confianza (Radcliffe-Brown, 1940; Barnes, 1954; Milgram, 1967; Mitchell, 1969; Wasserman & Faust, 1994; Molina, J.L., 2001; White & Harary, 2001; Newman et al., 2003; Freeman, 2004; Eguíluz et al., 2005; Fowler & Christakis, 2010) en mayor profundidad. Los resultados de este trabajo se confirman en un estudio similar posterior con otros grupos más numerosos y más comparables entre sí. Los nuevos resultados muestran cómo la cooperación se relaciona en buena medida con un compromiso afectivo de reciprocidad que proviene de la confianza personal, como elemento adaptativo hacia una cooperación más exitosa, incluso en condiciones de anonimato y pese a la posibilidad de causar un perjuicio en el individuo a corto plazo. Además, el estudio incluye un análisis en profundidad de las redes de confianza de estos grupos para constatar la importancia que ciertas topologías de redes de confianza pueden tener en la cohesión general de un grupo. La última parte de la tesis presenta una perspectiva más antropológica con la realización de trabajo de campo en dos zonas caracterizadas por su gran diversidad étnica: el norte de Ghana y Oaxaca, en México. Estos lugares permiten estudiar cómo interaccionan los grupos y por qué mantienen sus identidades étnicas a pesar de una historia en común. Se pretende analizar si los mecanismos de la confianza personal que aparecen a nivel individual pueden trasladarse también a grupos más grandes o a sociedades. En este caso, además de la observación directa de los grupos y de la inclusión de su contexto histórico, social, económico y político, se utilizan entrevistas y redes personales de cooperación. En el trabajo de Ghana (Rattray, 1931, 1932; Syme, 1932; Tait, 1961; Hilton, 1962; Hart, 1971; Drucker-Brown, 1975, 1992; Fussy, 1979; Laari, 1987; Awedoba, 1989, 2001; Wilks, 1989; Assimeng, 1990; Kotey, 1995; Schlottner, 2000; Oppong, 2002; Tonah, 2005), se hace un recorrido por el contexto de los grupos y se explican las características de sus redes de confianza y cooperación. En este trabajo, se observa la eficacia de la diversificación étnica como medio para crear pequeños grupos más resistentes a la hora de enfrentarse a entornos difíciles. Se muestra también la adopción de formas culturales que permiten extender los mecanismos de la confianza personal en colectivos mayores. En el último trabajo se comparan los resultados anteriores con los de México (Chance, 1979; Zeithin, 1990; Campbell, 1993; Oseguera, 2004; Reina Aoyama, 2004; Barabas, 2006, 2008; Trejo Barrientos, 2006; Spores, 2008; Joyce, 2010; Nahmad Sitton, 2013), en un análisis cross-cultural para identificar posibles elementos "universales" en las redes de confianza y cooperación y también las influencias culturales. Conclusiones Mediante los anteriores trabajos se muestra que la confianza es uno de los mecanismos cognitivos y psicológicos más anclado en la historia evolutiva humana. Su origen evolutivo se observa en los resultados de esta tesis: al demostrarse la mayor influencia de la confianza personal sobre la confianza general a la hora de influir en la cooperación, la cual necesita de las relaciones cercanas y por tanto del pequeño grupo para su aparición –dadas las limitaciones cognitivas y temporales para mantener este tipo de relaciones con gran número de personas–, y su fuerte conexión con aspectos emocionales inconscientes –uno de los mecanismo más primitivos en los seres humanos. De hecho, tanto en el trabajo empírico como en el de campo, aparece la configuración de redes de confianza en torno a pequeños grupos. La confianza personal también puede extenderse a colectivos mayores. Incluso en las grandes sociedades más desarrolladas los individuos siguen creando sus pequeños grupos en todos los ámbitos de su vida. Sin embargo, en algunas sociedades, donde existen mayores dificultades de supervivencia, como las analizadas en esta tesis, se observan determinadas herramientas culturales que sirven para extender la confianza personal a un mayor número de personas: conceptos tales como grupos étnicos, clanes, linajes, familias, comunalidad, municipalidad en el caso oaxaqueño, valores internalizados, etc… son eficaces en este sentido. De este modo, la cultura provee de los mecanismos necesarios para crear fuertes lazos de cohesión basados en los elementos emocionales. La mayor cohesión y una actitud más abierta de confianza que surgen de tales herramientas culturales ayudan a enfrentarse a los entornos de forma más eficaz. Así pues, se podría predecir que a medida que los entornos resultan más difíciles, aparece una mayor diversificación de los grupos. Con la comparación de los resultados de Ghana y México, se profundiza en mayor medida en los elementos comunes en las redes de confianza y cooperación –aspectos universales–: los grupos pequeños y distintos niveles de emocionalidad implícita en los vínculos de confianza; y aquellos elementos culturales que se adecuan al contexto histórico y a la situación económica de los grupos, para crear una mayor o menor cohesión de sus miembros en función de sus necesidades. De este modo, además de identificarse en el campo diferentes indicadores para medir la confianza, también se identifican ciertas formas culturales que parecen más eficaces que otras a la hora de cohesionar los grupos, a saber, los valores y el sentimiento de identidad y pertenencia grupal, frente a la normatividad. ; [cat] La vida social humana es basa en la cooperació i la confiança d'una manera diferent de la d'altres espècies. Els científics han investigat la cooperació humana des de diferents punts de vista (Trivers, 1971; Dawkins, 1976; Axelrod y Hamilton, 1981; Axelrod, 1984; Caporael et al., 1989; Boyd & Richerson, 1990; Wilson & Sober, 1994; Bergstrom, 2002; Boyd et al., 2003; Gintis et al., 2003; Bowles & Gintis, 2004; Gintis et al., 2008; Boyd et al., 2010), però encara hi ha moltes preguntes sobre l'evolució de la cooperació sense explicació. Aquest treball de tesi analitza les relacions cooperatives emfasitzant la seva relació intrínseca amb les relacions de confiança. Per què cooperem? Quina és la influència de la confiança en la cooperació i el paper de la història evolutiva en aquest trencaclosques? Tenint en compte les formes socials adoptades pels avantpassats humans, és possible pensar en certs trets cognitius i psicològics específics que podrien tenir una importància clau per entendre les actuals relacions de cooperació i, en un sentit més ampli, les relacions socials. L'objectiu de la tesi és, en definitiva, emmarcar les relacions socials en un entorn evolutiu per explicar els comportaments socials que existeixen avui en dia. Contingut de la investigació Aquesta tesi tracta de respondre les preguntes anteriors, a partir de la relació entre l'evolució de la sociabilitat i la cognició humà, com hipòtesi inicial per contrastar els estudis posteriors. Des d'aquesta perspectiva i utilitzant una metodologia multidisciplinària de la Psicologia, Antropologia i Sociologia, es va dissenyar un pla de recerca que pretén aprofundir en aquest plantejament. Amb aquest objectiu en ment, el treball de tesi es basa inicialment en una revisió crítica d'estudis anteriors que intenten relacionar el comportament social dels primats i l'evolució del neocórtex –la Hipòtesi del Cervell Social de Dunbar (Dunbar, 1992; Dunbar, 1998; Dunbar & Shultz, 2007; Shultz & Dunbar, 2007; Dunbar, 2010). Aquesta revisió mostra clarament la necessitat d'un enfocament més matisat per explicar aquesta relació a causa de l'enorme complexitat de les relacions socials humanes. Per això, l'estudi de la influència del mecanisme psicològic de la confiança ofereix un interès enorme. No obstant això, els estudis de Dunbar, especialment aquells relacionats amb les característiques dels grups socials humans en relació amb la seva capacitat cognitiva, sóntinguts en compte al llarg de tot aquest treball. Després d'aquesta revisió es proposa un marc teòric sobre els factors que influeixen en la confiança (Parsons, 1970; Barber, 1983; Good, 1988; Yamagishi, 1998; Glaeser et al., 2000; Uslaner, 2002; Six, 2005; Bjørnskov, 2006; Hardin, 2006) i la seva possible configuració en un entorn evolutiu. En base a aquest marc teòric, es dissenyen els treballs empírics posteriors, sempre tenint en compte la hipòtesi que l'ésser humà té un comportament social àmpliament influenciat per un context de relacions dintre de petits grups. Aquest és el context social en que han viscut els humans durant la major part de la seva història evolutiva. El marc teòric explica els elements que conformen la confiança, la tipologia i la seva possible configuració al llarg de la història evolutiva. Constitueix el substrat utilitzat per dur a terme l'anàlisi de la confiança i del comportament cooperatiu en els següents treballs empírics. Aquests estudis empírics segueixen un pla basat en un disseny propi, a partir de la revisió de la literatura (Fey, 1955; Rosenberg, 1957; Wrightsman, 1964, 1974; Rotter, 1967; Survey Research Center, 1969; Christie & Geis, 1970; Johnson- George & Swap, 1982; Rempel et al., 1985; World Values Survey Association, 2009), amb qüestionaris per mesurar el nivell de confiança personal i general en un grup. També s'utilitza un joc experimental –el dilema del presoner amb algunes variacions– que demostra el comportament cooperatiu efectiu dels individus. El joc es realitza en condicions de confiança i sense confiança entre els membres d'un mateix grup. L'estudi pilot inicial es realitza en dos grups diferents. Els resultats ja mostren la influència de les relacions estretes de confiança personal en la cooperació i l'interès de anàlisi de xarxes de confiança (Radcliffe-Brown, 1940; Barnes, 1954; Milgram, 1967; Mitchell, 1969; Wasserman & Faust, 1994; Molina, J.L., 2001; White & Harary, 2001; Newman et al., 2003; Freeman, 2004; Eguíluz et al., 2005; Fowler & Christakis, 2010) en major profunditat. Els resultats d'aquest treball es confirmen en un similar estudi posterior amb altres grups més nombrosos i més comparables entre si. Els nous resultats mostren com la cooperació s'incrementa en gran mesura si es dóna un compromís afectiu inconscient de reciprocitat que ve de la confiança personal, com un element adaptatiu cap a una cooperació més efectiva i recíproca, fins i tot en condicions d'anonimat i malgrat la possibilitat de causar un prejudici en el curt termini. A més, l'estudi inclou una anàlisi en profunditat de les xarxes de confiança d'aquests grups per determinar la importància que poden tenir certes topologies de xarxes de confiança en la cohesió general d'un grup. En la darrera part de la tesi, s'utilitza una perspectiva més antropològica amb la realització de treballs de camp en dues àrees que es caracteritzen per la seva gran diversitat ètnica: nord de Ghana i Oaxaca, a Mèxic. Aquests llocs permeten estudiar com interactuen els grups i per què es mantenen les seves identitats ètniques malgrat una història i un territori en comú. Es pretén examinar també si els mecanismes de la confiança personal, que funcionen clarament a nivell individual, poden trobar-se també en grups grans o societats de gran escala. En aquest cas, a més de l'observació directa dels grups i la inclusió del seu context històric, social, econòmic i polític, s'utilitzen entrevistes i xarxes personals de cooperació. En el treball de Ghana (Rattray, 1931, 1932;) Syme, 1932; Tait, 1961; Hilton, 1962; Hart, 1971; Drucker-Brown, 1975, 1992; Primmirat, 1979; Laari, 1987; Awedoba, 1989, 2001; Wilks, 1989; Assimeng, 1990; Kotey, 1995; Schlottner, 2000; Oppong, 2002; Tonah, 2005), es mostra el context dels grups i s'explica les característiques de les seves xarxes de confiança i cooperació. En aquest estudi es posa de manifest l''eficàcia del fenomen de la diversificació ètnic com un mitjà per crear petits grups més resistents quan s'enfronten amb entorns difícils. També s'analitza l'adopció de formes culturals que permeten ampliar el mecanisme de la confiança personal a grups més grans. En l'últim treball de la tesi es comparen els anteriors resultats de Ghana amb els de Mèxic (Chance, 1979; Zeithin, 1990; Campbell, 1993; Oseguera, 2004; Reina Aoyama, 2004; Webmoney, 2006, 2008; Trejo Barrientos, 2006; Espores, 2008; Joyce, 2010; Nahmad Sitton, 2013), en una anàlisi intercultural per identificar possibles elements "universals" a les xarxes de confiança i cooperació i així com les influències culturals que modulen aquestes predisposicions humanes en cada cas. Conclusions Els diversos treballs en conjunt mostren que la confiança és un mecanisme cognitiu i psicològic ancorat en la història evolutiva humana, que ha jugat un paper important en l'evolució de la cooperació que caracteritza les societats humanes. El seu origen evolutiu es desprèn dels resultats d'aquesta tesi: es demostra que la confiança personal té més influència que la confiança general en la cooperació, que la confiança necessita relacions properes i, per tant, del petit grup per la seva aparició – tenint en compte les limitacions cognitives per mantenir aquestes relacions amb un gran nombre de persones– i la seva estreta connexió amb aspectes emocionals inconscients – un dels mecanismes més primitiu en humans. De fet, la configuració de les xarxes de confiança en petits grups apareixen tant als treballs empírics com als treballs de camp,. La confiança personal també es pot ampliar a col·lectius més grans. Fins i tot a les societats més desenvolupades les persones continuen creant els grups reduïts en tots els àmbits de la seva vida. No obstant això, en algunes societats, on hi ha importants dificultats de supervivència, com les analitzades en aquesta tesi, hi ha certes eines culturals que serveixen per ampliar la confiança personal a un major nombre de persones: conceptes com grups ètnics, clans, llinatges, famílies, coincidència, "comunalidad" i municipi en cas d'Oaxaca, valors interioritzats, etc. són eficaços en aquest sentit. Així, la cultura proporciona els mecanismes necessaris per a crear uns vincles forts de cohesió basats en elements emocionals. Una major cohesió i una actitud més oberta de confiança derivada de tals eines culturals ajuden a enfrontar-se als ambients més eficaçment. Així, es podria predir que quan els entorns són més difícils, es mostrarà una major diversificació dels grups. Amb la comparació dels resultats de Ghana i Mèxic, s'aprofundeix en major mesura en els elements comuns en les xarxes de confiança i cooperació –aspectes universals–: petits grups i diferents nivells d'emocionalitat implícita en els vincles de confiança; i elements culturals que s'adeqüin al context històric i la situació econòmica dels grups, per crear una més o menys cohesió dels seus integrants segons les seves necessitats. Així, a més d'identificar en el camp diferents indicadors i eines per mesurar la confiança, són també identificades certes formes culturals que semblen més eficaces que altres quan es tracta d'unir els grups, és a dir, els valors i el sentit d'identitat i grup de pertinença, davant les normes i l'autoritat. ; [eng] Human social life is sustained by cooperation in a different way with respect to other species. Scientists have investigated human cooperation from different points of view (Trivers, 1971; Dawkins, 1976; Axelrod y Hamilton, 1981; Axelrod, 1984; Caporael et al., 1989; Boyd & Richerson, 1990; Wilson & Sober, 1994; Bergstrom, 2002; Boyd et al., 2003; Gintis et al., 2003; Bowles & Gintis, 2004; Gintis et al., 2008; Boyd et al., 2010) but many questions about the evolution of cooperation remain open. In this dissertation the cooperative relationships are analyzed emphasizing its intrinsic link with trust relationships. Why do we cooperate? What is the influence of trust on cooperation and which role does human evolutionary history play in this puzzle? Considering the social forms our ancestors lived by, it is possible to think in certain cognitive and psychological traits that might have a key importance in order to understand the relationships of cooperation and, in a wider sense, the social relationships it made possible. The goal is, in short, framing social relationships in an evolutionary framework in order to explain the social behaviors of nowadays. Content of research This work attempts to answer these questions firstly on the basis of the relation between the evolution of human sociality and cognition, as a hypothesis to be tested in the following studies. From this perspective and using a multidisciplinary methodology including Sociology, Psychology and Anthropology, a research plan was designed in order to further examine these topics. This dissertation starts with a critical review of some previous studies that relate the social behavior in primates to the evolution of the neocortex –Dunbar's Social Brain Hypothesis (Dunbar, 1992; Dunbar, 1998; Dunbar & Shultz, 2007; Shultz & Dunbar, 2007; Dunbar, 2010). This review shows the need for a more nuanced approach in order to explain this dependence because of the enormous complexity of human social relationships. To achieve this goal, the analysis of the psychological mechanism of trust offers a huge interest. However, Dunbar's studies, especially those that relate human social groups to cognitive ability, are continuously in the background throughout all this work. Next, a theoretical framework is introduced to characterize trust and the factors that influence it (Parsons, 1970; Barber, 1983; Good, 1988; Yamagishi, 1998; Glaeser et al., 2000; Uslaner, 2002; Six, 2005; Bjørnskov, 2006; Hardin, 2006), as well as their possible configuration in an evolutionary environment. On the basis of this theoretical framework the subsequent empirical work is designed, always keeping in mind the assumption that humans have a social behavior widely influenced by a context of relationships within small groups. They are the social configuration humans lived most of their evolutionary history. In the theoretical framework the elements that make up trust, its typology and its possible configuration in the evolutionary history are explained. This work is the substrate used to groundthe analysis of trust and cooperative behavior carried out in the following empirical works. These empirical studies follow an original plan, grounded in a literature review (Fey, 1955; Rosenberg, 1957; Wrightsman, 1964, 1974; Rotter, 1967; Survey Research Center, 1969; Christie & Geis, 1970; Johnson-George & Swap, 1982; Rempel et al., 1985; World Values Survey Association, 2009), which involves the development of new questionnaires to measure the level of general and personal trust in a group. In addition, an experimental game –a prisoner's dilemma with some variants– is included in order to show the effective cooperative behavior of participants. The game is played in conditions of trust and non-trust among the members of the group. The pilot study is initially conducted in two different groups. The results already show the influence of close relationships of personal trust in cooperation and the interest of analyze trust networks (Radcliffe-Brown, 1940; Barnes, 1954; Milgram, 1967; Mitchell, 1969; Wasserman & Faust, 1994; Molina, J.L., 2001; White & Harary, 2001; Newman et al., 2003; Freeman, 2004; Eguíluz et al., 2005; Fowler & Christakis, 2010) more deeply. The results of this work are confirmed in a subsequent similar study with other more numerous and more comparable groups. The new results show how cooperation relates largely to an affective commitment of reciprocity that comes from personal trust, as adaptive element towards a more successful cooperation, even in conditions of anonymity, and despite the possibility of causing a cost in individuals in the short term. In addition, the study includes an analysis in depth of these groups' trust networks to analyze the importance that certain topologies of trust networks can have on the general cohesion of a group. The last part of the dissertation shows a more anthropological perspective with the completion of fieldwork in two areas characterized by a great ethnic diversity: Northern Ghana and Oaxaca, in Mexico. These locations allow study how groups interact and why they keep their ethnic identities despite a history and a territory in common. To examine whether the personal trust mechanisms present at an individual level can be also extended to larger groups or societies is aimed. In this case, in addition to the direct observation of groups and the inclusion of its historical, social, economic and political context, interviews and personal networks of cooperation are used. The work of Ghana (Rattray, 1931, 1932) Syme, 1932; Tait, 1961; Hilton, 1962; Hart, 1971; Drucker-Brown, 1975, 1992; Primmirat, 1979; Laari, 1987; Awedoba, 1989, 2001; Wilks, 1989; Assimeng, 1990; Kotey, 1995; Schlottner, 2000; Oppong, 2002; Tonah, 2005) shows the context of groups and the features of their trust networks of trust and cooperation are explained . In this work, the effectiveness of ethnic diversification as a means to create small groups more resilient when face with difficult environments is shown. The adoption of cultural forms that allow extend personal trust in larger collectives is also presented. The last work compares the Ghana results with those of Mexico (Chance, 1979; Zeithin, 1990; Campbell, 1993; Oseguera, 2004; Queen Aoyama, 2004; Barabas, 2006, 2008; Trejo Barrientos, 2006; Spores, 2008; Joyce, 2010; Nahmad Sitton, 2013), in a cross-cultural analysis to identify possible "universal" elements in trust and cooperation networks, and also cultural influences. Conclusions The previous works show that trust is a cognitive and psychological mechanism anchored in human evolutionary history. Their evolutionary origin is supported by the results of this dissertation: to demonstrate the higher influence of personal trust than general trust in fostering cooperation. Close relationships are needed for personal trust and they require small groups for its emergence –given the cognitive and temporal constraints required in order to keep such relationships with a larger number of people. Close relationships also involve an emotional dimension –a most primitive mechanism in humans. In fact, small group dynamics was found both in experimental games and in fieldwork. Personal trust also plays a role in large scale societies, where individuals continue to create their small groups in all areas of their life. However, in those societies where survival is more difficult and resources scarce certain cultural tools (such as values or norms) appear whose function is to extend personal trust to a greater number of people: groups such as ethnic groups, clans, lineages, families, commonalities, municipalities (as in the Oaxaca case). Thus, culture provides the necessary mechanisms to create strong bonds of cohesion based on emotional elements beyond the small group. Greater cohesion and a more open attitude of trust arising from such cultural tools help at time to face environments more efficiently. Thus, it could be predicted that more difficult environments show a greater group diversification. In addition, the comparison of Ghana and Mexico results allows a deeper analysis of the common elements of trust and cooperation networks -their universal aspects-: small groups and different levels of emotionality implied in the bonds of trust; and cultural elements that are suited to the historical context and the economic situation of groups, to create a more or less cohesion of its members according to their needs. Thus, in addition to identify in the field several indicators to measure trust, more effective cultural forms to foster cooperation is also identified: the values and the sense of identity of group membership, instead of formal regulations and authority.

Issue 54.3 of the Review for Religious, May/June 1995. ; Review for Religious (ISSN 0034-639X) is published bi-monthly at Saint Louis University by the Jesuits of the Missouri Province. Editorial Office: 3601 Lindell Boulevard ¯ St. Louis, Missouri 63108-3393. Telephone: 314-977-7363 ¯ Fax: 314-977-7362 Manuscripts, books for review, and correspondence with the editor: Review for Religious ¯ 3601 Lindell Boulevard ° St. Louis, MO 63108-3393. Correspondence about the Canonical Counsel department: Elizabeth McDonough OP ¯ P.O. Box 29260 ¯ Washington, DC 20017. POSTMASTER Send address changes to Review for Religious ° P.O. Box 6070 ° Duluth, MN 55806. Second-class postage paid at St. Louis, Missouri, and additional mailing offices. See inside back cover for information on subscription rates. ©1995 Review for Religious Permission is herewith granted to copy any material (articles, poems, reviews) contained in this issue of Review for Religious for personal or internal use, or for the personal or internal use of specific library clients within the limits outlined in Sections 107 and/or 108 of the United States Copyright Law. All copies made under this permission must bear notice of the source, date, and copyright owner on the first page. This permission is NOT extended to copying for commercial distribu-tion, advertising, institutional promotion, or for the creation of new collective works or anthologies. Such permission will only be considered on written application to the Editor, Review for Religious. for. religious Editor Associate Editors Canonical Counsel Editor Editorial Staff Adv#ory Board David L. Fleming SJ Philip C. Fischer sJ Regina Siegfried ASC Elizabeth McDonough OP 'Mary Ann Foppe Tracy Gramm Jean Read J6an.n Wolski Conn PhD Iris Ann Ledden SSND Joel Rippinger OSB Edmundo Rodriguez SJ David Werthmann CSSR Patricia Wittberg SC Christian Heritages and contemporary Living MAY-JUN~ 1995 * VOLUME54 * NUMBER3 contents 326 339 353 extending horizons Multiculturalism, Internationality, and Religious Life Gerald A. Arbuckle SM presents an understanding of multiculturalism and its lived difficulties by means of case studies. Accompanying New-Age People A. Paul Dominic SJ assesses and evaluates his experience of dealing with the ideals and quest~ of the New Age movement. Lithuania: A Return to My Ancestral Home Barbara Valuckas SSND relates her experience of three, visits to Lithuania and working with its peoples, women religious, and church catechists. 364 371 383 focusing community Community Today--Idol? Icon? Gift? Elizabeth V. Roach MM compares some of the secular criteria for community living with the gospel call to be a community of paschal living. Called to Community Dennis J. Billy CSSR presents the Trinitarian and Christological bases for life in community and identifies ten common difficulties in living the call to community. Public and Private: Some Confusion in Community Patricia Chaffee OP reviews some of the tensions and their relief in the public and private interfaces of religious community life. 389 399 rooting religious IJfe Apostolic Congregations' Monastic Roots John P. Auther_SJ suggests ways in which religious life becomes more viable in contemporary life by taking its monastic roots seriously. Women Religious: Widows of the Church, Women of Hope Anna Marie Kane SSJ draws out some comparisons of widows in the early church and women religious today. 322 Re~ie~ for Religious 4O3 A Meditation on Living the Vows Joel Giallanza CSC probes a familiar Gospel verse for its implications in living a life of celibate charity, obedience, and poverty. 410 418 424 433 growing spirituaJJy Freedom to Be God's Eric Kahn OFM suggests a style of retreat that is more fitting for the Franciscan tradition. Coming Home: The Journey Within Janet Malone CND describes various aspects of our lifelong process of moving inward to the ground of our being where God dwells in us. I Cast for Comfort GeorgeJ. Auger CSV reflects on how faith deepens in darkness and love grows in desire. Feeling and Pain and Prayer Margaret Bullitt-Jonas sketches four ways of prayer to deepen our intimacy with God and our capacity for full responsiveness to pain and io'y and being alive. 447 454 embracing heritage Heart of the Human John R. Welsh SJ explores the rich symbol of the Heart of Christ for our appreciation of the incarnation and of our own relationship to God. Enclosure: Sacramental Sign Jean Shively OSC presents her experience andunderstanding of a spirituality of enclosure as a positive and essential element of the contemplative lifestyle. 324 462 departments Prisms Canonical Counsel: The Concluding Message of the 1994 Synod on Consecrated Life 467 Book Reviews May-.l~une 199.q 323 many Christians the month of May evokes memories of processions and crownings and songs in honor of Mary, Mother of God. In a similar way the month of June recalls the novenas and hymns and vigils devoted to the heart of Jesus. Devotions, once such a bright part of our pre-Vatican II faith lives, now seem like faded fabrics preserved under some obscure museum's glass showcase. Although nostal-gia may too readily find its place, we need to acknowl-edge how devotions in a pre-Vatican II church~ fired up the faith lives of many parish communities and the mis-sionary zeal .of'many women and men. On the other hand, devotions, with their vernacular prayers and singable hymns, sometimes overshadowed even feast-day Masses in people's affection. In fact, the Mass itself often became the time and place for people's devotional practices while the priest quietly busied himself with the ~Latin prayers and formal ritual of the Mass. Perhaps the greatest gift of the liturgical renewal of Vatican II was the clarity brought to the central place of liturgy, both the Eucharist and the Liturgy of the Hours. Devotions, as a result, were given the chance to take a more modestly proportioned place in our spiritual lives, sometimes even to die after years of devout usefulness. But at the same time that the Vatican II renewal was cre-ating a spiritual renewal of prayer practices in correct pro-portion, a major shift in human interaction was taking 324 Review for Religious place in the Western world and having undue influence upon some other nations. New cultural patterns of lifestyle, fragmen-tations of family.living and of many a neighborhood, the subur-bia driving (not walking) distances between home and church, and the easy attractions of TV and home video entertainment every night of the week are among the reasons why the practice of devotions fell by the wayside. The majority of Catholics today have no experience of such devotional practices. The case is lit-tle different in the present-day worship and prayer lives of many men and women religious. Devotions need once again to find their place in faith lives that too often merit the descriptive terms "thin" or "desiccated." There is no doubt that devotions bring color to our somewhat monochrome lives of worship. Devotions rouse some passion in a faith lived often too listlessly, even in Eucharists attended rou-tinely. Yet devotions from the'past need more than just a dusting off. They need to be rethought and reexpressed for our context and time. Even more importantly, perhaps, devotions need to be refounded on the essential of devotion itself. Devotion in the Christian-theological tradition is defined as "an ease in finding God." To say that "here we have a man or woman of devotion" is to point to someone who has an evident and easy relationship with God. To be a person of devotion is to be specially graced by God. Praying for devotion in our spiritual lives is essential for a healthy existence. Even our ministries receive special effectiveness from being permeated with devotion. Devotions and devotion are related, something like the chicken and the egg. If we are people of devotion, we will find that our faith naturally tends to express itself in prayers to Jesus and to Mary and the saints, in vigils, in processions and pilgrimages, and in other such external forms. Devotions in their proper propor-tion feed and strengthen the Christian lives of all the faithful. Devotions cannot be absent from our faith expression without the loss of devotion itself., ~ Perhaps the time has come for all of us to reassess our need for devotions as the fuel and lifesource for the devoted lives we Christians desire to live. David L. Fleming SJ May-June 1995 325 GERALD A. ARBUCKLE Multiculturalism, Internationality, and Religious Life The religious community "is an evangelizer, but she begins by being evangelized herself." --Pope Paul VI, Evangelii Nuntiandi § 15 The world is tragically divided by ideological conflicts, pathological forms of nationalism, racial violence, ethnic cleansing programs, and intercultural tensions. It almost destroyed itself through interracial conflict during this century. We who gasped at Hitler's genocide policies live in a world where ecocide, that is, the genocide of virtually all living species of earth, is a real possibility because cul-tures still rarely live side-by-side with respect and justice) It is a world "groaning in travail" (Rm 8:22). Inasmuch as prophetic witness is at the heart of reli-gious life, the church rightly expects religious communi-ties to be models of intercultural understanding and action. If we judge from the constitutions and mission statements of many congregations, there is a growing theoretical awareness of this need. Thus, there are expressions like these: "We are committed to living internationality in a divided world"; "Let us inculturate the gospel in our own communities first by being authentically multicultural-ist"; "We are called to respect the rights of people to their Gerald A. Arbuckle SlVl wrote "Merging Provinces" for our May-June 1994 issue. He may be addressed at Refounding and Pastoral Develgpment Unit; 1 Mary Street; Hunters Hill; Sydney, N.S.W. 2110; Australia. 326 Review for Religious culture; this applies also to people of different cultures within our congregation"; "We commit ourselves to foster communities in which representatives of several ethnic groups live together in a spirit of dialogue, justice, and charity." But are communities in fact living according to these statements, or are the words just rhetoric and escapes into fantasy? The Future of Religious Orders Study in the United States (FORUS) contains disturbing conclusions about the gap between theory and reality. For example, 96 percent of American religious are white; minority groups are poorly represented; "unconscious racism makes penetration of minority populations into rather homogeneous orders very difficult." The report shows that older religious in particular, while believing they are accepting of minor-ity members, in fact cannot adapt readily to the cultural diver-sity this demands.2 My experience is that religious of dominant cultures usually do not lack goodwill towards minority groups in their midst, but also that, while using the language of multicul-turalism or internationality, they understand only imperfectly what these words mean and what attitudinal and behavioral changes they must make in consequence. This introductory article has two aims: to. explain the terms inculturation, multiculturalisra, and internationality and to help readers identify, through case-study analysis, ways in which they may be unconsciously dominating and even oppressing people of minority cultures within their midst, thus obstructing the emer-gence of multicultural congregations.3 Defining Terms Multiculturalism is an inculturatibn imperative. Incultura~ion is "the incarnation of the Christian life and Christian message in a particular cultural context, in such a way that this experience not only finds expression through elements proper to the culture in question, but becomes a p~'inciple that animates, directs, and unifies the [cultural context], transforming and remaking it so as to bring about a 'new creation.'''4 Multiculturalism is a process of inculturation whereby cultures are so transformed and remade into a "new creation" that they interact with one another in jus-tice and charity in the service of personal ~and community growth. This interaction does not occm" through a command from above or the planning of "just a few experts," as Pope John Paul II May-June 1995 327 Arbuckle ¯ Multiculturalism, Internationality reminds us in Redemptoris Missio (§54), but through the involve-ment of people at all levels of society. The way culture is conceptualized has significant bearing on the theory and practice of inculturation and consequently of mul-ticulr0ralism. As an hnthropologist I believe that the failure to define accurately what is meant by culture makes it impossible for people to understand the complexity of inculturation and the challenges involved in developing an authentic multicultural com-munity in religious, parish, or secular life. In the classicist's definition, culture is a visible, comprehensi-ble entity, the consEious creation of rational minds,s The focus is on observable phenomena (such as language, foods, literature, dances) rather than on how people feel about what they do. Cultures, then, can be graded aesthetically: one culture may be considered to have more artistic dances than another. This definition of culture has grave deficiencies. It overstresses ethnic groups' historical lifestyles and customs and downplays their adaptation to the world in which they now live. It freezes a culture in a time period and encourages romantic or fossilized views of a people's former way of living. This definition likens a culture to a machine something with visible, rationally con-structed, interconnected parts that can readily be replaced by sim-ilar components without creating any pa.rticular difficulty. If a religious community uses this meaning of culture, then it expects the process of inculturation to be speedy and simple. The com-munity merely replaces, with administrative efficiency, an existing custom with a gospel-inspired one. And it does this by imple-menting the directives of people (pastors, r+ligious superiors) from outside the culture. This is not inculturation; the people who are the object of t~ae process have no free involvement in it, but instead are ma~aipulated. The second definition of culture gives priority to a group's ideas and feelings: Culture is not an entity, but is primarily a pro-cess that is persuasively at work, particularly in the unconscious of the group and individuals. It is a pattern of shared assump-tions expressed in symbols, myths, and rituals that a .group has invented, discovered, or developed .while coping with problems of external adaptation and internal cohesion. This instrumental view of culture, while it assumes the importance of factual history and visible phenomena, highlights the developmental and ever evolv-ing survival role of culture for people in a world of change, prej- 328 Review for Religious udice, and discrimination. Finally, culture is not one aspect of life along with, for example, religious, political, and economic activ-ity. It embraces all human activity.6 An appreciation of this defi-nition of culture has the, following immediate practical consequences for inculturation and multiculturalism. 1. Because a culture is essentially a living interrelation of sym-bols and myths, the feeling of belonging to it is basically invisible to outsiders. The experience of being culturally different or of confronting a history of preju-dice and discrimination pro-duces a set of memories and feelings that are not easily shared with outsiders. The out-sider may gain some under-standing from participation in the visible activities .of the group (such~as dances and food ritu-als), but finds it difficult or even impossible to comprehend its inner experiences and feelings. 2. In order to begin to appreciate another cultu.re, one must have the gifts of empathy and of openness to dialogue. Empathetic listening means trying to become aware not only of others' feelings, but also of how they experience them-- and, as far as possible, to have the same feelings.7 An outsider As an anthropologist I believe that the failure to define accurately what is meant by culture makes it impossible for people to understand the complexity of inculturation and the challenges involved in developing an authentic multicultural community in religious, parish, or secular life. can know more about the history, cultural externals, and even language of an ethnic group than its members and still be alien to them because of a lack of empathy.Dialogue, a consequence of empathy, is the interaction in which people seek to give of them-selves as they are and to receive and know the others in their par-ticular oth.erness.8 Dialogue presumes that one is prepared to learn from others and their cultures and to let ~o of attachments that interfere with the growth in mutuality. 3. People of'every cultu.re tend to think that their own way of feeling about life and of thinking and acting is the right way; they May-June 1995 329 Arbuckle ¯ Multiculturalism, Internationality see the ways of other peoples as stupid, crude, or unreasonable. This prejudice in favor 'of one's own group is technically called eth-nocentrism. Taken to an extreme, the assumption is that "our way of life is the way of life," so that other groups have nothing of value to offer us. Hence, on the basis of assumed religious, eco-nomic, or racial superiority, people seek to dominate others and their cultures. Frequently people of dominant cultures are uncon-scious of the oppressive power they exert over minority cultures (people who, because of their ethnic origins, are excluded from group decision making); they take their cultural superiority for granted and relate to minority peoples according to cultural stereotypes of their inferiority.9 A stereotype is a set image that a people has of peoples that differ from them; it is a shorthand, but faulty and often unjust, method of handling or grasping a complex world of people. 4. People who are culturally oppressed are likely to become extremely sensitive to the dominant culture's symbols of coercive power. When people of minority cultures move into the main-stream, the resulting contact of cultures is not an abstract concept, but a high order of human drama. The plot and its crosscurrents, its motives and motifs, are played out by a ghostly cast of hang-ers- on, by prejudice, longing, fear.~° 5. When people of different cultures meet for the first time, they tend to react in two or three stages. First, they are fasci-nated by and even enjoy visible cultural differences in, for exam-ple, cuisine and entertainment. Later they experience disillusionment or friction when the difficulties of communication outweigh their enthusiasm for cultural diversity. If they strive to overcome the cultural obstacles to communication, they move to interaction--the experience of authentic multiculturalism. Most never get beyond the second stage. Multiculturalism and Internationality Multiculturalism is often an emotive word, "a buzzword with almost as many meanings as there are mouths to utter it.''11 Most commonly, however, the word is used technically in one of three ways. Demographic multiculturalism means that a particular soci-ety contains different cultural groups; holistic multiculturalism means that a society values cultural diversity, but gives higher priority to group-wide cohesion; political multiculturalism, as a 330 Review for Religious social philosophy; acknowledges the legitimate concerns of ethnic groups within a society or an organization and the need for these interests to be expressed in adequate politico-economic struc-tures and processes. Political multiculturalists seek to establish structures that allow by right minority peoples to be fully involved in decision making in matters that affect their lives. They foster a balance between the demands of overall group cohesion and inner cultural diversity. Multiculturalism, in these three senses, normally applies to situations within the same country; interna-tionality is multiculturalism as applied to relationship.s between separate countries. Political multiculturalism, historically, is a reaction against policies of cultural oppression. Phrases or terms such as "the melt-ing pot approach to immigrants," "cultural pluralism," and "inte-gration" are often synonymous with covert or overt programs to destroy minority cultures by forcing them to be assimilated into the dominant culture. Critical decisions are made about minority peoples and their future without their participation. Another insidious form of oppression is cultural romanticism. Here the dominant culture, using the classicist definition of culture, fosters romantic visions of minority cultures, emphasizing what is thought to be the exotic or strange features of these cultures (dances, rit-uals). People of the dominant culture claim "it would be a pity if such cultures disappeared." Minority peoples are made to feel like inanimate museum pieces to be called out to entertain peo-ple of the dominant culture at politically correct times and then to retire to their inferior positions when the need ceases. Case Studies Case studies are detailed observations of connected processes in individual and group experience thfit help us to understand complex social phenomena and to see ways in which theoretical principles and insights may be applied. I suggest that readers reflect on the following case studies, asking themselves--before ~ssessing my own comments~how the above theoretical clarifi-cations apply in each instance. 1. A General Chapter in Confusion An international congregation of clerical religious met in gen-eral chapter for two months. A participant from a first-world May-~une 1995 331 Arbuckle ¯ Multiculturalism, Internationality country reported his experience and that of many others: "During the first two weeks, there was a great spirit of internationality and friendship. Each group explained through song, dances, food, and visual displays the qualities of their cultural origins. We espe-cially enjoyed the presentations from the joy-filled third-world countries; they made our Western productions look rather dull in contrast. Then something happened, and it still puzzles me. Quite suddenly delegates from our third-world provinces began to complain angrily in the general sessions that the translation facilities for them were not as good as for the Western delegates, that they were made to feel inferior in committee meetings by never being asked for their opinions . I and others still cannot understand this anger, especially because we did everything pos-sible to give them the first places for their cultural presentations. These are the same people we have helped for so long with gifts for their formation houses and missions. They seem to be ungrate-ful. Perhaps we have failed to teach them the right way to act in international gatherings. The chapter ended without these peo-ple realizing that they had undermined the good spirit of the gathering." Comment: In this case study the delegate has unwittingly adopted the narrow classicist view of culture and moves from enthusiasm for cultural diversity to disillusionment; internation-ality for him and other Western delegates is restricted to such relatively inconsequential things as eating foreign food and admir-ing other people's exotic dances. Influenced by this approach to culture, he' is prevented from understanding the requirements for authentic multiculturalism and internationality within the chap-ter and congregation. Third-world delegates are reacting against a well-entrenched tradition of paternalism and cultural superior-ity on the part of the dominant culture. They rightly want to be accepted for what they are: members of the same congregation, with human experiences and insights of value to all. 2. Romanticism Destroys Formation ' .An international clerical religious congregation, founded last century in Europe, had developed several formation houses in third-world countries. In a report to an international meeting on initial formation in the congregation, the superior general wrote: "We thank God for so many vocations from [these lands]. Because [these lands] are extremely poor, the people so happy and carefree 332 Review for Religious and their cultures so unsophisticated, we have decided for now not to insist on the same rigorous screening criteria for appli-cants nor on the high-level academic and religious life formation that we have in the West. When you meet these students, you immediately feel their happiness and fine community spirit. They will make good religious, but we must not expect them to measure up to our professional standards for some time to come." Comment: The superior general, in his high praise for the cultures of the students, is a cultural romanti-cist, even an unconscious racist. The cultures he refers to are group-ori-ented ones; that is, they emphasize the need for public harmony at all costs, so that tensions and unre-solved, conflicts are kept hidden, but remain ready to explode into vio-lence at any time. The general's inability to recognize this deprives students of their right in justice to be trained professionally for min-istry, trained (for example) to under-stand objectively the cultural forces that influence their lives and those of their people. The ~eneral also makes a racist judgment, namely, that the students from poor techno-logical cultures are incapable of the Third-world delegates are reacting against a well-entrenched tradition of paternalism and cultural superiority on the part of the dominant culture. They rightly want to be accepted for what they are: members of the same congregation, with human experiences and insights of value to all. levels of learning expected in Western formation systems. Finally, the congregation is international, but the general is setting the stage for a two-tier membei'ship: persons with sophisticated edu-cation from Western countries and educationally deprived per-sons from the third world. This means that third-world members of the congregation will effectively be excluded from taking up leadership positions at the international level. 3. Theory and Practice Clash A congregation of brotherb from Europe has worked in Asia for over fifty years, but with no lasting success in recruiting or May-June 1995 333 Arbuckle ¯ Multiculturalism, Internationality retaining local candidates. Several former brothers of Asian ori-gin commented to me through an intermediary about their expe-rience: "The region was established from a Western nation. After our training we were sent to communities in which most reli-gious were from this foreign country. They were good people, but during recreation they always spoke in -English, never in our language, and the topics of conversation commonly were about incidents and characters of their formation days in Europe or the latest sporting event at home. Then from time to rime they would make ethnic iokes at the expense of our own people, putting them down, and we were expected to laugh as they did. It became so painful that we complained, but we were told to think 'interna-tionally,' not with provincial minds! It became too much so we left." Comment: I sense that the foreigners in this Asian region are totally unaware of their cultural imperialism; it is as if they have never left their homeland, and their use of ethnic jokes illustrates their lack of cultural sensitivity. Ethnic jokes are common in most societies, but examination shows that the object of such jokes is "to put down" members of other cultures and present one's own group as normal and superior. Ethnic jokes are unjust and can be most painful to members of minority groups, who nevertheless are expected, if present when the jokes are told, to laugh submissively and accept the ascribed expression of inferiority.~2 4. Inculturation Expectations Collapse One Mexican American sister recorded her frustration and that of many others: "I became a member of a North American congregation before Vatican II. We Mexican Americans were (and are still) in the minority; the majority are white third- or fourth-generation Americans. During my training we had to divorce our-selves from our families, and I cannot even begin to express what this meant to me and other Mexican American sisters. With the coming of Vatican II, I thought at last I can be a religious and a Mexican American at the same time. Our chapters spoke of the need for inculturation and multiculturalism in our communities and apostolates as priorities. When I and others attempted to take this priority seriously, all kinds of problems emerged. For example, members of my family began to visit frequently, openly using our language for conversation and prayer. Other community members began to object, sometimes hinting or saying directly to 334 Review for Religious me: 'You are disturbing our peace with so many relatives, espe-cially. distant ones, coming to see you. And why don't they speak in English? They should because this is America!'" Comment: Hispanic cultures traditionally emphasize the fam-ily as the basic unit of identity, in vivid contrast to the mainstream American culture, in which individuals claim identity for them-selves independently of family ties. When the congregational chapter in the above case study enthusiastically supports incul-turation and multiculturalism, they are unaware of the implications for individuals and communities. Individualism has become such an unquestioned way of life for the dominant culture in the con-gregation that most members cannot conceive of any alternative lifestyle. Hence, the culture clash. References to inculturation and multiculturalism in chapters remain pure rhetoric. 5. Popular Religiosity Unappreciated~ An international congregation, founded last century in Europe, and with many communities in North America, sought candidates for the first time among Hispanic Americans. For a short time it received several candidates, but the formation leader reported that "they did not survive for long either in the training programs or later in our communities." Several who had left com-mented, and this is a representative view: "My formation house was cheerless, without life, and the communities I lived in after profession were no better. Liturgies were dull, filled with words, but no color or movement. I felt myself dying spiritually. I com-plained to the provincial, and she commented: 'I cannot under-stand you. We provide you with highly trained formators, but you still complain.' The director of formation tried to listen to me and said she understood, so the following month she bought Mexican rugs and ornaments and put them around the house, saying 'This will make you immigrant people feel at home with us!' It did not. We still felt like aliens, unable to pray in devo-tional ways that make sense to us. The sad thing is that no one understood. No wonder Hispanics leave religious life~" Comment: In this case study, there is a serious clash between popular religiosity characteristics of many Hispanic peoples and the standard ways of praying within contemporary North American Catholicism. The inability 5o appreciate popular reli-giosity and the tendency to condemn it as "primitive, supersti-tious nonsense" continues to alienate countless Hispanics from May-June 1995 335 Arbuckle ¯ Multiculturalism, Internationality Unless candidates are freely able t~o relate the spirituality offered them to their own rich cultural religious experience, it will remain totally alien to them. the church today.~3 At its core popular religiosity is a storehouse of values offering answers of Christian wisdom to the great ques-tions of life. It creatively combines the divine and the human, Christ andMary, spirit and body, intelligence, imagination, and emotion in ways that are colorful and imaginative. Devotions to saints and pious practices--once part of mainstream American Catholic life--are integral features of popular religiosity. ,4. Hispanic Catholics complain, however, that the liturgies of mainstream Ca.tholicism today are cqmmonly too "heady," formal, and unimaginative. In the case study, Hispanic can-didates and religious are unjustly pressured to conform to the domi-nant culture's religious expression.s. This is a tragedy, at several levels. Neither the provincial nor the for-mator has any appreciation of the nature and power of culture; the for-mator assumes, without even asking the. candidates, that culture is syn-onymous with what we see, Bring in a few artifacts and minority peoples will "feel at home." The can-didates understandably feel insulted and misunderstood. Unless the candidates are freely able to relate the spirituality offered them to their own rich cultural religious experience, it will remain totally alien to them. 6. Congregational Colonialism Returns A congregation based in the United States had formally estab-lished a province in Africa. After some years it was decided uni-laterally by the general government to suppress the province for reasons of administrative and financial efficiency and to reunite the community of African sisters within the original province in the United States. The full provincial administration--all Americans-- visited the assembly of African sisters to explain the situation, but to their surprise they were met with considerable anger. An African sister spoke feelingly for her group: "Finance is not our primary need. We are prepared to be poor, provided we can gov-ern ourselves. Now by the adminstrative change we feel again 336 Review for Religious overwhelmed by the presence of the United States, and we are made tQ feel small and unimportant. You have economic and polit-ical power. Now we have none and must submit to a culture of dependency and inferiority!" The provincial administration could not understand this and ieported to the general that the African communities "had come under the influence of Marxism." Comment: There is little need to comment. In their reactions to the adminstrative change, the African sisters are fearful of a return to a new and degrading congregational colonialism. The American administration is unaware that their African sisters have been made to feel inferior under earlier administrative organiza-tional cultures. The failure~ to consult the African sisters about the decision reinforces their understandable distrust of both the provincial and the general administrations. The provincial admin-istrat. ion, by blaming the African sisters for the negativity, sees no need to examine its own cultural assumptions. Conclusion The task of expressing the consecrated life in diverse cultures today is one of the great challenges for its future. --Instrumentum Laboris §93, Synod of Bishops 1994 ° Thevision of multiculturalism is inspiring but rarely achieved in concrete ways. A reason for this is the failure to clarify the meaning of cul~ure. Culture is not primarily the lifestyles of peo-ple; rather, it is a group's sense of its identity, its inner history of struggling for equality, just, ice, and respect for human dignity. Through multiculturalism (and internationality) people of dif-ferent cultures commit themselves to grow humanly together in justice and charity, while respecting and learning from the legit-imate cultural differences of each other. ' Multiculturalism demands ongoing conversion to the mission of Christ, "a profound transformation of mentalities and ways of living" (Instrumentum laboris §93).If religious do not struggle to achieve this transformation, they are not true to the prophetic nature of their commitment, for the values and practice of mul-ticulturalism and internationality are everywhere desperately needed. Moreover, religious committed to refoundingotheir con-gregations would do well to ponder a lesson of history: Energy for the founding and refounding of communities comes from multi-culturalism and internationality. As Raymond.Hostie notes: May-June 1995 337 Arbuckle ¯ Multiculturalism, Internationality "Cistercians, Norbertines, Dominicans, Carmelites, Jesuits, and Piarists all emerged from groups .whose members belonged to three nationalities, even four or five . Heterogeneity is a nec-essary condition for activating effective fermentation."~s Notes 1 See Walter Wink, Engaging the Powers: Discernment and Resistance in a World of Domination (Minneapolis: Fortress PreSs, 1992), pp. 195-207. 2 See David Nygren CM and Miriam Ukeritis CSJ, "The Future of Religious Orders in the United States," Origins. 22, no. 15 (1992): 272, and Review for Religious 52, no. 1 (January-February 1993): 48. 3 ~ee an earlier article of mine on aspects of this theme: "Beyond Frontiers: The Supranational Challenge of the Gospel," Review for Religious 46, no. 3 (May-June 1987): 351-370. 4 Pedro Arrupe SJ, cited by Michael Amaladoss SJ, "Inculturadon and Internationality," East Asian Pastoral Review 29, no. 3 (1992): 23% s See Gerald A. Arbuckle SM, Earthing the Gospel: An Inculturation Handbook for the Pastoral Worker (Maryknoll: Orbis Books, 1990), pp. 26- 78, and "Understanding Ethnicity, Multiculturalism, and Inculturation," Human Development 14, no. 1, pp. 8-10. 6 On this point I would differ from M. Amaladoss's excellent article cited above, pp. 241-243. 7 See E Lopez, Pastoral Care in an Emerging World (Sydney: Marist Centre for Pastoral Care, 1994), p. 302. s See Arbuckle, Refou. nding the Church: Dissent for Leadership (Maryknoll: Orbis Books, 1993), p. 111. 9 See Arbuckle, Earthing, pp. 147-166. ~0 See Arbuckle, Earthing, pp. 166-186. it R. Hughes, Culture of Complaint: The Fraying of America (New York: Oxford University Press, 1993), p. 83. ,2 See Arbuclde, Earthing, pp. 162f. 13 See Allan Figueroa Deck SJ, The Second Wave: Hispanic Ministry and the Evangelization of Cultures (New York: Paulist Press, 1989), pp. 54- 119. ,4 See Arbuckle, Earthing, pp. 108-112. 15 The Life and Death of Religious Orders: A Psycho-Sociological Approach, (Washington D.C.: CARA, 1983), p. 259. 338 Review for Religious A. PAUL DOMINIC Accompanying New-Age People '7have often thought . . . if we regard the bomb (or world .~. hunger or the dying seas) as a monstrous demonic injus-tice, that must mean we never, somehow on some level, never took it seriously: the injunction to love. The stuff Jesus was talk-ing about and the Buddha." So wrote Joanna Macy somewhere; and, I believe, the same may well be said regarding the New Age movement (NAM) or, more correctly, the extreme variety of it focused on by the media: images of anything from psychic phe-nomena through esoteric beliefs in crystal gazing and spirit chan-neling to weird fads in self-centered or willful behavior going by the name of cosmic wisdom, My interest--"follow your allurement," Joseph Campbell would say--in writing on this new Western phenomenon comes from two semesters I spent a few years ago with an international group of some seventy people most of whom were Westerners carried along in the the New Age wave.1 We were, of all places, at a Catholic college in California where I had hoped to learn some new exciting approaches to Christian spirituality. Before long, however, I had to contend with some so-called spirituality that seemed anything but Christian. For one thing, "once a Christian, never again a Christian" was the prevailing mood of the majority, some of whom became more and more aggressive towards anything Christian. One time I could not refrain from remarking to my companions that as a group we could be toler-ant and respectful of every tradition except Christian. With so A. Paul Dominic SJ wrote this article from experiences he had while doing graduate studies in spirituality at Holy Names College in Oakland, California. His address is Satyodayam; 12-5-33, S. Lallaguda; Secunderabad 500 017; India. May-.3~une 1995 339 Dominic * Accompanying New-Age People much bashing of Christianity in my spiritual circle, I felt like a fish--an ichthus--in a cesspool. As time went on, however, I felt different. I saw things dif-ferently; empathy brought some insight. Coming to hear the per-sonal stories of my companions, all of whom were quondam Christians (Protestant and, like Joseph Campbell himself, Catholic), I could not but feel and formulate that they sought and found this New Age haven because the Christianity of their experience had gone awry; their lives had become an enormous unhealed and unhealing hurt, like Carol Christ's. (She had suffered her incompatible marriage for years until one day, in a terrible skiing accident, she instinctively hoped that her death would make her a martyr to the indissolubility of marriage, only to find her-self still alive and confined to a hospital bed. She decided that she had had enough of the marriage she had entered upon in church, eventually giving up her Christianity too and discovering New Age freedom.) One thirtyish woman among my companions had for years suffered trauma upon trauma because her parents would not listen to her stoW of sexual abuse by a close relative, but instead would tell her to go to confession every time she brought up her nagging distress. Her anguish came to an end when she found a hearing among New Age friends of hers. Another woman who had been quite a staunch Catholic in her youth spoke of the joyless vision of life she grew up with as she prayed about the vale of tears instead of the original blessing (this is a three-word mantra of New Agers) of the universe. Seconding them, a man-- a religious brother in good standing--declared nevertheless that the church had constricted and restricted his humanity by its leaden dos and don'ts. In the New Age covenant groups, all of them found, or thought they had found, what they had missed out on during their childhood or adolescent Christianity. Obviously, in all such cases, whatever in their new associa-tion they perceived to be filling their psychological or spiritual needs was something basically Christian, however unaware of this they were because of the unresponsive, unenlightened, and per-haps even false practice of Christianity with which they had been contending. From this discerningperspective New Age spirituality may be said to embrace within itself certain Christian elements at their best which somehow for whatever reason were found miss-ing in avowed Christian circles, whether they were couples or homes or schools or seminaries or rectories or dioceses or, of 340 Review for Religious course, the Vatican (the veritable b~te noire of former Catholics finding their berth in the New Age). I would, then, dispute the claim of the NAM to offer a spirituality for a post-Christian world, and I would point out that, despite the NAM's aversion to Christianity, quite a few of its genuine experiences have been, in many times and places, very much at home in Christianity. As the New Age plays the queen of all it surveys and declares it to be "the post-Christian world," I would submit that her declaration is in vain for the simple reason that she herself has made a home for genuine Christian elements forgotten or forsaken. Ironically, thanks to her the church and Christianity have an unsuspected way of coming into their own. Perhaps this is what a deacon's twenty-year-old daughter--quite unlike my companions--meant when she said: "Don't get me wrong. I don't hate the church. I just want it to be better than it is. I want it to be alive--not what some old deacon thinks is alive, but my kind of alive . -2 It is not fanciful but altogether pleasantly surprising to find how, for all the avowed antagonism to Christ among those sab-batical- year companions of mine, Christ made himself discreetly, unobtrusively present. Have we not heard about the unknown Christ of non-Christian religions? Perhaps in the New Age circle of my acquaintance he was not so much unknown as unacknowl-edged, unwanted, and even (unsuccessfully) banished. A former seminarian, for instance, confessed virulently that he had no need of Christ to save him for he had nothing to be saved from. Christ, however, kept himself in their midst in an unintrusive manner. That, perhaps, is the very nature of Christ. I was led willy-nilly to think in this way by observing the effect a song had on some my of New Age friends. Of all the songs we used for the circle dance, the Kyrie eleison, Christe eleison, Kyrie eleison especially charmed the most conspicuously anti-Christian one among us. I could not help chuckling over the archetypal trickster role Christ resorted to in order to reach out to one who had rejected him consciously and deliberately. If New Agers would "let go" (a favorite expres-sion of theirs) of Christ, Christ would let them, but he would not let go of them. While we rejoice in this latent presence of Christ in the NAM, we would do well to ask our'selves how much of Christ we, the people of present-day Christianity, hold on to~ Whatever of Christ we had, did it convey so untrue an image of him that someone close to us chose to turn his or her back on him? Why else did a May-.~ne 1995 341 Dominic ¯ Accompanying New-Age People young man make bold to say: "The picture we have of the Christian church as a continuation of the fellowship Jesus set in motion is a gross distortion" ? 3 If it is, is it not high time that we regrasp Christ and make more of a home for him in our churches so that people cannot avoid seeing and meeting him there? Now is a good time for the church to let the "Christ before Christianity" address himself to it so that it may come to know him afresh in a renewal of the reign of God that he initiated. The New Age, reacting against the present age of Christianity, seeks its roots in an age older than our familiar ancient civiliza-tions. It has found, however, a certain remnant of Christian tra-dition appealing to it, namely, the mystical tradition. So it would revive the memory of mystics like Mechtild of Magdeburg and Meister Eckhart who are credited with having drawn heavily from the chthonic and matriarchal era of humanity. Whatever the rea-son for the NAM's reverence for these Christian mystics, thought-ful Christians can think of them only as Christians and not in any other terms. Will it not be true to say that Christian mystics were more Christian than mystic, having become mystics precisely by their way of being Christian? Th.e acceptability of some Christian mystics to New Age reli-gionists (I say "some" because they find others such as Augustine and Ignatius Loyola distinctly unacceptable) should not be mat-ter for any triumphalism inasmuch as the NAM goes for all mys-ticism. Instead, the New Age's mystical interests must serve to open our eyes to what we have lost sight of, namely, the mystical horizon of the Christian universe from its very inception in Christ. How many can resonate with the declaration made by William Johnston that Christianity indeed originates in the mystical expe-rience of Christ, reaching its climax in his resurrection? How many will be persuaded by Johnston's sweeping view of our mys-tical heritage, starting with Christ, handed down by Paul, kept alive by the fathers of the church, cherished by the medieval mys-tics, and shared in even by the simple people whom Poulain found in his time and Johnston and others recognize in ours? Given the mystical strain of Christianity, he suggests that reflection on our mystical experience, together with the reflection on conversion that Bernard Lonergan advocates, could form the basis of our theology in the future.4 In keeping with the New Age penchant for all forms of mys-ticism of whatever origin, one crusader of the NAM, Matthew 342 Review for Religious Fox, has come up with a dozen or so running definitions of mys-ticism, qualifying almost everyone to be a self-designated mys-tic. However one may critique such New Age eclecticism, there is behind it such a thing as the real intention (to use Neuro- Linguistic Programming's term) that is certainly right and praise-worthy insofar as it only culls the beautiful wherever it finds it. This is one of the ways in which the New Age can pose a challenge to religions to recover their original spirit and. shed whatever has become unnecessarily hidebound,s Aiming at such a breakthrough, the New Age attends to the different religions as to a story and not a lecture;6 and so it can appropriately respond to the turns and twists and leads and plots of the different religious stories, thus creating a new story and generating a new spirituality. All modern, sensible Christians cannot but see in all this a certain spirit of ecumenism. However much official church pronouncements eulo-gize and emphasize the modern Christian spirit as ecumenical, the ecumenical practice in church life worldwide is not conspicuously vigorous even if present. How many have Christianity enough to hate but not to love, whether in Northern Ireland or Rwanda or the former Yugoslavia or other large and small places! What thoughtful Christian could fail to agree with what a New Age writer has remarked: "For many peo-ple, religion has become a force that creates enemies and teaches distrust and disrespect for differences, rather than a force that truly builds the human family and the meaning that sustains us"?7 Seen from this perspective, New Age eclecticism could well be practical ecumenism, something that Christians ideally seek to realize in their communities vis-~a-vis other religious communities. Here as elsewhere it is better to make mistakes and progress by learning from them than to play safe, avoiding mistakes only to make the big mistake of getting stuck in the status quo and then regressing. It is certainly high time to vindicate the bold inspira-tion of John XXIII and the proud heritage he bequeathed to his church, to all of Christianity, and to all the world. Will it not be true to say that Christian mystics were more Christian than mystic, having become mystics precisely by their way of being Christian? May-j~lne 1995 ~ 343 Dominic ¯ Accompanying New-AgePeople No story has been told of how this pope got the idea of con-vening an ecumenical council. But what if it had come to him in a dream? Whatever the hierarchy or the theologians or the church's rank and file might think about such a story, New Agers would not at all find it odd or shocking. They set store on their dreams, treasuring them as the nocturnal gifts of the Universe or the collective unconscious that counterbalance an overmuch influ-ence of the conscious reasoning power of the waking hours. They are intent on keeping a regular and detailed record of them, going to great lengths sometimes to stimulate and then recall them, pondering over them daily (reminiscent of the "additional direc-tives" in the Spiritual Exercises of St. Ignatius Loyola and also reminiscent of formal religious practice itself). They have their guru in C.G. Jung, who not only developed a mythological and mystical approach to dreams, but also left behind his conviction that dreams can be read by anyone who meditates on them long enough. Many New Age people would resonate with Henry Miller's experiences: "The realization that there was a pattern to my life, one which made sense, came about in a curious way. Shortly after moving into the Villa Seurat, I had begun to record my dreams. And not only the dreams but the associations which the act of transcribing them induced. Doing this over a period of months, I suddenly began to see, 'To suddenly see,' as Saroyan says somewhere. A pregnant phrase--to anyone who has had the experience. An expression which has only one meaning: to see with new eyes.''8 New Age people believe in the newness brought about by dreams on all levels (personal and social) and domains (artistic, scientific, philosophic, and theosophic) of humanity. They see themselves as cocreators of new humanity, thanks to the creative potential of dreams breaking through the premature closure of thought represented for them by the dictum that rev-elation was complete with the death of the last apostle. Though the real point of the theological dictum might be missed by New Age people, their rediscovery of dreams is some-thing that may be missed by church people. For one thing, we must realize that, along with all religious cultures, the Judeo- Christian tradition too has developed its own perspective of dreams. Abraham Lincoln is reported to have remarked some-thing obvious and yet valuable enough to appear as the epigraph of a Christian book on dreams: "How much there is in the Bible about dreams! . . . If we believe the Bible, we must accept the 344 Review for Religious fact that, in the old days, God and his angels came to humans in their sleep and made themselves known in dreams.''9 There are sensible Christians who would wager that what happened in the old biblical days can and does continue to hap-pen even today for God's people, especially if God is the Revealer of Mysteries and also of our inmost thoughts (Dn 2:29-30), direct-ing our hearts even at night (Ps 16:7). Those who think in this line and yet are not very sure about the meaning of their dreams may well be enlightened by the remark of an anonymous author: "It is very interesting to see that all the dreams reported by religious fig-ures in the New Testament and in early Christianity do not require any interpreting at all. They are nearly always straightforward messages of encouragement from God.''~° A simple Tamil farmer, for instance, could appreciate this. In a dream he saw a leprosy patient asking him for a glass of water and he gave him one, but only after much hesitation until he heard a clear voice telling him to get up and read Matthew,25:35. On waking he looked up the passage: "I was hungry and you gave me food; I was thirsty and you gave me drink." Those in the Catholic tradition with their cult of saints may well draw inspiration from the way the saints benefited from their dreams even after reflecting on dreams fell into disrepute in the church in the middle of the 4th century. To recall a saint of recent history, John Bosco (1815-1888) certainly cherished his dreams and shared them with others. At the age of nine, he had a dream which recurred repeatedly for some eighteen years. First he saw himself surrounded by spoiled urchins and trying noisily and forcibly to control them; a man of noble bearing and great radi-ance called him by name and bade him do his work kindly and gently; then he saw a lady of beauty and majesty changing all sorts of wild animals into gentle lambs and asking him to do the same to her children. Through that dream he could in the course of time envision more and more the future establishment of his Besides their serious attention to dreams, New Age people have discovered in ancient cultures something else, the celebration of rituals. May-d~ne 1995 345 Dominic * Accompanying New-Age People Oratory and the spread of his work.11 Whatever spiritual profit accrued to the saints by way of dreams can become a matter of our own experience because each one of us is a special sort of a saint, an idea that NAM would laud heartily. Besides their serious attention to dreams, New Age people have discovered in ancient cultures something else, the celebra-tion of rituals. New Age celebrants perform some of the old rit-uals related to mythological tales like that of Demeter and Persephone, hoping to be empowered by them. They resurrect the rituals of the seasons, wanting to be in tune with the rhythm of the earth and the energy of the sun. They reenact and update the rit-uals of passage of human life from birth, through adulthood and marriage, to death. No wonder, then, that after the violent death of one of my compaflions, a New Age former Catholic, there was held a ritual which included a long circle dance with the song "We all come from the goddess / and to her shall we return / like the drops of waters / flowing to the ocean," followed by the unex-pected eerie cry of a woman almost beside herself swearing to avenge her friend's death. Of all the rituals the pride of place would go to the ritual of the maze. It consists in meandering through a maze to reach the inner center and then making one's way back to the outer rim. Interestingly, it developed out of, or at least came to be associated with, the archetype of the spiral that manifests itself in the total spectrum of the universe from the shape of the galaxies through that of the atomic space to that of the DNA helix. One may wonder ivhether this ritual has not pen-etrated beneath humanity's consciousness when one realizes the enthusiasm aroused by the variety of mazes or labyrinths extant even today in various countries such as Sweden, Japan, and Britain--this last, incidentally, declared 1991 the Year of the Maze. Two of the friends in our group decided to plight their love to each other singing their way through a labyrinth far from the madding crowd deep in a quiet valley open to the azure gaze of the California sky and in the presence, of course, of those who had journeyed with them. I wonder whether New Age revelers resorting to renewed or newfound rituals have known the wise words of the Tat Te Ching: "Ritual is but the crust of loyalty and good faith, / And the begin-ning of discord.''12 1 would, however, add this observation. Though some of their rituals can be weird, others are truly inspiring and religious. The ceremony "Remembering the Way," created by 34.6 Review for Religious Joan M. McMillen, for instance, honoring the eight-hundred-year- old labyrinth in the Cathedral of Chartres, with its evocative music even using Latin in a whole stanza and its call to let go, builds up a climax of expectancy in everyone, ending with the final song of calm assurance: "Sooner or later, everyone finds their way. / Wholly without, embracing; wholly within, ful-filling. / Go I know not where, seek I know not what. / Sooner or later, everyone comes home." That a genuine spiritual experience can be built around a long-forgotten and unused maze in the French cathedral is an eloquent symbol for me of the untapped, undying springs of spir-ituality hidden not only in the heart, but in the history of the church. Thus, the ritual celebrations at the vernal equinox and the winter solstice can with a little imagination be linked with the feasts of the Annunciation and Christmas, respectively, lead-ing people to experience heaven even on the way to heaven and that in an earthly way--as has been done, for instance, at the Jesuit retreat house in Sedalia, Colorado. So also, the simple drumming and dancing and singing of native peoples all over the globe have a spiritual potential that the church can effectively make its own with respect and gratitude and joy.13 In these matters the church does not need to conduct first-time experiments, but need only reclaim riches from its distant past. For example, even in the cenobitic times, long before churches of the medieval period served as stages for the enter-tainment that morality plays provided, the church building was already considered a festive hall?4 The modern church has been made newly festive mostly by the charismatic renewal, which is largely an urban phenomenon; it must become open to some of the festivity of "pagan" (from the Latin pagus "country district," as New Agers point out) or "rural" areas, the places of aboriginal roots. The New Age movement manifests an earthy or creation-ori-ented spirituality. Clear expressions of it--and extreme ones if understood literally instead of metaphorically--are "Mother Earth" and "Mother Nature." A literal understanding would go beyond James Lovelock's Gaia hypothesis and would conceive the earth as a living entity, with a life of its own on which ours depends. It would understand the divine principle as not only being in nature, but being nature itself. There would be no room for transcendence here. Everything of earth would be sacred, in May-j~ne 1995 347 Dominic ¯ Accompanying New-Age People particular the whole of human nature without any distinction between matter and spirit. A less extreme position about all this would be analogous to Copernicus's. As he saw Earth displaced from center stage, people would see themselves displaced from their superior position as the thinking species separated from the rest of nature and would give the preeminence to the whole of the universe and especially to Earth, unique planet that it seems to be, making it Earth's universe par excellence with a history of fifteen billion years or so. Comparable to this cosmological posi-tion would be this theological position: Since the earth is of such an age compared with which the whole of human history is no more than a brief moment, the point of departure for theologiz-ing should be the original blessing of the earth rather than the original fall. Aside from the first and most extreme position above--a fer-vid New Ager like Carol Christ, however, would prefer not to make such distinctions--the other two positions could easily become the ideal Christian view of earth. Though the Christian West may have used and overused the earth to the point of abuse, Christian sources tell a different story. The Bible opens with the story of the earth and all creation, in which the divinity finds due delight because of the imprint of the divine goodness all through it, Hopkins's one line "The world is charged with the grandeur of God" says it well, and so does Elizabeth Browning's couplet "Earth's crammed with heaven / And every common bush afire with God"--both reminiscent of the psalmist's familiar words "How great is your name, O Lord our God, / through all the earth!" (Ps 8:9). It is quite a revelation, is it not, that God provided a power-ful answer--through not a directly reasoned answer--to the bur-den of Job's anguished questions by encountering him as the God of creation's awesomely rich variety? "Ever since God created the world, his everlasting power and deity--however invisible--have been there for the mind to see in the things he has made" (Rm 1:20). It is no wonder, then, that, whenever God enters into a covenant with his human creation, he carries conviction by invok-ing the enduring solidity of his natural creation in such words as these: "Yahweh who provides the sun for light by day, the moon and stars for light by night, who stirs the sea, making its waves roar, he whose name is Yahweh Sabaoth, says this: Were this estab-lished order ever to pass away from my presence--it is Yahweh 348 Review for Religious who speaks--only then would the race of Israel also cease to be a nation in my presence forever" (Jr 31:35-36). This creation, however, is not as pure as it was originally because of original sin and all the successive sins of humanity. In spite of that, or' perhaps because of it, Paul could visualize the present thus: "The whole creation is eagerly waiting for God to reveal his sons. It was not for any fault on the part of creation that it was made unable to attain its purpose, itwas made so by God; but creation still retains the hope of being freed, like us, from its slaver~ to decadence, to enjoy the same freedom and glory as the children of God. From the beginning till now the entire cre-ation, as we know, has been groaning in one great act of giv-ing birth; and not only creation, but all of us who possess the first-fruits of the Spirit, we too groan inwardly as we wait for our bod-ies to be set free" (Rm 8:19-23). This visualization of all cre-ation, human as well as hatural, contains in an embryonic man-ner all the challenges and hopes Some, then, would say: Since the earth is of such an age compared with which the whole of human history is no more than a brief moment, the point of departure for theologizing should be the original blessing of the earth rather than the original fall. engendered and cherished by enlightened earthlings in relation to their earth, which, for all the ravages caused to it, is still humble, fertile, homely, and motherly. And so we learn to reverence cre-ation and earth and matter as St. John Damascene taught: "Through it, filled, as it were, with a divine power and grace, my salvation has come to me." At the end of a crescendo of ques-tions, he asks: "And, before all these things, is not the Body and Blood of our Lord matter? Do not despise matter, for it is not despicable.''~s These words are surely evocative of Teilhard de Chardin (quite a model for New Age faithful), but not only of him but of Ighatius Loyola (quite unacceptable to the New Age, though of him Teilhard has said that he could no more disown him than he could his own father), from whose Spiritual Exercises Teilhard had learned not a little about the divine milieu of the May-June 199Y 349 Dominic ¯ Accompanying New-Age People It is high time that we take the commandment of love seriously with regard to the way we look at New Age people. earth. In particular in the Contemplation to Attain Love he must have obtained a new vision of the universe in which he could find not only all things in God but God in all things.16 The dynamics of this vision is traced by Gilles Cusson thus: "The final fulfillment of God's revealed plan of salvation, which is a mystery of love expressed in the gratuitous calls to creation and salvation, is the pro-gressive movement of the world toward God, through the coming of the Christ who assumed the totality of our human condition; of the world which, now renewed, finds again on itself the divine mark of its origin and the sublime ordination which God's creative act had imprinted on it."~7 To conclude as we began, it is high time that we take the com-mandment of love seriously with regard to the way we look at New Age people. To the conservative and cocksure among us, some of them may appear to be freaks. But, as one of their fold, Jacquelyn Small, suggests somewhere, "What would Love do?" must be our constant question and search. By reading the signs of the times with a decided spirit of love, one may come to find many an admirable pearl of spirituality in the field of the New Age move-ment. These are to be valued in themselves and are worth redeem-ing for our church and ourselves, for we must love not only our neighbor but ourselves as well. Surely not everything in the New Age's,field is valuable, but among New Age leaders there are, for-tunately, some who dispute whatever is disingenuous and dehu-manizing and disintegrating. A witness to this reality I chanced to find in David Spangler, who in speaking of the New Age describes something that I as a Christian applaud: The shape of the new age takes on ordinary proportions for me. I find it, for example, in nurturing my marriage or in gracefully meeting the demands of parenthood. I find a new age in my craft and improving my work. I find it-in ¯ my questions about myself that impel me to confront my shortcomings and boundaries. I find it in the never ending quest to understand the nature and purpose of a God who 350 Review for Religious is not simply--or even primarily--the inner divinity that so many new age writers focus on, but the evocative Other whose very differences impel me to reach beyond myself and participate in the larger communion and community of life. I find the new age in the daily effort we share to live with integrity, grow with courage, and be a willing partner with life to allow expression of dreams and capabilities.~8 Accompanying New Age adherents in the spirit developed in the pages above would be a way to implement concretely two of the points contained in the call of the Inter-American Assembly of Religious held in 1994 in Santo Domingo, namely, (1) "to reject all that disavows the holiness of our world and its peoples, and instead to embrace our world and its peoples, sharing their con-crete social, economic, cultural, and religious struggles and hopes," and (2) "to reject efforts at evangelization that arise from stances of authoritarian power, and instead to proclaim" the good news and hope of Jesus from within the cultures and the experiences of people." t9 Notes ~ That it has made itself felt in the spiritual world at large is beyond doubt. See The Way, July 1993, devoted entirely to New Age spiritual-ity. 2 Don Gilmore, Extra Spiritual Power (Waco, 1972), p. 90. 3 Ibid, p. 93. 4 See William Johnston, The Inner Eve of Love (London, 1978), pp. 58- 59, and also Luis M. Bermejo, The Allurement of the Summit (Anand: Gujarat Sahitya Prakash, 1993), pp. ix, 66, 67, and passim. s See Matthew Fox and Brian Swimme, Manifesto for a Global Civilization (Santa Fe: Bear and Co., 1982), p. 38. 6 See David Spangler, "The New Storytellers," In Context, Winter 1985, p. 19. 7 V. Hull, "New Myths to Live," One Earth, June-July 1986, p. 19. 8 Cited by Jeremy Taylor, Dream Work (New York: Paulist Press, 1983), p. 20. 9 See Louis M. Savary et al., Dreams and Spiritual Growth (New York: Paulist Press, 1984), p. xi. ~0 Anonymous, Dreams and Destiny (London, 1987), p. 51. ~ SeeJ. Bacchiarello, Forty Dreams of St. John Bosco (Madras, 1969), pp. iv and 2-3. May-3nune 1995 351 Dominic ¯ Accompanying New-Age People ,2 The preceding lines are: When the Way (Tao) fades away, Virtue (7~) raises up, When virtue fades away, humanness (jen) raises up, When humanness fades away, justice (yi) raises" up, When justi6e fades away, the ritual (li) raises upi' --cited by'~Raimon Panikkar, Worship and Secular Man (London, 1973), p. ix. ,3 Happily such were some of the main topics discussed in the work-shop in Canada last year for Jesuits working among the aboriginal peo-ples in different parts of the world. 14 See Panikkar, Worship, p. 85. ,s Cited by Samuel Rayan, "The Earth Is the Lord's," Vidyajyoti, 1990, p. 121. , ,6 Spiritual Exercise¢, §§230-237. 17 Gilles Cusson, Biblical Theology and the Spiritual Exercises (Anand: Gujarat Sahitya Prakash and St. Louis: institute of Jesuit Sources, 1988), p. 323. See also p. 324, n. 34. ,8 New Realities, May-June 1988. 19 Review for Religious 53, no. 4 (July-August 1994): 619-620. Universe Universe becoming befriending and free Summon the more, the maybe, and the not yet from me. Open the winds to enter me in and find gift and seeds and hop~ and flowers knowing that creation comes in longing openness to Mystery. Patricia St Louis CSJ 352 Review for Religious BARBARA VALUCKAS Lithuania: A Return to My Ancestral Home ~hile making my silver-jubilee retreat in 1983, I prayed ~" I¢ over the biblical passages about the year of jubilee. The directive in Leviticus 25 to "return to [your] ancestral home" in the jubilee year penetrated my prayer, bur did not fully infuse my imagination. I was able to name and celebrate many ancestral homes including my family, my church, my religious congregation, and my womanhood. Among these I named my ethriic and cultural roots in Lithuania, but in 1983, several years before the collapse of the Berlin wall, a literal fulfillment of the biblical words was beyond my imagining. I was to learn, however, that it was not beyond God's'imagination for me. I made my,first journey to Lithuania seven years later, just one year after people began streaming through the former Iron Curtain. As provincial of the VVilton, Connecticut, province of the School Sisters of Notre Dame, I was on my way to Hungary via Lithuania to attend an extended general council meeting of our congregation. I encountered a country in the first stages of its exodus experience of freedom. Lithuania,had been the first Soviet-occupied country to declare its° independence. The Sajudis ("Movement") Party sailed into power on a wave of public eupho- Barbara Valuckas SSND works in Pilgrim Ministries to support organi-zational journeys of people worldwide. This article, now slighdy revised, appeared originally in the Eastern Europe issue of LCWR Occasional Papers (March 1995). Her address is Pilgrim Ministries; 9 Academy Hill Road; Watertown, Connecticut 06795. E-mail in U.S.A.: MVV:K5 8 B@Prodigy.com. May-~ne 1995 353 Valuckas ¯ Lithuania ria about all the blessings that would come with freedom and a free market economy. No one then anticipated the long desert trek of turmoil and transition that lay ahead. The effects of five decades of brutal suppression of people and their nation would not dis-appear overnight. When I returned to Lithuania again in 1992 on my way to our general chapter in Rome, the rumblings of popular disillu-sionment had already achieved great momentum. In claiming their independence from Russia, Lithuanians had not fully antic-ipated the economic consequences of being cut off from Russian oil and other commodities. In changing from the ruble economy to one more related to Western currencies, people were jolted by the reality of Western prices. Shadow sides of capitalism were already making their appearance in the form of new unemploy-ment and homelessness; the presence of street beggars shocked people long unaccustomed to such realities. The simple people I met in the countryside expressed their desire to return to.the Egypt of economic security. They said, "At least under the Communists we had enough to eat, and we had heat." These unforeseen shortages of food and fuel helped to bring down the fledgling independence government and to sweep the Communists back as the majority party in Lithuania in the fall. This time, the Communists were not the forcible occupiers, but duly elected officials with a mandate from the people. Many Lithuanians were dazed by this outcome. They could not believe that they had voluntarily elected the same people whose power they had so recently thrown off. They felt stuck in the mud of their own confusion and ambivalence, even as they sought to take the first steps toward rebuilding their country. The rebuilding of every part of Lithuanian life was as daunt-ing a challenge as the rebuilding of the temple in Jerusalem after it had been totally destroyed. Within my own prayer I could feel the Leviticus jubilee invitation to return to one's ancestral home evolving into a more literal and compelling call. I found myself praying, along with Nehemiah (2:1-8), "If it please the king, and if you are satisfied with your servant, give me leave to go to Judah, to the city of my ancestors' tombs, and rebuild it." I prayed this prayer rather blindly because, from a practical point of view, it was not clear to me what I could contribute in Lithuania. Once again my imagination for myself was not up to God's imagina-tion for me. 354 Review for Religious Although all four of my grandparents had come from Lithuania and both of my parents spoke the language, I quickly moved from Lithuanian to English, as many second-generation children of immigrants do. Consequently, I did not know what I could do in Lithuania when my term as provincial gave way to a sabbatical year. I need not have wor-ried because, with little effort on my part, the doors flew open. After learning of my background in educa-tional television, Msgr. George Sarauskas, of the National Catholic Conference of Catholic Bishops Office to Aid Central and Eastern Europe, invited me to serve as a con-sultant to the newly created Catholic Television Center in Lithuania. In retrospect I can appreciate the loving providence of God, who picked up a thread from my profes-sional past and used it as a "leading string of love" (Hosea 11:4) to tug on my heart and my life, gently pulling it toward my ancestral home. Responding to this leading string, I reappeared in Lithuania in mid August 1993 for the first of two three-month periods of life and work with and for the Lithuanian people. From visitation to our SSND missions on other continents, I had learned the need to approach any kind of rebuilding as a humble learner. The Lithuanian people had to identify what needed rebuilding in the temple of their persons and their nation and how that rebuilding should proceed. My role had to be one of listening, support, and enablement. Sister Donna Steffan SC accompanied me for the first three weeks of my fall 1993 visit. Together we visited people in the cities and the countryside. We asked them to share with us their perceptions of Lithuania's current reality and to tell us what they most needed from the church. At first shyly and tentatively and then with growing trust, they revealed that one of their biggest needs was for people just to listen to their stories. The years of occupation had trained them not to trust anyone; as a result, most people kept their experiences and feelings locked up inside them-selves. They recognized a great need to unburden themselves. One woman described the effects of the occupation with the image in a distorting mirror that we in the West most often associate with the fun house in amusement parks. May-37une 1995 355 Valuckas ¯ Lithuania One woman described the effects of the occupation with the image in a distorting mirror that we in the West most often asso-ciate with the fun house in amusement parks. She said that every Lithuanian learned to live behind at least three faces. The first face was the "pro-Communist" face that one was obliged to show to one's employer and professional colleagues in order to keep one's job. The second face was the one shown to one's family and friends. Even this face had many subtle degrees corresponding to one's trust level. The third face was the one shown to oneself. My friend continued by saying that the overall effect of hav-ing to hide behind three different faces for such a long period of years was a gradual disintegration of the personality and a warp-ing of the soul. So, when Lithuanians look into the mirrors of their souls, it is like looking into a distorted mirror. What they see is not lovely but grotesque. It causes some people to go to con-fession often in the effort to "scrape their souls clean" and to receive constant reassurances of God's love and forgiveness of things they may have said or done behind the first face so as to assure their own survival or that of loved ones. This self-image of distortion was mentioned in one form or another by a number of people who described themselves and their country as "bent" in some way. It suggested to me an image of Lithuania as the bent-over woman described in the Scriptures. Like that woman, Lithuania has lost much blood in its tortured patriots and saints. One bishop, upon meeting me and hearing of my purpose in Lithuania, said, "Help us to stand up straight." Donna and I asked some of the parents with whom we visited if they had new hope for the future now that Lithuania had its independence. The most common reply was that these young and middle-aged couples viewed themselves as already having been "destroyed." If they expressed any hope at all, it was for their children. Many said that the years of occupation had forced them to live "like animals." In the stories of the people, we learned that during the occupation every dimension of human creativity was suppressed in the name of the "people." A carpenter could not design a new piece of furniture nor a dressmaker a new pattern unless the designs were approved by numerous offices in Moscow. The approval, in turn, depended upon the ability of the design to be replicated throughout the Soviet Union to preserve some stated ideal of socialist sameness. Eventually many people "forgot" how to think creatively and learned to do only what they were told. 356 Review for Religious I recently heard a radio interview with an American busi-nessman expressing his frustration with doing business in the for-mer Soviet republics. He said that, no matter what size boards he ordered for his building materials, the ones that were delivered were all the same size, the former Soviet standard size. Apparently the workers had lost the ability to imagine that boards could be cut to any other dimension. To me this was a powerful image of the damage that had been done to the minds and psyches of the people. This sense of damage to human creativity was reinforced by our visits to some of the museums in Lithuania. We were awed by the burst of Lithuanian creativity in music, art, literature and poetry, and sculpture during the brief period of national inde-pendence before the occupation. All of the exhibits seemed to me to come to an abrupt halt in the late 1940s. It was like applying to a whole nation the title of Etty Hillesum's book An Interrupted Life. What happened to all of that creativity for a half century? It appears that a lot of it went into the coordination of the under-ground resistance movements, including the underground church. Many Lithuanians, however, having become atheistic collabora-tors with the occupiers, used their energies to promote the pro-paganda machine. Still others turned their talents to the exploitation of people. After independence all of these forms of creativity continued, but in more open ways. The church, newly emerged from the underground, is using its creative energies to rebuild itself above ground. The collaborators are using their tal-ents at various levels of government, pursuing the old Communist agenda as well as their own self-aggrandizement while they are still in power. And the exploiters have emerged in the black market and in other criminal activities, that include an increase in violence. Some entrepreneurs opening private businesses receive almost instant demands for protection money. Resisters, if not murdered, find their new businesses destroyed. After many decades of being cut off from others, Lithuanians are eager to learn more about the rest of the world. Since most do not have the resources to travel, television becomes their win-dow on that world. The most popular television program in Lithuania today is the American soap opera "Santa Barbara." It is not clear to me if the story line is as important to the viewers as are the infinite clues to the first-world affluent lifestyle that May-j~ine 199Y 357 Valuckas ¯ Lithuania American viewers have come to take for granted. They notice that none of the characters have stainless steel teeth (as many Lithuanians do). They note the large living spaces with beautiful bathrooms, the gorgeous clothes and cars. I once gave a relative of mine some American magazines in a brown envelope, the kind with a small metal clasp. The whole family gathered around that envelope and examined the clasp in great detail. Eventually some-one said, "We saw one of these on Santa Barbara!" When the three weeks of Donna's visit had come to an end, we spent a day of prayer and theological reflection on the mean-ing of our experience together. One of the scriptural images that seemed to gather up those .first weeks of listening was the story of Ruth and Naomi. The unexpected loss in the experience of wid-owhood began that story. God seemed to have cut down their hopes, but in reality was leading them to a fulfillment of these hopes beyond their expectations. Ruth and Naomi chose to remain together as they journeyed into an unknown future. For Donna and me, Lithuania itself was like Ruth and Naomi. Its hopes for its own independence as a nation were ruthlessly cut down. But Lithuania is still in the middle of its story; the end-ing is not clear at all. Lithuania is still trying to nourish itself on the few stalks of grain dropped by reapers in the fields. We could also recognize the fidelity of Ruth and Naomi to each other in many of the Lithuanian people we had met: in the young family which remained faithful to their ill and old grandparents, in the young boy who chose to remain with his mother who was dying of tuberculosis, in the many priests, women religious, and lay people who chose to remain faithful to their religion during the long years of persecution. These choices were all the more coura-geous when one remembers that they were made in the teeth of efforts to break down all forms of fidelity, trust, and solidarity. We understood that we ourselves and others coming from outside the country and walking with the Lithuanian people were echoing Ruth's words "Your people shall be my people." We rec-ognized that this would imply a willingness to be with the Lithuanian people in ,their present experience of confusion and scarce resources; it would mean willingness to hold back from efforts to "answer" and "fix." In the end the Lithuanian people need to be the rebuilders of their own nation and church. It is a tricky thing to "accompany" a people without trying to control what they do. Another thread from my professional 358 Review for Religious past helped me in my own struggle to find a balance. While work-ing with an organization called Community Creativity before tak-ing up my ministry of community leadership, I learned how to elicit people's stories about their reality and to "mirror" these experiences to them in helpful ways. I learned that, if people can draw upon their own experiences as their base for learning and growth, they are more likely to see the rebuilding as their own. Over the course of the two three-month periods that I spent in Lithuania during my sabbatical year, I was able to use this "mir-roring" process with three different groups of people within the Lithuanian church: the staff of the Catholic Television Center, the catechists, and the women religious. After interviewing each member of the television center, I had a better sense of its short but significant corporate story. Like almost everything else in eastern Europe, church communica-tions had to jump from 0 to 10 in a very short time after the col-lapse of the Berlin wall. Church officials who had been forcibly silenced for five decades suddenly found themselves expected to speak--on national television--words.of meaning and hope to people who~ "like sheep without a shepher.d," desperately needed guidance as the structures.of their lives crumbled around them. It was a shock both for these church leaders and for the peo-ple to have to jump so suddenly from centrally controlled pro-paganda- oriented media to more democratic and truth-oriented forms. No one knew how to give or receive an opinion, and han-dling any diversity of thought posed real dilemmas. One of the first things that I was able to reflect to the staff of the Catholic Television Center was that, although people had technical skills, no one seemed to have a sense of what the mission of the center was. In the discussion that followed this observation, I learned that the whole concept of a mission statement was new to people whose entire lives had been bent toward purposes defined for them by the government. After much dialogue (which was another new experience in itself), we eventually were able to articulate a mission statement. The Catholic Television Center saw its mission as giving a voice to the once silent Lithuanian church and educating the Lithuanian people about the world church. These purposes, while clear, were fraught with ambivalence. The Lithuanian church survived under-ground only by the exercise of strong central authority that oper-ated largely in secret. There were no group discussions; there May-d~une 1995 359 Valuckas ¯ Lithuania was no consensus building. Information was passed from one per-son to another singly. Control over information was essential to survival. Given this history, It can be quite threatening to provide the .Lithuanian church with a voice Consonant with the Vatican II understandifig of the church as the people of God. The Lithuanian church grapples with questions of how much diversity of thought and'opinion should be expressed in the media and how much should be kept "secret" or even suppressed. There is also ambiva-lence regarding the life of the church in other parts of the world. On the one hand, there is a great eageyness to see how Catholics in other parts of the world live and worship. On the other hand, there is a certain suspicion of theologies, spiritaialities, and rituals coming from other parts of the world and a conse-quenttemptation to control what Lithuanian Catholics are allowed to learn about. With radio, television, fax, and e-mail increasingly available in Lithuania, the democratization 6f infor-mation that is a part of mass communications poses dilemmas for a church only emergin/~ from the underground after years of iso-lation from news about developments in the life of the church. The catechists I visited in each bf the six dioceses .of Lithuania echoed these challenges and voiced their own as they, too, jumped from 0 to 10. When Lithuania became independent, church lead-ers faced a choice: either to begin religious insti'uctlon immedi-ately with ill-prepared teachers without any materials to work with or to do adequate preparation first but thereby risk losing the present instructional opportunity altogether in the quite possi-ble event of reannexation by Russia. They chose the first option. When I visited the catechetical centers in each diocese, cat-echists spoke of the great difficulties they were encountering as they relied on their memories of decades-old religious instruc-tion and tried to pass these fragments on to a new generation of youth with no current materials to help or guide them. Eventually the six dioceses succeeded in collaborating to produce a common catechetical curriculum and in translating some materials from Italy and Austria into the Lithuanian language. The catechetical centers were also. interested in working with the Catholic Television Center to produce s'0me good in'service materials for the catechists and some interesting lessons for the students. When I had completed my visitation of the six dioceses, I wrote a report mirroring the great gifts and the serious challenges 360 Review for Religious I had observed; I distributed it to the directors of the catecheti-cal centers. They were astounded at my report for reasons that amazed me. '"You told the truth," they said. They were not accus-tomed to that. In other professional settings during the occupa-tion, they were accustomed to "inspectors" who came with the primary purpose of criticizing what-ever they saw and who wrote reports that had no correspondence with the reality of their visits. Because of such experiences, the catechists told me, they had awaited my visits with a mix-ture of dread and anxiety. They were flabbergasted to read a report that not only reflected what they had said, but aqtually offered observations and reflections that they found helpful. This was a totally new experience for them. For my part I was astonished to learn how much they had accom-plished, fueled only by zeal, °with scant resources and very meager pay. They had even experienced outright deri. sion from atheistic teachers and stu~- dents. For me, these courageous and selfles~ catechists enfleshed the stories Like many of the other prisoners, this sister fashioned for herself a tiny rosary of hard crumbs of black bread strhng together by a needle and thread. Hid under the lining of her coat, it was never discovered. from the Acts of the Apostles describing the church's early efforts to spread the Good News in the face of extraordinary limitations and challenges from within and without. This difference in experience was one of the many times that I imaged myself as being on the other side'of a chasm from the Lithuanian people. Ways of being that I took for granted were totally out of their lived experience; their faith and courage in the face of adversity were often beyond my ability to compre-hend: For example, the director of ofle of the catechetical centers told me that her entire family was taken away from her and sent to Siberia when she was a small child. Spared this fate because of her age, she was put into the care of some women who provi-dentially were underground nuns. It was through their example that she grew in the faith that sustained her through the loss of her family and ultimately led her to leave her post as a university pro- May-June 1995 361 Valuckas ¯ Lithuania fessor and accept the bishop's invitation to direct a catechetical center, The women religious were the third group of people I was privileged to accompany and mirror. The major superiors had been made aware of the interest which the Leadership Conference of Women Religious (LCWR) and other organizations had in their welfare, and they were eager to talk about their needs. They, too, had their stories to tell. One of these major superiors' told me that almost all of her early religious life was spent in prison. The prisoners were body-searched every day for any signs or symbols of religion. Like many of the other prisoners, this sister fashioned for herself a tiny rosary of.hard crumbs of black bread strung together by a needle and thread. Hid under the lining o.f her coat, it was never discovered. She still has that rosary; When she showed it to me, she said that her prison .experience was one of the most powerful God-experiences of her life. This sister and the other major superiors echoed what many others had said about needing to tell their stories and to experience healing of their memories. The sisters asked for resource people to come from America and other countries to help them psychologically, theologically, and spiritually. They were eager to learn about developments in theology, prayer, and spirituality in the last several decades of their "interrupted lives." They also expressed a strong desire to grow in leadership skills and in the skills related to the develop-ment of community life and ministry. In spring 1994, Sisters Carolyn Mruz OSF and Joan Klaas CPPS, both former general superiors, ioined me in Lithuania for the express purpose of providing input in some of the requested areas. Toward the end of their six,week stay, the sisters asked us to give them a day of recollection. When we inquired as to the usual length of such dhys, they replied, "We don't know: we've never had one before." Another chasm. In their final evaluation the sisters told us that.one of th~ best things about their gatherings with us, in addition to the input, was the opportunity they had to meet one ~another across com-munities. For most, this was their first experience of an inter-congregational gathering. During the years of occupation, when it was not possible to assemble, the sisters were not always sure who were members of their own congregations, much less mem'- bers of other congregations. When they did meet each other for the first time in spring 1994, it gave them great joy to discover 362 Review for Religious that they had so much in common. They learned that sometimes they were their own best listeners to each other's stories. And I, after ending each three-month period in Lithuania, came away feeling not only like Ruth with Naomi, but also like Mary staying with Elizabeth "about three months." Somewhere in those encounters and in spite of the chasms between cultures, languages, and experiences, there was a leaping together toward the life that is lived at the Center of Being, whether of the nation as a whole or of each person. Finally, I return to Nehemiah, who heard God's call to help in the rebuilding of the temple: "Then I said to them, 'You see the trouble we are in: Jerusalem is in ruins, its gates have been burnt down. Come, let us rebuild the walls of Jerusalem and suffer this indignity no longer.' And I told them how the kindly favor of God had been with me, and also repeated the words the king had said to me. 'Let us start!' they exclaimed, 'Let us build',; and with willing hands they set about the good work" (Ne 2:17-18). Vignette The windows of the soul are clouded by hunger, and deeper wounds shrouded from our sight lie buried in the dark night. Foul birds of greed peck at the seeds of war And drop them to be sown in blood from Rwanda to Zaire. Martha Wickham ASC May-.~une 1995 363 ELIZABETH V. ROACH Community Today-- Idol? Icon? Gift? "I could do ministry without becoming a religious, but I want community," the new candidate says. Studies tell us that young people entering religious congregations today are looking for community. Formation directors work hard to provide healthy community experiences for them. Later, superiors general try to assign them to "good" commu-nities. Not only candidates but also men and women in religious life many years are approaching personnel direc-tors seeking "life-giving" communities. All this leaves lit-tle doubt that community has high importance for religious. If one thing is going well with us, it is the pri-ority we are giving to community. To question this trend might seem, if not audacious, perhaps impertinent. I believe, however, that a need exists for a closer look at the almost icon or idol status that com-munity enjoys today. My questions lie in the following areas: (1) In what "soil" did the present status of commu-nity grow? (2) Is it suffering from soil contaminants? (3) What are the gospel parameters for community? If you think I am about to come up with the answers, stop reading now. Then again, if you would like to delve into these questions, accompany me in my meditative mean-dering as I reflect on some questions that pebble the path. Elizabeth V. Roach MM works with three other Maryknoll sis-ters in a settlement area (40,000 people, no priest) on the edge of Panama City. Her address is Maryknoll Sisters; Aptdo. 813- 0343; Tocumen, Republic of Panama. 364 Review for Religious The "Ecological" History of Community Today Polluted streams mar our world. We breathe contaminated air. We read food labels to see what preservatives we are exposing ourselves to. We wonder what is in the water we drink. Why not investigate the "ecological" history of community? Where did community's current popularity grow and develop? Is there need for soil examination? Do we need to protect an endangered speci.es of community? I wonder if some of our present practice has developed, not from gospel roots, but from our environment of consumerism? Whether it is legislation bought by lobbyists, military secrets sold for profit, commerce with the fruit of a woman's womb, or designer drugs, we are a nation of consumers. Listen to us, the words we use. We speak of "mental-health consumers," "spin doctors," and "image" pro-ducers. This is the environment we live in. The nightly television news-cast would convince any visiting Martian that in our society just about anything can be bought. What has that got to do with our present practice of community? Maybe nothing, but similar remarks used to be made when ecologists questioned the purity of our lakes and streams. They were called alarmists. They were said to be exaggerating the dangers of industrial waste. As we seek commu-nity, it might not be amiss to ask how much the consumer envi-ronment we live in is affecting our practice and our working model of community. Maybe we need a quick inventory of our recent past. Even a brief glance at the 1960s shows that many people lived in a rigidly structured world. (When the protests for civil rights and against the Vietnam War began, many could not listen to what was being said. They saw rowdy, carelessly dressed, long-haired people as simply out of line.) Marriage was the order of the day. A "significant other" was something new. Rights of homo-sexuals and lesbian relationships were not acceptable conversa- As we seek community, it might not be amiss to ask how much the consumer environment we live in is affecting our practice and our working model of community. May-3~une 1995 365 Roach ¯ Community Today tion topics. Women who had babies outside of marriage were "unwed" mothers. There were jobs for men and jobs for women. Women were housekeepers, wives, and, yes, diaper washers. Police and soldiers were men. People who bought things were customers not consumers. One had property rights, but consumer rights, sexual-preference rights, and victim rights were unheard of. Abortion was illegal. Body parts, sperm, and wombs were not yet on the market. Spirituality and retreats had to do with religious practice, not feminist circles or marketing seminars. Between the '60s and the '90s came the "me" decade. We are no longer in the '60s. Social consciousness in the '60s meant advo-cacy for the poor, the disadvantaged, the needy. Now, according to Congressman Gingrich, social responsibility means legislation to relieve the taxpayer of politically burdensome aspects of soci-ety. We who live on the edge between modernity and post-modernity may be too caught up in contemporary tensions to examine the ingredients of our community cake mix, but uncon-scious consumption of contaminating elements may cause unex-pected illness. Our search for community is taking place in a world where repression of sexual and other urges is no longer the problem. We have entered a deconstructed world where issues of individ-ual rights versus community rights provoke new conflicts. "Gingrich thinking" is but one example of.this reality. Notice the differing opinions about the trials of the Mel6ndez brothers, Susan Smith, and O.J. Simpson. At the same time, violence, crime, child abuse, elderly abuse, and the "maybe we need to open more orphanages" mentality prevails. "Protection" is the buzz word of the 1990s, whether it refers to protected sex, more police in the streets, or a balanced-budget amendment. In the case of the United States, is it creeping into policies and procedures aboutwhom we will integrate or isolate according to how they fit or do not fit our concept of community? This is the environment we live in. Our concept of commu-nity may be, if not corrupted, at least affected by it. In more than one ~workshop, I have heard presenters say that, when we are changing ministry or community, we should take time to imagine ourselves in the situation and then ask ourselves, "Does it feel good?" That is the same question I ask when I try on a new pair of shoes. Given the psychological healthiness of reflecting on how a 366 Review for Religious change of ministry or community will affect us, what criteria shall we use? Is community just another consumer item? Is it like buy-ing a winter coat, a new car? What are the gospel parameters for community? Have you said or heard any of your friends say, "I have a min-istry, now I'm looking for a community"? Is community just another item on our shopping list, something to be acquired? How gospel-oriented is our practice? New Testament Parameters for Community Another glimpse of what we are about in our practice of com-munity might be gotten by filling out the application form that personnel directors ask religious to complete when they seek a change of ministry or community. Some congregations require these applicants to provide an evaluation from the community where they have been living. Applicants are also expected to state their expectations of the receiving community. The new com-munity's scrutiny leads to acceptance or rejection of the appli-cant. Try filling out one of those forms for Jesus as he hung on the cross (or for one of the apostles, or for Paul). What kind of com-munity evaluation could we submit for Jesus? He was complet-ing a contract and about to move into a new ministry situation. How would the evaluation of his recent community experience read? Would it say he took initiatives not supported by his local community? How would it describe his being abandoned by his colleagues? How would you rate him: (1) on following the con-sensus? (2) on his ability to (a) dialogue with Peter, his confrere? and (b) with local church authorities? (3) on his initiative (a) in going up to Jerusalem? and (b) in going to the garden that Thursday night? (What would you say if you had to write a community eval-uation of Peter, the one who failed so miserably in a community crisis?) Would you have approved of Jesus' "cross" initiative? Would you have questioned his discernment process? Would you have suggested further discernment and perhaps made him miss his hour? (Remember that John and Peter, his close friends, seemed a bit confused about his plans and even about what he was saying at the Last Supper.) May-J~ne 1995 367 Roach ¯ Community Today Palm Sunday Communities or Easter Communities Still another way to reflect on community would be to ask ourselves if we are confusing the group of disciples, those who hung out with Jesus before Good Friday, with the communities that flowered after the resurrection and Pentecost. The crowd that walked with Jesus before that Friday, the Palm Sunday community (apostles and disciples included), seems to have had many characteristics that are considered important for today's communities. Notice that Peter, James, and John were friends. Philip invited his friend Nathaniel to join the group. Does that ring a familiar bell? Is that a way of being integrated into our communities today? Do friends invite friends? In the episode about sitting at Jesus' right and left hand (Mk 10:35-45), similarities with current practice are even more evi-dent. That group looks like they are having a "community day." The apostles and disciples who would soon be walking with Jesus on Palm Sunday had together sailed the Sea of Galilee, hiked to Jerusalem, prayed, and shared ministry experiences. Was that an emergency house meeting they called to confront James and John on their inappropriate power seeking and failure to dialogue before lobbying for the first places? This, after the many excellent workshops they had attended!--workshops on ministry, mission, spirituality, interpersonal relations, theology, and Scripture, and all conducted by the best of presenters. So what happened? Why did that group .of apostles run for it when Jesus stretched out his arms on the cross? All their systems failed. Neither the community days nor the hiking, the theolog-ical reflection, the personal and community prayer, the work-shops, or even the friendship they had with Jesus held them together on that Friday--except for John and Mary and a few other women. That scene, I think, offers an essential .clue to the mystery of what Christian community is. While numbers of people had walked and talked with Jesus, they had not become a community. They may have been a support group: they did meet regularly. They may have been a club: mem-bership was limited and had its requisites. They may have been an interest group or a cooperative, for they participated in the same mission. But they were not yet a community. This they demon-strated on Thursday night when they scattered upon discovering that the big C Jesus was talking about was not community but the cross. 368 Revie~ for Religious Only Mary, John, and the women had discovered that the acid test of Christian community is the permanent, nonnegotiable fol-lowing of Jesus to his death. The hard realities that Jesus himself faced on Thursday and Friday, the aloneness, the abandonment, the dying, are essential elements that must be accepted, lived, and embraced if we are ever to become Easter and Pentecost com-munities. It is not just the warm, fuzzy feeling of moments when we are all together, the consensus evident, celebrating with song and symbol. It is also those dark, fearful, lonely moments of truth-telling in our communities, the utter .aloneness of difficult deci-sion making, the moments described in 2 Timothy 4:9-22, when Paul says "all" deserted him; "no one appeared on my behalf, but the Lord stood by me." It is also those other terrible moments when we~ like Mary and John, stand by our sisters and brothers totally incapable of under-standing .the why of a situation. Both reflection and personal expe-rience lead me to believe that, with-out following Jesus on the way of the cross, we may become interest groups, assemblies of friends, or financially cost-effective entities, but we have not the shadow of a chance of becoming Easter and Pentecost communities. Just look at the Easter community, that community huddled together in fear, in terror for their lives, humiliated by their sinfulness. Has any recent applicant to your community or mine said they want to join us because they are fearful or ~inful? And, if they did, would we accept them or recommend therapy? Yet it is the Easter community, terrified, humiliated, utterly scandalized by the cross, who discovered Jesus in their midst, their sins forgiveh, and their hearts overwhelmed with the joy of his peace. They knew why they were joyful. They could say Jesus is risen and truly here because they knew this;was the same Jesus who died on the cross. Peter's cheeks, the legend tells us, were fur-rowed by tears. Mary had held Jesus' bloodless corpse in her arms. John had stood by the cross. Has any recent applicant to your community or mine said they want to join us because they are fearful or sinful? And, if they did, would we accept them or recommend therapy? May-j~une 199Y 369 Roach ¯ Community Today That Easter community did not come to their consensus by applying the correct interpersonal dynamics for good communi-cation. They did not learn to hang together through attendance at workshops or by hiring a facilitator. While all these may help and no doubt do, there is no way they will ever substitute for the big C on which Jesus built the Easter and Pentecost community or the later communities of Acts. In Acts the community is a motley crowd. They invite all sorts to join them, magiciansand soldiers, preachers and widows. Their criteria did not come from enneagram numbers and Myers- Briggs profiles. (Had these been available, they might have helped resolve interpersonal conflicts--and these communities did include great differences of personality and lifestyle.) The important thing for them was willingness to lay down their lives because of their belief in Jesus' Way. The joy of those communities came not from something available in Greek or Roman markets, but the gift of Jesus' Spirit filling them with overwhelming peace and joy. That peace was pure gift. It happened when they followed Jesus' Way, the paschal way of death and resurrection. In apostolic and early Christian times, Christian community grew'and developed when followers of Jesus came together fear-ful for their lives, humbly repentant of sinfulness, bearing one another's burdens, and willing to die as witnesses to Jesus' living presence. They believed that Jesus, who died for our sins, had risen from the dead and was~truly here. They celebrated this in their gatherings. Only through this paschal living will our com-munities, too, become centers of peace, joy, and good news for all the world. 370 Review for Religious DENNIS J. BILLY Called to Community ~ ~[ . ommunity~:P is an intrinsic element of the call to disci- ~ pleship." A statement such as this normally elicits little disagreement and little, if any, controversy. Whatever our par-ticular calling in life (religious, priestly, or lay), most of us rec-ognize the importance of some Eind of community to accompany us on our journey of faith. Simple agreement, however, does not always evoke profound understanding; it may even keep us from taking a deeper look at the meaning of our closest assumptions. How many of us, for example, actually understand our call to "community" as something at the Very center of our response to God? How many of us think of life in community as something intrinsic to our relationship to God, as something that actually leads us more deeply into the mystery of who God is? And how many of us actually advert to these ideas in the day-to-day cir-cumstances of our lives? Reflection on the nature of our call to community can enhance our vision of what our communal disci-pleship means and how it is to be lived out in daily practice. Vision and Call Everyone needs a vision in life. Call it a dream or a purpose; call it a goal or a sense of direction; call it a founding myth or a narrative of origins--whatever you call it, we all need something in our lives to help us make sense out of our experience and share it with others. One purpose of Christian community is to keep such a vision before our eyes and thereby encourage us to take Dennis J. Billy CSSR, author of fifteen articles for this journal over the course of ten years, writes ag.ain from Rome. His address is Accademia Mfonsiana; C.P. 2458; 00100 Rome, Italy. May-June 199Y 371 Billy * Called toCommunity steps to live it in our everyday lives. It reminds us of the larger context of our lives and keeps us in touch with the traditions that have shaped us and to a large degree have made us who we are. It challenges us to confront the dark side of our human experience and to remain steadfast in our response to God's call in our lives. Communities come in different sizes and shapes. They do so because they respond to different needs within the church and reflect the vast variety of God's creation. Families and base com-munities, parishes and religious congregations, secular institutes and third-order sodalities all exist for a purpose and flourish when they respond well to the needs they seek to fill. Community is not something peripheral to God's call, as if its purpose were only to provide an atmosphere conducive to private personal spiritual growth or to respond to a need in our anthropological makeup. Christian community can and does provide for such things. It is meant, however, to be and to do much more. Life in community is intrinsically related to our journey into the mystery of God and is part and parcel of our Christian vocation. Community life loses its sense of purpose and conviction when it is taken out of the context of a call. Because the Christian vocation leads people into the Divine Mystery, it is inherently communal. Christian community and Christian vocation enjoy a close, reciprocal rela-tionship. It is impossible to have one without the other. By the term "vocation" I refer not to the more qualified sense of the term as a specific state of life in the church (that is, reli-gious, priestly, or lay), but to the call to intimate friendship that God extends to everyone, believer and nonbeliever alike. This call to beatitude (or to the "beatific vision," as previous genera-tions of theologians have phrased it) extends to all people, regard-less of their faith, nationality, race, or position in life. It involves the capacity all of us have to be lifted up through the influence of grace and to see God face-to-face. This mystical vocation which all of us share is sustained through life in community. Because God's nature is inherently communal, our call to divine friendship is worked out and perfected through a life lived with and ori-ented towards others. The Trinitarian Community The Christian tradition acclaims God as the perfect commu-nity of love. God--who has conceived of us, who has created us, 372 Review for Religious and who holds us in being--relates to us in a manner that images his nature. God, who is love, relates to us in love and cannot do otherwise. This is not the place to expound the vast intricacies of the doctrine of the Trinity. Suffice it to say that, however we describe this mystery of intimate social relations (whether through the traditional formulation of Father/Son/Spirit or through recent formulations such as Creator/Redeemer/Sanctifier or Ground/ Other/Bond), the mutual indwelling of persons must somehow be presented within the very nature of the Godhead. Although the mys-tery of God is inexhaustible and no single formulation can fully convey its meaning and depth, revelation teaches us that God is communal by nature, a single being of three clearly differentiated relations. When God is viewed in this man-ner, union with God becomes for us a never-ending journey into the intimate community of divine rela-tionships. All of this may sound rather abstract and unrelated to the daily concerns of life in Christian com-munity. To be sure, lofty ideas about the Trinity may'seem to have little practical value when it comes to the nitty-gritty tensions and concerns of communal living. We should not forget, how-ever, that the Trinity rests at the summit of the hierarchy of truths and, in fact, is the ultimate reality from which all else flows. The Trinity is the quintessential fact. It is not simply a metaphor, or a purely human construct, or a projectiqn of our deepest hopes onto a divine plane. It is an element of God's self-disclosure to humanity which, in its doctrinal formulation, has the status of a divinely revealed truth. The intimate community who is God and whom we call the Trinity is the beginning and end, the alpha and omega, of all things. It is the goal toward which we tend, the force that directs our lifelong activity on this planet, the reality that draws us to our final destiny. Life in Christian community is the primary way in which God prepares us to participate in the mystery of triune love. If it is true, as St. Augustine and many of the medievals thought, that Because God's nature is inherently communal, our call to divine friendship is worked out and perfected through a life lived with and oriented towards others. May-y-une 199Y 373 Billy ¯ Called to Community God has left traces or vestiges of the divine nature imprinted in the very fabric of creation, then one may point to life in Christian community as an important instance where a person can discover a reflection of God's hidden presence in the world. It would be presumptuous to expect that any of us would be ready or even capable of sharing in the intimate relations of the divine nature without a long period of preparation, Most of us will need to be led, step-by-step, along the long and narrow way of the Lord. Christian community, one might say, is the fiery forge in which God tempers our personalities and gets them ready to share more deeply in the fullness of the divine community. It stretches our character and challenges us to live lives that increasingly take others into account. To use an example from the Catholic mysti-cal tradition, it purges us of our imperfections, illumines us along our journey through life, and eventually brings us to a state of union with God. Life in community helps us to discover and become our truest, deepest selves; it naturally overflows in our relationship with others; and it shows us precisely what it means to be friends of God. Whenever we participate in community, we are really experiencing a vestige of God's triune love. The deeper we enter into it, the more we prepare ourselves for our relation-ship with God both now and in the life to come. Such is the role of Christian community, otherwise known as koinonia, that fel-lowship of God's friends we call "church." Given to us by Jesus himself and forever walking in his way, this circle of close disci-ples perpetuates itself by forging genuine human relationships wherever it goes. The Way of Jesus If the Trinitarian basis of Christian community is still too abstract a notion to give us practical guidance in day-to-day liv-ing, a more concrete example comes from the life of Jesus himself. A careful reading of the Gospels shows that he was always calling people to fellowship, especially those who were outcasts from the respectable social enclaves of his day. Prostitutes and tax collec-tors, the poor and the possessed, the blind and the lame were all welcomed by him and invited to partake in the friendship he shares with the Father. His gathering of disciples, his preaching through parables, his emphasis 6n table fellowship, his institu-tion of the Eucharist in the context of a meal, all reveal his deep 374 Review for Religious concern to provide others with a sense of God's gratuitous love and care for them. Jesus reached out to others simply because they were children of the Father and in need of God's friendship. He needed no other reason to call us his friends (Jn 15:15). Jesus' call to fellowship continues to this day. Now, as then, it is the perfect expression of the Son's intimate love of the Father. His fourfold movement of (i) entering our world (in the incar-nation), (2) giving himself away completely (to the point of dying for us), (3) becoming our very food and nourishment (in the Eucharist), and (4) being the source of our hope (in the res-urrection) is a concrete expression of the same selfless giving that characterizes the divine Trinitarian relations. Jesus' love for humanity reveals to us an even deeper love which he shares with his Father. This intimate relationship enables him to listen to the Father's concerns as a loyal and faithful Son. His humble response mani-fests the self-diffusive nature of God's love and discloses the underlying reason for the entire Christ event. Jesus' life provides us with an ideal vision of what life in community should emulate. Just as Christ entered our world and gave himself away completely, to the A careful reading of the Gospels shows that Jesus was always calling people to fellowship, especially those who were outcasts from the respectable social enclaves of his day. point of becoming nourishment and a source of hope for us, so we are called, both individually and in community, to enter the var-ious worlds of people around us and to give ourselves to them in a manner corresponding to Christ's sacrificial offering of him-self, to the point that we too become nourishment for them and a source of life-giving hope. This calling reveals to us the funda-mental meaning of our Christian identity. It' is accomplished not by ourselves alone, but by our cooperating with Christ working in us and influencing us by the grace of his Spirit. As might be expected, it is in the Eucharist that this process of divinization takes on its most concrete and visible form. There we gather as "church" around the table of the Lord and pray to the Father through the Son and in the Spirit. There we celebrate the fel-lowship of God's friends by reenacting Jesus' last meal on earth in its mystical identity with his sacrificial death the following day. May-3~ne 1995 375 Billy ¯ Called to Community There we welcome the presence of the risen Lord not only in our hearts and in our midst, but even in what we eat and drink. There we~celebrate the gift of "God among us" and recognize in the breaking of the bread that the Lord's vocation, like our own, is concerned with our becoming other Christs. Practical Realities These Trinitarian and Christological bases for life in com-munity do not of themselves remove the obstacles that often get in the way of our growth in the Spirit. The vision of what we can become and of what we are called to live is blocked time and time again by the fickle and obtuse human heart. As members of Christ's body, we recognize our divine calling to share in God's love and to carry on Christ's mission through time. We also rec-ognize, however, that human limitations and purely self-centered concerns often prevent us from living up to our noble aspirations. Sin in its various analogues--original, social, personal--distracts us from our mission and leads us into unholy compromises that sunder our vision and detach the remains of it from the practical realities of daily life. What follows are ten of the common diffi-culties communities face in their attempt to live out the implica-tions of their call. 1. Lack of Vision. Call it a lack of faith, a refusal to delve beneath the surface of things, an inability to see the close con-nection between the lives we live and the beliefs we espouse-- whatever you call it, a Christian community can easily get out of touch with its charism or very reason for existence. Vision. is a matter of both head and heart; minimal intellectual assent to the values and goals that originally called the community into exis-tence is not enough. Vision must seize the imagination of the members and generate in them a heartfelt desire to realize the community's objectives in their present situation. For this rea-son, a Christian community always needs inspired dreamers to keep the community's, founding vision in the forefront of its con-sciousness and prudent leaders to interpret this vision amid the practical exigencies of daily life. If the vision is not somehow kept bright and clear, the community loses its focus, dissipates its ener-gies, and eventually goes out of existence. 2. Dyoqtnctional Structures. Every community needs structures for its own good and the good of its members. Structures give 376 Review for Religious the community stability and enable it to function for a long time. Structures, however, can be a curse. If the community is not care-ful, its structures can in time lose their relevance and then inhibit the ways in which its members relate. The structures become dys-functional and deprive the community of the tranquillity it needs to live and do its work. Every community, therefore, needs to examine its structures periodically and change those that now are superflu-ous or needlessly obstruct the mem-bers' lives. Siflce there is only one perfect community (the Holy Trinity itself), communities should not be surprised to find some dysfunctional relating in their internal organization. The goal here should be to remove or minimize structures that are irrele-vant or cause some har

This issue of the RPPP begins with two studies on the role of these informal communities and their influence in other public policy areas. The article by Lujan Menazzi traces the functioning of this public-private articulation during the last military dictatorship in the field of public works. The author identifies the existence of a professional and business community linked to the development of public works and its articulation with the government areas that define budgets and assign works, with a frequent transit of public officials and private entrepreneurs who move from one side to another of the institutional differentiation, it defines a convergence of symbolic and material interests and legitimizes the characterization of this stage as a civic-military dictatorship. The same as in other capitalist societies, business efficiency (cost matrix, productivity, environmental impact, etc.) and proximity, through a variety of formal and informal practices, to the places in the institutional framework where decisions are made of politics, have helped to configure one of the strategic areas of political-corporate power, the rapid growth of business assets and the social prestige of its owners, with diffuse boundaries between public and private interests.Elsa Pereyra presents the case of a group of officials and professionals who, from a community of ideas, technical training and political will, faced the challenges posed by a deep fiscal mess and reduced its impact on the most vulnerable population. His article analyzes the experience of the team that led the Ministry of Economy of the province of Buenos Aires between 1987 and 2007 from the point of view of the construction of analytical, political and technical capacities. To do this, it reconstructs the process that led to the creation of the quasi-currency known as "Patacón", as an example of the type of productions that characterized the performance of this group of officials. The analysis of the ways in which politics and technique were combined in the interventions of the provincial economic team allows the author to compose profiles of state actors more complex than those stylized in the predominant literature in the field of public policies.The following three articles are studies on the policies of care, an issue that in recent years has entered the arena of public policy. Gisela Cánovas Herrera focuses on the debates about the social organization of care, within the framework of welfare studies and the contributions of feminism. Universal Assignment by Child is taken as a case that allows the author to investigate the assumptions related to the role implicitly assigned to women in this social policy and its effects on their participation in the labor market. Erika Van Rompaey examines the concept of quality home care for people in situations of dependency and their different approaches, to reflect on the impact of the material and technical conditions of care offered by the State in the protection of the right to care ; takes as a reference the recent experience of Uruguay, where a new care policy has been designed and implemented, with a provision specifically oriented towards home care. The text of Javier Moro analyzes the performance of the new municipal areas of attention to children and adolescents in the suburbs of Buenos Aires. The author argues that the emphasis on the focus of attention in the domestic-family sphere in detriment of the expansion of a programmatic offer of promotion and access to rights poses a limited and restrictive scope of the transformation stated in the regulations. The article proposes the adoption of a "new architecture" that contemplates the scope of the politics of childhood and adolescence at the local level, the definition of the problem with which these areas work and a territorial view of social policies.Assistance actions aimed at vulnerable population groups (emergency employment plans, conditional transfers of income, specific subsidies) integrated an important part of the social policies of recent years. In addition to the discussion regarding the effectiveness of these actions to address the problems they are aiming at, there were debates about the objective and subjective conditions effectively met by the recipients of the assistance, frequently dyed with discriminatory tonalities. The article by Malena Hopp and Eliana Lijterman reconstructs the arguments and controversies raised about these programs in the target subjects and in workers integrated into labor markets.Juan Pablo Hudson discusses the change in the institutional focus recorded since the change of government in 2015 regarding employment policies aimed at unemployed or precarious employment sectors, highlighting the emphasis on entrepreneurship and individualism, as well as free associativism contrast with the promotion of cooperative formation and the wide-ranging stimulus programs for the popular economy and its most dynamic government actors that took place between 2002 and 2015. Finally Graciela Mingo and Elisa Sarrot focus on the interactions between the State and a variety of actors social and labor issues in the Pro.Cre.Ar plan (2012-2015) in a municipality in the province of Entre Ríos, as an active policy to facilitate access by the middle sectors of society to their own homes; a program that has also suffered cuts and reorientations in recent years. ; El presente número de la RPPP se inicia con dos estudios sobre el papel de estas comunidades informales y su gravitación en otras tantas áreas de política pública. El artículo de Luján Menazzi rastrea el funcionamiento de esta articulación público-privada durante la última dictadura militar en el terreno de la obra pública. La autora identifica la existencia de una comunidad profesional y empresarial vinculada al desarrollo de obras públicas y su articulación con las áreas del gobierno que definen los presupuestos y asignan las obras, con un frecuente tránsito de funcionarios públicos y empresarios privados que se mueven de un lado a otro de la diferenciación institucional, define una convergencia de intereses simbólicos y materiales y legitima la caracterización de esta etapa como dictadura cívico-militar. Lo mismo que en otras sociedades capitalistas, la eficiencia empresarial (matriz de costos, productividad, impacto ambiental, etc.) y la proximidad, a través de una variedad de prácticas formales e informales, a los lugares del entramado institucional donde se toman las decisiones de política, han contribuido a configurar uno de los ámbitos estratégicos del poder político-corporativo, al vertiginoso crecimiento de patrimonios empresariales y al prestigio social de sus titulares, con fronteras difusas entre el interés público y el privado.Elsa Pereyra presenta el caso de un grupo de funcionarios y profesionales que, a partir de una comunidad de ideas, formación técnica y voluntad política enfrentó los desafíos planteados por un profundo desbarajuste fiscal y a reducir su impacto sobre la población más vulnerable. Su artículo analiza la experiencia del equipo que condujo el Ministerio de Economía de la provincia de Buenos Aires entre 1987 y 2007 desde el punto de vista de la construcción de capacidades analíticas, políticas y técnicas. Para ello, reconstruye el proceso que condujo a la creación de la cuasi-moneda conocida como "Patacón", como ejemplo del tipo de producciones que caracterizaron la actuación de ese colectivo de funcionarios. El análisis de los modos en que se combinaron política y técnica en las intervenciones del equipo económico provincial, permite a la autora componer perfiles de actores estatales más complejos que los estilizados en la literatura predominante en el campo de las políticas públicas.Los tres artículos siguientes son estudios sobre las políticas del cuidado, un asunto que en años recientes ha ingresado a la arena de las políticas públicas. Gisela Cánovas Herrera pone el foco en los debates acerca de la organización social del cuidado, en el marco de los estudios del bienestar y los aportes del feminismo. La Asignación Universal por Hijo es tomada como caso que permite a la autora indagar los supuestos relacionados con el rol implícitamente asignado a las mujeres en esta política social y sus efectos sobre su participación en el mercado de trabajo. Erika Van Rompaey examina el concepto de calidad del cuidado en domicilio de personas en situación de dependencia y sus distintos abordajes, para reflexionar sobre el impacto que tienen las condiciones materiales y técnicas de la atención ofrecida por el Estado en la protección del derecho a ser cuidado; toma como referencia la experiencia reciente de Uruguay, donde se ha diseñado e implementado una nueva política de cuidados que cuenta con una prestación orientada específicamente hacia los cuidados en domicilio. El texto de Javier Moro analiza el desempeño de las nuevas áreas municipales de atención a la niñez y adolescencia en el conurbano bonaerense. Sostiene el autor que el énfasis en el eje de atención en el ámbito doméstico-familiar en desmedro de la expansión de una oferta programática de promoción y acceso a derechos plantea un alcance limitado y restrictivo de la transformación declamada en la normativa. El artículo postula la adopción de una "nueva arquitectura" institucional que contemple los alcances de la política de niñez y adolescencia en el nivel local, la definición del problema con la que trabajan estas áreas y una mirada territorial de las políticas sociales.Las acciones de asistencia dirigidas a grupos vulnerables de población (planes de empleo de emergencia, transferencias condicionadas de ingreso, subsidios específicos) integraron una parte importante de las políticas sociales de los años recientes. Además de la discusión respecto de la eficacia de esas acciones para enfrentar las problemáticas a las que apuntan, se registraron debates acerca de las condiciones objetivas y subjetivas efectivamente reunidas por los receptores de la asistencia, frecuentemente teñidos de tonalidades discriminatorias. El artículo de Malena Hopp y Eliana Lijterman reconstruye los argumentos y controversias suscitadas en torno a estos programas en los sujetos destinatarios y en trabajadores integrados a mercados de trabajo.Juan Pablo Hudson discute el cambio del enfoque institucional registrado a partir del cambio de gobierno de 2015 respecto de las políticas de empleo dirigidas a sectores desempleados o de empleo precario, destacando el énfasis en el emprendedorismo y el individualismo, así como en el asociativismo libre por contraste con la promoción de formación de cooperativas y los amplios programas de estímulo a la economía popular y a sus más dinámicos actores de los gobiernos que se sucedieron entre 2002 y 2015. Finalmente Graciela Mingo y Elisa Sarrot enfocan las interacciones entre Estado y una variedad de actores sociales y laborales en el plan Pro.Cre.Ar (2012-2015) en un municipio de la provincia de Entre Ríos, como política activa para facilitar el acceso de sectores medios de la sociedad a la vivienda propia; un programa que también ha sufrido recortes y reorientaciones en los años recientes.

Droughts are phenomena that occur worldwide, in humid and arid environments as well as in the Global North and the Global South. They are considered as slow onset hazards that affect more people than any other natural process with an estimated economic damage of USD 135 Billion and 12 Million casualties globally between 1900 and 2013 (Masih et al., 2014, p. 3636). Sub-Saharan Africa (SSA) is a major drought hot-spot due to vulnerable livelihoods (e.g. dominance of rain-fed agriculture), limited capacities (e.g. financial, institutional), weak infrastructure (e.g. water, mobility) and political instability (e.g. conflicts, corruption). When droughts occur, as recently triggered by El Niño (2015/2016), vulnerability conditions of the affected societies determine, if drought risk manifests as a disaster. As a critical, recent example, the drought in Somalia resulted in a serious humanitarian disaster primarily as the precarious vulnerability situation was further deteriorated by political and violent conflicts (Maxwell et al., 2016). Overall, SSA faces severe challenges to manage drought risk, primarily due to two reasons: First, despite progress, the living conditions remain difficult with prevailing poverty, limited health services and ongoing political unrest in many regions (UNECA et al., 2015). This is alarming, especially against the projected population growth of about 1.3 Billion people in Africa until 2050 (UN-DESA, 2015, p. 3). Second, achieving good living conditions for all, as envisioned by the Sustainable Development Goals (SDG), is a challenge, as climate projections indicate a likely increase of drought frequency and severity in SSA. Higher rainfall variability paired with a strong increase in average temperatures (Niang et al., 2014) will render today's exceptional droughts as the new normal in the near future. These urgent problems require sustainable solutions to improve short- and long-term adaptation. Transdisciplinary science that conflates the strengths of academic disciplines and stakeholders from politics and society is needed to develop risk reduction strategies. Under the umbrella of the Southern African Science Service Centre for Climate Change and Adaptive Land Management (SASSCAL), this thesis makes a contribution to integrated drought risk management schemes by assessing the drought hazard conditions and the societal vulnerability settings in a case study region: the Cuvelai-Basin. This transnational region across Namibia and Angola regularly experiences droughts as recently during 2012 – 2015 with hundreds of thousands of people being water and food insecure (DDRM, 2013; UN-OCHA, 2012). Environmentally, it covers a gradient from humid in the north to semi-arid conditions in the south with associated vegetation patterns. The population practices subsistence agriculture and livestock herding with tendencies of urbanization and lifestyle changes. The societal pre-conditions in both countries are heterogeneous with Angola having experienced decades of civil war until 2002 while Namibia saw continuous institutional and infrastructural development particularly after independence in 1990. To capture the multi-layered impacts of droughts on people's livelihoods, the thesis follows an interdisciplinary approach in the sense of integrating methodologies from physical and human geography. Key questions to be answered are (i) how droughts impact on local livelihoods, (ii) how the environmental drought hazard manifests, (iii) which societal groups are most vulnerable and (iv) what are risk mitigation strategies. Based on the theory of societal relations to nature, a guideline for a social-ecological drought risk assessment is proposed and exemplarily carried out in this thesis. First, a qualitative research phase was conducted to gain system knowledge, followed by quantitative analyses of environmental parameters on the drought hazard and socio-economic variables for drought vulnerability. Finally, this data was conflated in the Household Drought Risk Index (HDRI) to gain orientation knowledge and quantify risk levels among the households in the basin. This provided transformation knowledge to develop and identify risk mitigation strategies. The initial qualitative survey (n = 26) explored the drought impact on local livelihoods. It revealed structural insights into people's utilization of water resources and the negative impacts of drought on physical and mental health, family/community life and livelihood maintenance. Coping mechanisms were identified on multiple levels from the household level (e.g. selling of agricultural products) via the community (e.g. neighbourly support) to the governmental level (e.g. drought relief). As critical entry point for droughts, the water and food consumption patterns were identified that shape a household either more or less sensitive. The internal capital endowment (human, social, financial, physical and natural) and the infrastructural and institutional endowment of an area determine a household's ability to cope with drought. These qualitative insights culminated in the construction of the HDRI indicator that was populated with data in the subsequent research phases. To capture the drought hazard, three common drought indicators were combined in the Blended Drought Index (BDI). This integrated drought indicator incorporates meteorological and agricultural drought characteristics that impair the population's ability to ensure food and water security. The BDI uses a copula function to combine common standardized drought indicators that describe precipitation, evapotranspiration, soil moisture and vegetation conditions. Remote sensing products were processed to analyse drought frequency, severity and duration. In this regard, the uncertainty among a range of rainfall products was evaluated to identify the product that corresponds best to local rain gauge measurements. The integrated drought hazard map indicates the north of the Etosha pan and the area along the Kunene River to be most threatened by droughts. Temporally, the BDI correlates well with millet/sorghum yield (r = 0.51) and local water consumption (r = -0.45) and outperforms conventional indicators. The vulnerability perspective was captured using primary socio-economic data from a household survey (n = 461). The consumption patterns reveal a statistically significant switch from critical sources (e.g. wells, subsistence products) during the rainy season to more reliable sources (e.g. tap water, markets) during the dry period. Households with a high dependence on critical sources are particularly sensitive to drought. The capital endowment of households is heterogeneous, especially on a rural-urban gradient and between Namibia and Angola. Human and financial capital turned out to be important control variables in addition to the infrastructural and institutional endowment of an area. Overall, the HDRI results show that the Angolan population shows higher levels of risk, particularly caused by less developed infrastructural systems, weaker institutional capabilities and less coping capacities. Urban inhabitants follow less drought-sensitive livelihood strategies, but are still connected to drought conditions in rural areas due to family relations with obligations and benefits. Furthermore, the spatial HDRI estimates point to areas in Angola and Namibia that are both drought-threatened and vulnerable. The thesis results indicate the following recommendations for policy and science: First, the continuous monitoring of drought patterns in the basin should consider drought indicators that go beyond precipitation metrics and incorporate people's vulnerability to develop integrated Drought Information Systems. Second, reducing the sensitivities of the population requires enhanced local water buffers via better water use efficiencies. This is true for both blue and green water flows. Water-saving irrigation schemes in combination with decentral rain- and floodwater harvesting are promising opportunities. Furthermore, centralized backup infrastructures of water supply and market systems need to be expanded. Third, local community solidarity is an important institutional backbone for the population to cope with drought and adapt to future changes. In particular rural development efforts should go beyond technological interventions and support community-building, collective-action and capacity development in water management and agricultural production to decouple livelihoods from local rainfall. ; Dürren sind Phänomene, die weltweit sowohl in humiden als auch ariden Räumen sowie im Globalen Norden und im Globalen Süden auftreten. Sie gelten als langsam einsetzende Gefahren, die mehr Menschen betreffen als jeder andere natürliche Prozess mit einem geschätzten wirtschaftlichen Schaden von 135 Mrd. US-Dollar und 12 Mio. Toten weltweit zwischen 1900 und 2013 (Masih et al., 2014, p. 3636). Sub-Sahara Afrika gilt als Krisenherd aufgrund vulnerabler Lebensgrundlagen (z.B. Dominanz des Regenfeldbaus), begrenzter Kapazitäten (z.B. finanzielle, institutionelle), schwacher Infrastruktur (z.B. Trinkwasser, Mobilität) und politischer Instabilität (z.B. Konflikte, Korruption). Treten Dürren auf, wie kürzlich verstärkt durch El Niño (2015/2016), bestimmt die Vulnerabilität der Gesellschaft, ob sich das Dürrerisiko als Katastrophe manifestiert. Ein kritisches Beispiel ist die Dürre in Somalia, die v.a. zu einer humanitären Katastrophe wurde, da die prekären Vulnerabilitäts-bedingungen durch gewaltsame, politische Konflikte weiter verschlechtert wurden (Maxwell et al., 2016). Insgesamt steht Afrika aus zwei Gründen vor großen Heraus-forderungen bei der Bewältigung des Dürrerisikos: Erstens, sind die Lebensbedingungen u.a. aufgrund anhaltender Armut, begrenzter Gesundheitsversorgung und politischer Unruhen weiterhin schwierig (UNECA et al., 2015). Dies ist alarmierend, v.a. vor dem Hintergrund eines prognostizierten Bevölkerungswachstums von 1,3 Mrd. bis 2050 (UN-DESA, 2015, p. 3). Zweitens, ist die Schaffung guter Lebensbedingungen nach den Zielen für nachhaltige Entwicklung (SDG) eine Herausforderung, da mit dem Klimawandel eine Zunahme von Dürrehäufigkeit und -stärke zu erwarten ist. Höhere Niederschlags-variabilität gepaart mit einem starken Anstieg der Durchschnittstemperatur (Niang et al., 2014) werden die heutigen extremen Dürren in Zukunft zur neuen Normalität machen. Diese Probleme erfordern nachhaltige Lösungen, um kurz- und langfristige Anpassungen zu ermöglichen. Transdisziplinäre Forschung ist gefordert, welche die Stärken wissenschaftlicher Disziplinen und Akteure aus Politik und Gesellschaft bündelt, um geeignete Strategien zur Risikominderung zu erarbeiten. Unter dem Dach des Southern African Science Service Centre for Climate Change and Adaptive Land Management (SASSCAL) leistet diese Dissertation einen Beitrag zu integrierten Managementansätzen von Dürrerisiken, indem sie die naturräumliche Gefährdung kombiniert mit der gesellschaftlichen Vulnerabilität anhand einer Fallstudie untersucht: dem Cuvelai-Becken. Diese transnationale Region in Namibia und Angola ist regelmäßig Dürren ausgesetzt, wie zuletzt in den Jahren 2012 – 2015 mit Wasser- und Ernährungsunsicherheit für Hunderttausende von Menschen (DDRM, 2013; UN-OCHA, 2012). Naturräumlich erstreckt sich die Region von einem humiden Norden in einen semi-ariden Süden mit entsprechenden Vegetationsverhältnissen. Die Bevölkerung betreibt Subsistenzland-wirtschaft und Viehzucht, wobei Urbanisierungstendenzen und Lebensstiländerungen an Dynamik gewinnen. Die gesellschaftlichen Voraussetzungen sind heterogen: Während Angola bis 2002 Jahrzehnte des Bürgerkriegs erlebte, erfuhr Namibia v.a. nach der Unabhängigkeit 1990 eine kontinuierliche institutionelle und infrastrukturelle Entwicklung. Um die vielschichtigen Auswirkungen von Dürren auf die Lebensgrundlagen zu erfassen, verfolgt diese Dissertation einen interdisziplinären Ansatz im Sinne der Integration von Methoden aus der Physischen- und Humangeographie. Kernfragen darin sind (i) wie sich Dürren auf die Lebensgrundlagen auswirken, (ii) wie sich die naturräumliche Dürregefährdung manifestiert, (iii) welche gesellschaftlichen Gruppen vulnerabel sind und (iv) welche Strategien zur Risikominderung geeignet sind. Dabei entwickelt die Dissertation auf Basis der Theorie gesellschaftlicher Naturverhältnisse einen Leitfaden für eine sozial-ökologische Risikoabschätzung und wendet diesen in der vorliegenden Fallstudie an. Zunächst wurde eine qualitative Forschungsphase durchgeführt, um Systemwissen zu gewinnen, gefolgt von einer quantitativen Analyse von Umweltparametern zur Abschätzung der Dürregefahr sowie sozioökonomischer Variablen für die Abschätzung der Vulnerabilität. Schließlich wurden diese Daten im Household Drought Risk Index (HDRI) zusammengeführt, um Orientierungswissen zu generieren und das Dürrerisiko der Haushalte zu bestimmen. Daraus abgeleitetes Transformationswissen ermöglichte dann die Identifizierung geeigneter Risikominderungsstrategien. Die qualitative Erhebung (n = 26) explorierte die Wirkung von Dürren auf die lokalen Lebensbedingungen. Sie eröffnete Einblicke in die Nutzung von Wasserressourcen und die negativen Auswirkungen von Dürren auf die körperliche/geistige Gesundheit, das Familien-/Gemeinschaftslebens sowie den Lebensunterhalts. Bewältigungsmechanismen konnten auf mehreren Ebenen identifiziert werden, vom Haushalt (z.B. Verkauf landwirtschaftlicher Produkte) über die Gemeinde (z.B. Nachbarschaftshilfe) bis hin zur staatlichen Ebene (z.B. Dürrehilfe). Als kritische Wirkpunkte für Dürren wurden Nutzungsmuster von Wasser- und Nahrungsmitteln identifiziert, die einen Haushalt mehr oder weniger anfällig machen. Die interne Kapitalausstattung (Humanes, Soziales, Finanzielles, Physisches und Natürliches) und die infrastrukturelle und institutionelle Ausstattung eines Gebiets bestimmen weiterhin die Fähigkeit eines Haushalts, mit der Dürregefahr umzugehen. Diese Erkenntnisse ermöglichten die Konstruktion des HDRI Indikators, der in den Folgephasen mit entsprechenden Daten bestückt wurde. Zur Erfassung der Dürregefahr wurden drei Dürreindikatoren im Blended Drought Index (BDI) zusammengefasst. Dieser integrierte Dürreindikator berücksichtigt meteorologische und landwirtschaftliche Merkmale, die die Ernährungs- und Wassersicherheit der Bevölkerung beeinträchtigen. Der BDI verwendet eine Copula-Funktion, um gängige Dürreindikatoren zu kombinieren, die auf Niederschlag, Evapotranspiration, Bodenfeuchte und Vegetation zurückgreifen. Fernerkundungsprodukte wurden verarbeitet, um Häufigkeit, Stärke und Dauer der Dürren zu analysieren. Dabei wurden verschiedene Niederschlagsprodukte einer Unsicherheitsanalyse unterzogen, um jenes Produkt zu identifizieren, das am besten mit lokal gemessenen Stationsdaten korrespondiert. Die resultierende, integrierte Dürregefahrenkarte zeigt den Norden der Etosha-Pfanne und das Gebiet entlang des Kunene-Flusses als am stärksten von Dürren bedroht an. Zeitlich korreliert der BDI gut mit den Daten des Hirseertrages (r = 0,51) und dem lokalen Wasserverbrauch (r = -0,45) und übertrifft dabei konventionelle Indikatoren. Die Vulnerabilität wurde anhand von sozioökonomischen Daten aus einer Haushalts-befragung (n = 461) erfasst. Die Nutzungsmuster zeigen einen statistisch signifikanten Schwenk von kritischen Wasser- und Nahrungsquellen (z.B. Brunnen, Subsistenz-produkte) hin zu verlässlichen Quellen (z.B. Leitungswasser, Märkte) während der Trockenzeit. Haushalte mit einer starken Abhängigkeit von kritischen Quellen sind besonders sensitiv gegenüber Dürren. Die Kapitalausstattung der Haushalte variiert v.a. zwischen Land und Stadt sowie zwischen Namibia und Angola. Dabei treten Human- und Finanzkapital gemeinsam mit der infrastrukturellen und institutionellen Raumausstattung als wichtige Kontrollvariablen hervor. Die HDRI Ergebnisse zeigen, dass die angolanische Bevölkerung ein höheres Risiko aufweist, was v.a. durch weniger entwickelte Infrastruktursysteme, schwächere institutionelle- und geringere Bewältigungskapazitäten verursacht wird. Insgesamt gehen Stadtbewohner weniger dürresensitiven Nutzungsmustern nach, sind aber aufgrund familiärer Beziehungen weiterhin mit den ländlichen Gebieten verbunden. Die integrierte, räumliche Risikoabschätzung zeigt Gebiete in Angola und Namibia die sowohl dürregefährdet als auch vulnerabel sind. Die Ergebnisse erlauben zentrale Empfehlungen für Politik und Wissenschaft: Erstens sollte die Dürrebeobachtung im Cuvelai-Becken ein breiteres Spektrum von Indikatoren berücksichtigen und zusätzlich die Verwundbarkeit der Bevölkerung einbeziehen. Dies ermöglicht die Entwicklung von integrierten Dürreinformationssystemen. Zweitens, zur Verringerung der Sensitivität der Bevölkerung müssen lokale Wasserspeicher durch eine verbesserte Wassernutzungseffizienz erhöht werden. Dies gilt sowohl für blaues als auch grünes Wasser. Wassersparende Bewässerungssysteme in Kombination mit dezentralen Regen- und Flutwasserspeichern sind vielversprechende Möglichkeiten. Darüber hinaus müssen zentrale Infrastrukturen der Wasserversorgung und der Marktsysteme ausgebaut werden. Drittens, ist der Zusammenhalt der lokalen Gemeinschaften ein wichtiges institutionelles Rückgrat zur Bewältigung von Dürren und zur Anpassung an künftige Veränderungen. Anstrengungen zur Entwicklung des ländlichen Raums sind erforderlich, die über technische Interventionen hinausgehen und Gemeinschaften durch kollektive Maßnahmen und Ausbildung sowohl in der Wasserwirtschaft als auch der Landwirtschaft unterstützen und so die Lebensgrundlagen von den Niederschlägen entkoppeln.

The Mercury December, 1908 HEEP THOSE WHO HEEP US. The Intercollegiate Bureau of Academic Costume. Cotrell & Leonard, ALBANY, N. Y. 2**£™°I CAPS AND GOWNS TII Gettysburg College. Lafayette, Lchigh. Dickinson, State College, Univ. of Penn s> Ivani i. Harvard, Yale, Princeton, Wellesley, Bryn Mawr and the others. Class Contracts a Specialty. Correct Hoods _»»■ Degrees. The College Man's Opportunity. We offer the Surest Means of finding your right place. Hundreds of good positions open in business, in teaching and in technical work. Offices in 12 cities. Write us to-day. TUB JYMTJOJVJZ, OB»^JVIZJlTIOJV Of BXAIJV BHOXBJtS. Commonwealth Trust Building, Philadelphia, Pa. HOTEL GETTYSBURG, Headquarters for BANQUETS. Electric Lights, Steam Heat, All Conveniences. Free Bus to and from station. Convenient for Commencement Visitors. BATES $2.00 PEB DAY. £iver-y Cttad-ied. Jotin P. M^tifl- Proprietor. DEALERS IN All kinds of Fresh and Smoked Meats Chambersburg St., Gettysburg, Pa. WE RECOMMEND THESE FIRMS. Established 1867 by Allen Walton. ALLEN K. WALTON, Pres. and Treas. ROBT. J. WALTON, Supt. Hummelstown Brown Stone Company, QUARRYMEN and Manufacturers of BUILDING STONE, SAWED FLAGGING and TILE. WalioTwille, 33a.-LiprT.-Ln. -&o., Pa,. CONTRACTORS FOR ALL KINDS OF CUT STONE WORK. Telegrapn and Express Address, Brownstone, Pa. Parties visit-ing quarries will leave cars at Brownstone Station on the P. & R. R. R. For Artistic Photographs Go To TIPTOJV The Leader in PHOTO FASHIONS Frames and Passapartouts Made to Order. PATRONISE OUR ADVERTISERS Come and Have a Good Shave or Hair Cut —AT— Harry B. Sefton's BARBER SHOP. 35 Baltimore St. Barber's Supplies a Specialty. Also choice line of Cigars. SHOES REPAIRED -BY-Charles Hartdagen, Middle St., Opp. Court House, GUARANTEE ALL WORK. GETTYSBURG DEPARTMENT STOKE. Successors to the L. M. Alleman Hardware Co., Manufacturer's Agent and Jobber of HARDWARE, OILS, PAINTS AND QUEENSWARE, GETTYSBURG, PA. Vke only Jobbing House in Adams County. PATRONIZE OUR ADVERTISERS. 2 * * » | Seligniqi] I * % 1 ^ B^etim | !t ** 2 Are Gettysburg's Most * * * aV * « v. « «» V* t- * * * * -3 Reliable TAILORS #»»**###*#**#*****»*** PATRONIZE OUR ADVERTISERS. i^l^^^^i^^^^^^i^i^^i^^r'i^M^l^.y^yi^-^i^^i^: as ;!. .1.1I ■>!•■ II IIfI Essentially the instruments for criti-cal and discriminating- buyers. Super-ior in every detail of construction and superb instruments for the production of a great Variety of musical effects and the finest shades of expression. Close Prices. Easy Terms. Old Instruments Exchanged. WEAVER ORGAN AND PIANO CO., MANUFACTURERS, YORK, PA , U S A. \&i^iAtt%zi&Zfc5%'i$te*&*&M$',?¥:&& s Headquarters —FOR-HATS, SHOES, A*TD GENT'S FURNISHING. Sole Agent lor WALK-OVER SHOE EGBERT'S STORE. Prices Always Right Itje Lutheran Mlieirtloji Society No 1424 Arch Street, PHILADELPHIA, PA Acknowledged Headquarters for anything and everything in the way of Books for Churches, Colleges, Families and Schools, and literature for Sunday Schools. PLEASE REMEMBER That by sending your orders to us you help build up and develop one of the church in-stitutions with pecuniary ad-vantage to yourself. Address HENRY 8. BONER, Supt, THE KAERCURV The Literary Journal of Gettysburg College. VOL. XVI GETTYSBURG, PA., DECEMBER, 1908 No. 7 CONTENTS. A CHRISTMAS POEM 2 E. J. BOWMAN, '11. JUSTIFICATION OP THE BOYCOTT 3 E. E. SNTDER, '09. CONSTITUTION OP THE KEYSTONE DEBATING LEAGUE 7 IS THE GOVERNMENT COSTING US TOO MUCH?. 9 P. S. DENGLER, '09. OUR LITERARY SOCIETIES II.—PHRENA 11 WHY IS GETTYSBURG NOT WEALTHY? 13 ST. G. PHILLIPY, '09. THE JUNIOR "PROM" SOCIALLY CONSIDERED. .15 BIOGRAPHY OF SCHILLER 17 MISS BAUSCH, '11. CULTURE'S DISTRESSING FOE 20 G. E. WOLF, '09. THE ECONOMIC ASPECTS OF THE LINCOLN ROAD.22 G. L. KIEFFER, '09. THE "INDIAN STEPS." 23 E. C. STOUFFER, '11. THE INVESTIGATION OF THE FARMER; WHAT IS IT LIKELY TO BE WORTH? 25 MISS HELEN H. BRENNEMAN, '08. EDITORIALS 27 BOOK REVIEWS 29 EXCHANGES 30 THE MERCURY A CHRISTMAS POEM. E. J. BOWMAN, '11. .Behold the earth in solemn stillness lies! Again, his course traversed, the king of day Has sunk beneath the distant mountain tops. No longer glows in radiance the sky, But silent night enshrouds the wearied earth. No sound of man or beast comes forth to break The charm that over all has cast its spell. And far above from out the folds of heaven's Aetherial dome, the stars innumerable and Sublime are smiling on the earth below. All nature bows her head in reverence, thus- The God of Peace to laud and magnify. 'Twas such a night when from far Eastern lands, O'er mountains high, through valleys deep, Wise Men? Their way were tracing, guided by a star Outshining all the innumerable host That spangled all the heaven's majestic dome- When lo o'er Judah's city, Bethlehem, It stopped, and there, within a lowly hut, Behold, asleep within a manger lay The Holy One, the Buler of the Wise, By seers announced and prophets long before- 'Twas such a night when on the rolling hills O'erlooking David's City, Bethlehem, The humble shepherds, holy and devout, Their flocks were guarding from the hostile foe That roamed o'er hill and plain in quest of prey- When lo, the glory of the living God Around them shown, and, standing in their midst They saw the form of One divine in robe Of heavenly light, and in a tender voice The Messenger addressed the shepherds thus: "Fear not, I bring you tidings of great joy, THE MERCURY. To you, I bring them and to all mankind: In yonder Bethlehem is born this day A child, who is your Saviour and your Lord." Then while the shepherds filled with awe, o'er this Mysterious scene were meditating deep, Their gaze beheld a heavenly host in robes Of shining white around the Messenger Of love. Then forth upon the hallowed night The mellow strains of heavenly music broke, And there alone by God's own chosen few "Was heard the anthem of the Christmas-tide: "To God on high be glory evermore And upon earth goodwill and peace to men." JUSTIFICATION OF THE BOYCOTT. E. E. SNYDER, '09. JHE justification of the boycott is by no means an easy task. Its practice and its underlying principle have always been questioned and in view of the advanced and radical ground taken by both its advocates and its opponents, a careful study of the boycott, its history, its develop-ment, its modern forms, and its ultimate object, is necessary to enable us to pass judgment upon it, either favorable or unfavor-able. The term originated in 1880 when Captain Boycott, an Eng-lishman, who was the agent of Lord Barne in the Connemara district of Ireland, became so obnoxious because of his harsh treatment of the tenants, that they retaliated by inducing the people for miles around to have nothing whatever to do with him. They would neither speak to him, work for him; buy from him, sell to him, or in any way connect themselves with him. More than this they resorted to violence and even blood-shed, to prevent others from doing so. But this was not the ori-gin of the practice although it gave rise to the term. The prac- 4 THE MERCURY. tice extends almost as far back as history itself. In 1327 the citizens of Canterbury, England, boycotted the monks of Christ's Church. They refused to inhabit the houses of the prior, and passed an ordinance that no one should buy, sell, or exchange drink or victuals with the monastery. A severe punishment was provided against the disobedience of the order. The first use of the boycott in America was during the period just preceding the Eevolution, when the colonists boycotted several articles of British make. This culminated in the Boston Tea Part}', which was advocated and supported by our best and most patriotic citizens. Thus the advocates of the boycott claim that it was born in the cradle of American liberty. It was a great weapon, used by the Abolutionists against slavery, and it has often been used by ministers and others prominent in the social world against intemperance, immorality and other social evils. It has been used by the Manufacturer's Association against the work-ingmen, but here it is known as the "black list," and in this form it has ruined thousands of poor laborers. It has also been used by the laborers, in retaliation against the capitalists and it is this use which represents what we today recognize as the boy-cott. Thus from its history we might define boycott in its original usage, as meaning a combination of many to cause loss to one person by refusing to have any relations with him and by influ-encing and coercing others to treat him in like manner. In re-taliation for some wrong either real or imaginary, they withdraw from the victim all beneficial intercourse and even resort to force, in order to persuade others to do likewise. Today the term boy-cott means a combination of many usually organized working-men against an individual or a combination, through which they seek by withdrawing their support and services to secure redress for some infringement upon their rights. It,is this use that we would attempt to justify. The boycott, as has been mentioned, is but another name for the "black list," although it is usually practiced with a nobler end in view. The boycott usually seeks redress for wrongs, while the "black list" disregards the justice of its object and seeks only additional advantages by this coercive means. Yet the capital-ists raise a great cry of injustice when the boycott appears,, and shall be defined by the college that submits the question. THE MERCURY. lose no time in making their appeal to the courts for injunction and protection, although they are daily and yearly practicing the same principle against the laborer who can seek justice through no other means. But in this case it is the poor man's ox, that is gored instead of the rich man's, and if he would resist or seek redress, he is pointed out as dangerously affected by socialistic principles, and often suffers for trying to maintain a right guar-anteed to all by our Constitution. In practice, also, the boycott has changed, and few of the ob-noxious and injurious characteristics of the ancient boycott re-main. The boycott, as practiced at present, as has been stated, is simply the ostracism of an individual or organization, by an organization in order to secure, what they believe to be their rights. It may result in great pecuniary loss to the victim and because of this fact has often been restrained by injunction, but ■no violence attaches to it; no personal harm or injury, and in many cases individual bitterness has been eliminated. No force or coercion is used outside the obligations of membership in the contending organization, although, this fact is often changed, .and it is true that many organizations do take up the fight in sympathy. It is, when rightly used, but an effective weapon in the hands of the laborer by the use of which he is able to secure consideration and justice, when other means have failed, and as such its use is justifiable. From the laborer's standpoint its use possesses considerable economic importance, for it is only by its use, through the me-dium of his organization that he can battle, with any degree of success against the oftimes higher intelligence and more perfect organization of his employers, the capitalists. In this age, the tendency of each class, seems to be to gain wealth regardless of the loss, they may occasion. To the laborers, the boycott, is one of the few barriers that stand between him and a lower standard of living, which would be the inevitable result, were these barriers removed. Our eco-nomic welfare depends upon progress in every class. If the laborer is to share this progress he must advance and not recede. He must raise his standard of living, his culture and his edu- •cation instead of lowering them. To do this he must be in con-tinual conflict with the capitalist, who is his superior in educa- THE MERCURY. tion, and had an additional advantage because of his capital. The boycott has proved to be one of the few things which the •capitalists have not been able to overcome, and as its use enables the laborers to maintain his ground in the conflict for advance-ment, it is certainly justifiable. The boycott can also be regarded, as simply the practice of the right guaranteed to each citizen by our government, to say, write, or publish, anything he wishes, on his own responsibility. This is what the laborer claims for the boycott. He certainly has the right to govern his own words and dealings and to use his influence with others so long as he advocates a just cause and uses no coercive measures to secure adherents. This represents the workingman's idea of the boycott, and while it must be ad-mitted that it is here pictured in its most favorable form, and •that it is seldom practiced within the prescribed limits, yet the argument is founded upon a basis of justice and many decisions of higher courts have recognized this fact. As a last claim, we would advance the boycott, as the only ef-fective weapon against the "black list." No man has a right to work permanent ruin to another because of individual difference of opinion nor has an organization a similar right, and since the employer often uses this means against the employee, the laborer has a right to defend himself by the boycott. It is a hard and bitter solution to the problem. It is the Old Testament dispen-sation, "An eye for an eye." but when we consider that the con- 'ditions, from an ethical standpoint are far from normal, we must be satisfied if they do require abnormal means. Thus would we justify the boycott, from an economical view-point, but when we turn on our question the light of an ethical culture, we find it again questionable and we are compelled to ask ourselves the question, "Is there in the business activity of today, as represented by the masses on both sides, a point where ;an individual can retain pure ethical ideals and secure true eco-nomic good?" Perhaps in the masses there is not, but it is pleasing to note that here and there in the great business hustle of our age, we see sturdy advocates of a higher principle emerg-ing from the ranks of both contestants and when these shall have gained a majority the justification of the boycott will be impos-sible, but not until then. THE MERCURY. 7 CONSTITUTION OF THE KEYSTONE DEBATING LEAGUE. ARTICLE I. NAME AND MEMBERSHIP. This organization shall be known as the Keystone Inter-Colle-giate Debating League and shall have the following members: Bueknell, Lafayette and Gettysburg Colleges. ARTICLE II. PURPOSE. The purpose of this organization shall be to increase interest in debating in each of the colleges represented and to encourage inter-collegiate debating. ARTICLE III. ORGANIZATION. The executive committee shall consist of one undergraduate from each college represented and shall meet annually at the time and place of the final debate to transact all business of the League. ARTICLE IV. CONTESTANTS. Each college shall send to the contest in which it participates three representatives. Contestants shall be regularly enrolled students in the collegiate department taking at least ten hours of recitation or lecture work per week. The names of the de-baters and alternate shall be submitted to the opposing team at least ten days before the debate. No college shall protest the-eligibility of a debater later than five days before the debate. ARTICLE V. SELECTION OF QUESTION. The question for debate shall be submitted not later than six weeks and returned not later than five weeks before the debate is to be held. The college that receives the question shall select sides. No college shall submit the question to the other college twice in succession. Terms in the question, if not understood. THE MERCURY. ARTICLE VI. JUDGES. The college at which the debate is held shall submit to the visiting team at least four weeks before the debate the names of prospective judges. The visiting team may strike from the list any of "the names and shall return the remainder within one week designating the order of preference. No personal friend of any contestant and no one having had student of official relations with either of the colleges involved, shall be eligible for appoint-ment as judges. At the close of the contest, without conference-with his associates, each of the three judges, deciding for him-self, shall give his vote duly signed and sealed to the presiding officer who shall announce the decision. The judges shall base their decision on argument and composition and delivery; argu-ment to count sixty per cent., composition and delivery forty per cent. ARTICLE VII. CONTEST. The college at which the debate is held shall select the presid-ing officer. Each debater shall have fifteen minutes; ten min-utes for his opening speech and five minutes for rebuttal. The first speech in rebuttal shall be made by the negative, and the-affirmative shall close the debate. The order of speakers in re-buttal shall be left to the discretion of the respective teams. No> new material shall be introduced in rebuttal speeches. ARTICLE VIII. EXPENSES. At the annual meeting of the Executive Committee, each col-lege shall present an itemized statement of its expenses necessary for the year. This expense shall be born equally by the colleges-of the League. TIIE MERCURY. IS THE GOVERNMENT COSTING US TOO MUCH. F. S. DEX3LER, '09. F wo except the most active period of the Civil War, the total drafts upon the Treasury of the U. S. during the past Congresshavebeengreater than at any period in our history. The total appropriations made by Congress dur-ing the Civil War were $1,309,000,000 of which $1,030,000,000 was spent upon the army. The appropriations for the fiscal year 1909 reached a total of $1,007,000,000. In these days, when private fortunes sometimes run up to a hundred million dollars we are liable not to realize how large a sum a billion dol-lars really is. It would take an expert counter, working eight hours a day, over one hundred years to count a billion silver ■dollars. A billion dollars in twenty dollar bills would make a pile 13,750 feet high. What is all this money used for? The expenditures may be classed under three general heads: Postal Service, $225,000,000. Military Service, $500,000,000. Other Government Service, $225,000,000. The largest appropriation for a single department was that for the post office. The postal service is one of the greatest utilities which the government gives to the people and one which the peo-ple can appreciate every day. The post offices scattered all over the land turn into the postal department a large revenue each year but it is not sufficient to run the service. The quarter of a billion dollars is disbursed through many channels. The sal-aries of postmasters, clerks, carriers and messengers total in the millions. The railroads come in for a large amount for carrying the mail. The rural delivery was established in recent years at a cost of about $25,000,000. A bill was proposed at the last Congress to establish a rural parcels post, but it was not passed. The most significant feature of the appropriations during the year is the great amount of attention that has been given to the building up of the military branch of the government. The ex-penditures for the army and navy, if we leave out of account the years when the country was engaged in war, have been the larg-est in the history of the country. The army was granted $95,- 10 THE MERCURY. 000,000; the navy, $123,000,000; the amount $163,000,000 for pensions should be included. The remainder of the half billion dollars is spent for fortifications, military and naval academies, soldiers' homes, arsenals, armories,'navy yards and numerous other things of a similar nature. The total expenditures for military purposes, direct or indirect, is truly a colossal sum when we bear in mind that our standing army today is not over 70,000. The sending of our fleet around the world is an event in history—an event which cannot fail to have a good influence. While we may be a peaceful nation, it will show that we have strength enough to protect ourselves in time of trouble. Some people think that our navy is too large. They say that our ships have nothing to do and then they get into trouble as in the cap-turing of the Philippine Islands. The remaining quarter of a billion dollars goes for a great number of things. The Agricultural Department, the Diplo-matic and Consular service, the Indian Bill, the different bu-reaus and public works are all included. We have seen where the money goes. Now, where does it come from? The revenues of the government amount to about $800,000,000 and this will leave a deficit of about $200,000,000. The treasury has a surplus of $250,000,000 to meet this. If this is not sufficient bonds can be sold. The Speaker of the House and the House itself keep restrain-ing hands on the extravagant tendencies of the varioifs commit-tees. The tendency of Congress to spend money is increasing at an appalling rate. The money appropriated by last Congress would have run the government during the decade ending 1896. These periods are both far enough removed from the Spanish War not to be materially affected by it. The world has advanced and moved forward since 1896, but not to such an extent as to warrant the rate of increase of running the government. There seems to be a leakage somewhere. Congress should remember that even a million dollars does not flow into the treasury of its own accord but it is pushed in and that as a result of the sweat of many brows. This does not mean that a narrow-minded policy should be adopted. The American people are willing to pay well to keep their country in the front ranks of the army of THE MEKCUEY. 11 progress. The last Congress has made a record in appropriating, public money and it is up to Congress to make a record in the-spending of it. OUR LITERARY SOCIETIES II—PHRENA. N the account of Philo which was published last month we find much that is very similar to the history of" Phrena The Phrenakosmian Literary Society was founded Feb. 4th, 1831, in Linwood Hall. At the second regular meet-ing a constitution and by-laws were presented and adopted. We are fortunate in having the original copy in an excellent state of preservation. Although frequently modified and amended, this historic document retains its original and noble spirit. The whole aim of its authors and zealous defenders is admirably ex-pressed by this, the motto of the Society: Kocr/m T/iv peva. There also exists the minutes of all the meetings that have been held since the Society was organized. These also have been well cared for and may be found among the treasures of the li-brary. As for Phrena's library, it can be said that it contains 5,845 volumes, which are the results of the energetic exertions of our members. Various catalogues of these books have been made for the use of our members, but most of them are not suitable for reference work. The Society is now indebted to George Heintz. '09 for a complete card index of the library. This not only en-hances the value of the present, collection of books but insures to us the proper recognition, care, and usefulness of any works we may add. Other property of value has accrued to the Society. In 1837r when Phrena was given a large and convenient room in the new college building (Old Dorm.), efforts were immediately made to secure suitable furniture. Here again the characteristic as-siduity of Phrena's members was triumphant. Improvements have been made from year to year, and the present beautiful ap-pearance of our hall furnishes sufficient evidence of the energy 12 THE MERCURY. as well as the taste of those by whom it was accomplished. The-present apartment in Eecitation Hall is elegantly furnished. Busts of Franklin, Webster, Cicero and Demosthenes have appro-priate places on the walls. The walls are also decorated with portraits of those Phrenakosmians who have done honor to their Alma Mater by becoming capable to hold professorships in our college. The Society has helped men individually, and has contributed much to the health of college spirit. A literary contest in which much spirit is shown, is held each year, with our sister society, Philo. Formerly it was the custom of the two societies to join at commencement time and be addressed by an honorary mem-ber of each society, alternately. In earlier years, of those be-longing to Phrena, and Eev. E. J. Breckenridge, D.D. officiated in 1842, Eev. T. H. Stockton, D.D. in 1844, and Eev. George B. Cheener, D.D. Much time and labor could be spent in arranging the inter-esting events of Phrena's history, but the space on these pages-does not permit the presentation in detail of very much con-tained in the Society's records. Suffice it to say, the work of those who have gone before should be gratifying to us as presag-ing that like privileges and honors are in store for their succes-sors. With the same noble aspirations and unalterable determi-nation let us be true to our literary societies as were those who have gained so much by supporting them. At present, Phrena is wide awake, doing excellent work and living true to the spirit of her fathers. THE MEECUEY. 13 WHY IS GETTYSBURG NOT WEALTHY ? N. G. PHILLIPY, '09. N" treating this question we will consider the people as a whole, taking as broad a view as possible under the cir-cumstances. According to Webster, wealth means large possessions, opulence, riches. Of course we could not compare Gettysburg with a large city and expect the same amount of wealth, but should more properly compare it with smaller towns of its own size. One of the foremost reasons why Gettysburg is not wealthy is the lack of industries conducted on a large scale. We find no shops or anything of a like nature whereby the owners or entre-preneur can amass a fortune. The ordinary workman cannot collect a fortune as nearly all his wages are used to support his: family. As a rule where there are no large enterprises located we find little wealth. It is true the location of the town geo-graphically may be accountable for the lack of industries, but this does not demand consideration under the present question. The lack of employment for men accounts for the slow in-crease in population. An increase in the value of land and property depends largely upon an increase in population and as the values of each remain nearly the same from year to year, speculation and investments in this line are unprofitable and unremunerative in Gettysburg. The country surrounding the town is not so very fertile and agriculture is not as productive as we find in many other locali-ties. Very few agricultural products are put on the market by the farmers near the town in any great quantity. We do not find minerals profitable for mining in the neighboring localities so very little shipping is carried on. 'Eailroads depend on freight for their profits and when there is little transportation railroad facilities are usually poor. Being located inland the people have not the opportunity to carry on markets or any other pursuit which water affords. The people themselves, have a great influence on any town. If we make a careful study of the people and their pursuits we have partly, at least, the solution of our problem. In our study 14 THE MERCURY. we must take into account their likes and dislikes, their desires,, their ambitions and their doings. The people as a whole are of a retiring nature. There seems: to be little greed for money and little ambition to amass a great, fortune. Each individual is actuated by a desire to live com-, fortably and save enough to keep himself and family during old age. Judging from appearances everybody is contented and happy, a condition which is proof of the statement that the de-sire for riches is lacking. We find the population as a body, industrious, being em-ployed at different occupations. An unusual number are en-gaged in educational work who labor more for knowledge and the pleasure afforded thereby, than for the money received for their work. It is natural in a college town to have cultured people. Peo-ple of culture and refinement have their surroundings fashioned after their ideas and influence the whole community. This class has certainly added much to the community. The battlefield also attracts many well-to-do people who come here to. live a retired life and to enjoy the beautiful surroundings. In Gettysburg, if a man is not engaged in educational work, he is in sympathy with it and usually formulates his opinions accord-ingly. In conclusion, the people are interested in their personal welfare, mentally as well as physically, and do not have the de-. sire for great wealth as their sole ambition. THE JIEUCURY. 15 THE JUNIOR "PROM" SOCIALLY CONSIDERED. CLL consideration of the social significance of the Junior Prom naturally involves a taking into account the general social life of the college community. For it is obvious that the character and tone of this annual function must, to a large extent, be determined by the social life as it is developed throughout the year. And since the Junior Prom is just in its infancy,—in its formative period,—this pa-per shall be both critical and suggestive. The social life of our college seems to be the characteristic so-cial life of colleges in general. It is very different from the so-cial life that existed in earlier years of the college. New condi-tions in the social structure at large, together with the increased number of students, have all contributed to the existent social status in the college community. The present exclusive tenden-cies in modern family life, unknown to our forefathers, cannot fail to produce like tendencies among a body of students; the social product developed in our college is, in short, but an out-growth of the existing trend of home life. Though the number of students in any one college is really small, when compared with the number enrolled in a modern university, yet it has grown so that no longer can the authorities of even the small college boast that theirs is the privilege of easily acting in loco parentis, and of forming with the student body a well regulated family. Instead of one united family, thoroughly democratic in its workings and with a reasonably common purpose and as-piration, the student body has been organized by the fraternity into many little families, each with its distinctive membership making of paramount importance the promotion of its own inter-ests and those of its individual members. The college authori-ties have, in other words, failed to meet new conditions by their failure to provide a sane and invigorating college family atmos-phere for the student to grow in, and it should not be surprising, therefore, that the students have themselves provided their own substitute, inferior though it may be. The fraternity is not lacking in provsions for the diversion of 16 THE MERCURY. its members. Numerous social events are held during the year, and occasionally an inter-fraternity function is arranged. Be-tween the members of this organized portion of the student body, who are thus frequently brought together, there naturally is formed a rather strong attachment. But how about the unorga-nized portion, which is comprised, for any one of several reasons, of the men whom the fraternity has not attracted? The social opportunities of most of these men are not only more limited, they are also more individualistic. That there should be a cer-tain divergence, therefore, between the fraternity and non-fra-ternity element is not to be wondered at. The Junior Prom is a step in the direction of preventing this divergence. Every element in the student body is to be repre-sented as far as possible on a common basis. The possibilities of general good fellowship are on this occasion to be fully pre-sented and fostered. Men who are seldom to be found in com-pany of their fellows in a purely social way are to find in the Junior Prom an opportunity of seeing what such commingling means for a man and for the community. Men to whom this is not a new experience are to find pleasure in assisting the unini-tiated over the stony places. The realization of all this could not, of course, be expected in the two times in which the Junior Prom has been held. Indeed it may require several more years to accomplish the desired re-sults. It seems very apparent, however, that tendencies point in the right direction. Last year's Prom marked an improvement over the first, in that dancing was not the exclusive feature of the occasion. Provision was made, though not of a sufficiently definite and attractive character, for those who do not dance. This is not passing judgment upon dancing as a means of di-version; it does mean to imply, however, that to allow dancing or any other form of diversion to become the exclusive feature of a social event indicates a distortion that cannot fail to prove exceedingly narrowing. It implies, too, that it is altogether un-fair to expect those who do not dance to attend an affair which provides definitely only for those who do dance, and which gives dancing such predominant or exclusive place that real com-mingling is impossible. Dancing has become such a mighty factor in the social life of young people everywhere that it is not THE MERCUttY. 17 surprising that it has gained a considerable foothold in our col-leges, but to permit it to have the ascendency at an event, such as the Junior Prom, which contemplates the presence of a large number who do not dance, shows great inconsiderateness and means the blasting of the real significance of the Prom. The far-reaching influence of the Junior Prom, properly regu-lated, can hardly be appreciated at this early stage in its evolu-tion, but to behold its possibilities along the lines indicated should be sufficient to impel us to assist in its proper develop-ment. A. ± A BIOGRAPHY OF SCHILLER. MISS- MARY BAUSCH, '11. JOHANJST Christoph Frederick Schiller was born at Mar-bach, in Wurtemburg, Germany, Nov. 10, 1759. He was the only son of Johann Casper Schiller, an officer in the Wurtemburg army, who held an inferior position in the Duke of Wurtemburg's household. The elder Schiller is was a man of great strength of character. To him Schiller is indebted for his firm and positive traits. His mother, Elizabeth Dorothea Kodweis, the daughter of an innkeeper at Marbach, was just the opposite of her husband in temperament, of strong yet gentle demeanor, full of simple charm and wisdom. We can see deep traces of this mother's sweetness and gentleness in the life of the gifted poet. Schiller did not find it easy to choose a profession. He first attended school at the village of Loech, where influenced by Par-son Moser, his teacher, he prepared himself for the clerical pro-fession. These plans were thwarted by the Duke of Wurtem-burg. He next entered the public school at Ludwigsburg. At the age of fourteen, he became a student at the military academy near Solitude Park, Ludwigsburg, the Duke wishing to have his services for the state. There he pursued the study of law, which was very repugnant to him. After two years had passed he 18 THE MERC PET. gave this up, and began the study of medicine, and was subse-quently appointed regimental surgeon. During this time, however, he was engaged in. the study of lit- 'erature. He was especially fond of the classics and became very proficient in Greek. His knowledge of Greek philosophy is ap-parent in his writings. His first work of note, "The Eobbers," he completed before he was twenty-two years old. Schiller pro-tested in this work against the restraints which he felt the Duke had unjustly forced upon him. Fearing the Duke whose wrath he had thus kindled, he fled to Mannheim. There he passed through many hardships, one reverse of fortune followed an-other. But still he continued to write. Schiller's first play in verse was "Don Carlos,'"' which was pre-sented at Hamburg in August, 1787. The Duke of Weimar, whose interest had been aroused in the young poet, made him one of the counsellors of his court. Upon his arrival at Weimar, Schiller was introduced to Goethe. This acquaintance subse-quently ripened into a close friendship. Early in December, 1788, Schiller's "History of the Eevolt of the Netherlands" was published. This work brought the best results, financially, which he had yet received. It not only had a rapid sale but it aroused the attention of the intellectual world. Through the influence of Goethe, he was offered a professorship in history at the University of Jena which after some hesitation he accepted. On Feb. 22, 1790, he was married to Charlotte von Lengefeld, a most admirable woman who aided him greatly in his life work. A very busy life opened to Schiller while at Jena. It was not unusual for him to spend fourteen hours daily in lecturing and writing. But the strain of such heavy work was too great for a man so delicately constituted as Schiller. A dangerous pulmonary dis-ease overtook him so that he was forced to give up his position as instructor in the university. Then through a generous gift he was enabled to revisit Wurtemburg, where he remained almost a year. In May 1794, he returned to Jena much improved in health although never again entirely well. The period between 1796 and 1800 was especially rich in lyrical productions, of which "Der Taucher," and "Das Leid von THE MERCURY. 1$ der Glocke " aTe prominent. The latter has been considered the best known of Schiller's poems. It deals with the most dra-matic events in the life of man. His great works, "Wallenstein" and "Maria Stuart" followed in close succession. Next came "Die Jungfrau von Orleans" in 1801, "Die Brant von Messina" in 1803, and "Wilhelm Tell," the last and perhaps greatest of his works, in 1801:. In this last great tragedy, Schil-ler portrays with wonderful power the Swiss resistance to tyr-anny. He causes the leader, Wilhelm Tell to stand elevated as a national hero. In all his writings, Schiller's love of liberty and hatred of despotism is manifest, but in none so much as in Wilhelm Tell. Schiller had now reached the zenith of his glory. His man-ners and appearance had improved. The timidity and conscious-ness of youth was replaced by the dignity and ease of more ma-ture years. He was overwhelmed with public honors and enthu-siastically received everywhere he went. But alas, when prosperity and fame seemed permanently se-cured to him, the dread disease which had undermined his health again overtook him. He endured this last trouble with great fortitude; though he had to pass through many trials yet his spirit seemed as it were to soar above them all. He continued to work until at last, his weakened powers being overcome, he passed away on May 9,, 1805, at the age of forty-five. The news, of his death brought universal grief to Germany. 20 TKE MEKCURY. CULTURE'S DISTRESSING FOE. G. E. WOLFE, '09. UST as men err in making happiness a distinct end, so do they err by putting culture in a similar position. And just as they deceive themselves by trying to pro-cure happiness as they would some commodity, so they deceive themselves by like attempts to gain culture. Life would indeed be a barren thing, if it were not enriched by our capacity for happiness and culture, but it is worse than barren where there is a false conception of these enrichments. That culture should be perverted to such an extent that men would make it a fad, seems almost inconceivable, yet that is what the intellectually curious and the socially idle made it some twenty years ago. What abhorrence must have been aroused in all who possessed true cultural instincts! For a fad is always a sham—a gross perversion—and a sham in the world of art ox-literature begets a peculiar offensiveness and hatred. The short-cut, superficial methods employed in pursuing this culture fad must have been entirely detestable to all serious-minded and sin-cere people. Could it be otherwise, with genuine culture possess-ing the rich qualities of ripeness and maturity in taste, intellect and culture ? How crude and defective the sham in the presence of the real! But this perversion, while more pronounced at certain periods, lias not been confined to one or two decades. Haste and arti-ficiality have always been employed by men, in their eagerness to possess the charming ripeness and greatness of soul which mark the truly cultured man. Recent years, however, have de-veloped a new condition, the recognition of which requires no unusual insight. There has developed a foe to culture which is distressing, not simply because it is aiming at culture by per-verse methods, but because it is entirely at variance with true cul-ture and lias so widely disseminated its influence that one may rightly inquire whether the true cultural instinct will not even-tually be quenched on account of it. "Smartness" is not a modern product by any means, but never has it captivated a people as it has the present generation; never THE MERCURY 21 has it held such predominant sway. Strictly speaking this spirit belongs to the world of mediocrity, but so important has it be-come that it claims recognition as the "real thing" from alL We have our so-called "smart sets," but the spirit of smartness in these days finds fruitful soil among all classes—as well among the wealthy as among the not-rich, as well among the intelligent as among the unlettered. And it is this, we believe, that today constitutes culture's distressing foe: it is this that makes impera-tive the loud calls, "Let Us Go Back"—in the direction of "The Simple Life." Not that there are no more who possess true culture, or who are eager to possess it. There are such indeed, but so effectually has the "sporty" microbe been doing its work in the rising gen-eration, that quiet people have well-nigh been driven to despera-tion, those with undeveloped cultural instincts have been tainted or entirely diverted and others never get a desire for cultural pursuit at all. One does not have to be a pessimist to be conscious of the fact that it is the fashion for everybody to be gay; that we are all called upon to persevere in a gala atmosphere. From the ex-treme solemnity of bearing that characterized our forefathers we have swung clear to the opposite extreme. It is impossible not to come in contact constantly with the cheap jargon that is everywhere afloat; with the lightness, cyni-cism and insinuation of immoral sentiment which marks the con-versation of popular young people. Fashionable clothes and jaunty manners never played as prominent a role as today. Plain, unassuming people, to whom this pertness and super-, ciliousness is extremely repulsive, are wondering when there will \ be a reaction toward the sane and rational. Surely the reaction-must come, and parents and educators have no more important duty before them than to seek to obliterate this spirit of sm^rt-. ness. THE MEECUEY. THE ECONOMIC ASPECTS OF THE LINCOLN ROAD. G. L. KIEFFEK, '09. JJST order to consider this subject properly, we must first inquire into the nature of the proposed "road." There-fore, briefly, "The Lincoln Eoad" is a proposed na-tional memorial to Abraham Lincoln. The "road" is to be a grand boulevard joining Washington, D. C, with Gettysburg, Pa. Its two hundred feet of width are to be occupied by green-sward plots, hedges, and trees, a speedway for automobiles, a driveway for carriages and wagons, two double-tracked electric railways, the one for express trains and the other for local trains. The very nature of the proposed "road" declares that it shall be equally open to both the rich and the poor. This being true it will be the means of bringing to Gettysburg, for at least a day, many of the hundreds of thousands of tourists that annually visit Washington. Hence with all this traffic, the very "road" itself might become an economic asset to the United States gov-ernment. To accommodate these people appropriate hotels would have to be maintained in Gettysburg. The present hotels and restau-rants would have to be renovated and enlarged. New ones also would have to be erected. A higher standard would be the order of the day for all Gettysburg hotels when official Washing-ton would be in the habit of paying them a visit at almost any hour. To meet this increase of business occasioned by the influx of people, Gettysburg herself would have to grow and increase the number of and enlarge all her business places in whatever line they might be. Naturally all property in Gettysburg would increase in value as would also all the property along the "road" from Washington to Gettysburg. To compete with the travelling facilities which would be af-forded by the proposed "road," the facilities of the present rail-roads would have to be bettered and new roads would be built— both electric and steam. All eyes would naturally be turned towards Gettysburg, which THE MERCURY. 23 with its historic surroundings, beautiful scenery, and medicinal springs, would naturally be expected to become the greatest sum-mer resort in the United States. The character and number of tourists would necessitate gov-ernment control of all guides. Thereby would undoubtedly be obliterated the blot of blots found upon the world. With gov-ernment control of all guides the tourists would be guaranteed just and equal treatment. For the guides themselves, better days would result. To Gettysburg's educational institutions would come greater publicity and a better appreciation of these institutions' rare sur-roundings. The result would naturally be manifested by an in-crease in the student bodies and an enlargement of the institu-tions themselves. All this resulting from the proposed "Lincoln Way?" Yes, more. With it connected to Gov. Stuart's proposed highway from Philadelphia to Pittsburg, "The Lincoln Way" naturally would become the backbone of a national highway system extend-ing all over the country. Then would all roads lead to Gettys-burg, which would be, in fact, the shrine of American patriotism, the Mecca for all Americans. THE "INDIAN STEPS." E. C. STOUFFER, '11. HE immense dam of McCalPs Ferry Power Company is nearing completion. As a result the slowly rising waters of the Susquehanna river are gradually cover-ing up one of the oldest and most noted landmarks of south-eastern Pennsylvania. The old "Indian Steps" are artificial shelves, cut no doubt, by means of stone hatchets into the face of a large round-pointed rock, which juts out from the west bank of the Susquehanna river. They were cut by the North American Indians possibly centuries before the discovery of America. These steps were used by the dusky inhabitants as a place on which to stand and dip the shad as they crossed the rapids on their annual journey 24 THE MERCURY. to the spawning grounds in the upper Susquehanna. Since the settlement of the country the white man has for generations used them for the same purpose. So far-famed were these steps that the Indians from the North, South, East and West came here to fish. Only the strong, vigorous and daring could fish from this rock for only such were able to endure the chill damp night winds which frequent the lower Susquehanna. As each contestant ap-peared a chalk mark or number was placed on his hat to desig-nate his turn. When his name was called he took his place, tied himself to a ring in the rock and cast the net. Each one was ■compelled to take his catch and be content. If there were a goodly number of shad, all was well; but if it proved to be a small catch he had to go away heavy hearted and take his place in the waiting line again. Year after year from these rocks hundreds of these daintiest ■of all fishes have been caught, some to grace the humble board of ■a poor riverman, some to please the fastidious taste of a city epicurean. The land around the "Indian Steps" was originally occupied by the Conestoga Indians and was preserved for them by the first proprietors of the state. Even Maryland, which was attempting to push her lines farther and farther north, respected the rights of the natives and made no attempt to appropriate this section. 'The land was held for the Indians until August 26, 1786, when a deed was granted to Joseph Eeed on condition that the "Indian Steps" should be preserved for a fishing place for the poor of the community. This charge has been faithfully kept until now. A few months more and the old landmark will have passed away and forever this curious specimen of Indian art will be lost to Pennsylvania. THE MERCURY. 25 THE INVESTIGATION OF THE FARMER; WHAT IT IS LIKELY TO BE WORTH. MISS HELEN H. BRENNEMAN, '08. EVEEAL months ago when President Roosevelt ap-pointed a committee to investigate the condition of the farmers throughout the country, it provoked quite a little amusement on the part of some people, while on the part of others it aroused sarcasm and anger. Many people regarded the President as a "busy-body" and failed to recognize the real aim in his interest in the farmers' condition. Never before has there been a man at the head of the nation with such broad and liberal views and one who has put forth such strenuous efforts in behalf of all kinds and classes of peo-ple. And it was such a motive that prompted him to take this action. The scope of this committee's work is not to ascertain the technical methods of farming and to inquire into personal matters, but to find out what are the general sanitary, social, educational and economic conditions of country life, to find out what is needed, what improvements can be effected, and in what way the government can help them. The commission was confronted with a task not only wide in its scope but comprising a large territory, and many people were to be dealt with. The President suggested that the farmers be called together in convenient meeting places for discussions, and that the members of the commission try to get in the closest touch possible with them and find out their needs. The commission has sent out circulars to professional men, business men, farmers and many others. These circulars con-tain a list of twelve questions with respect to the public schools in the vicinity and their efficiency; whether the farmers get rea-sonable returns from the sale of their products; whether they have good railroads, highway, telephone and rural postal service-accommodations ; whether there is a sufficient supply of labor in the neighborhood. These questions show what the commission are seeking to find out. It is their desire not only to ascertain the conditions but to get opinions and suggestions as to what needs to be done. Now the question arises, "What is the investigation likely to 26 THE MERCURY. be worth ?" In the first place it is very evident that almost the entire success depends upon the attitude of the people. If they continue to take it as a joke or with a feeling of animosity, cer-tainly the progress of the commisison's work is going to be checked and its ultimate success doubtful. However Dr. Bailey of Cornell University, the chairman of the commission, says that the public interest is increasing as the people come to under-stand the commission and its work. These words are encourag-ing and indicative of a very likely success. If this investigation is going to amount to anything, there must be co-operation of the people, especially of the farmers for whose benefit these efforts are being exerted. In a recent mes-sage to the commission the President said, "It is esssential that the farmers, the men who live on the soil should feel a sense of the ownership in this commisison, should feel that you gentle-men in very truth represent them and are responsive to their de-sires, no less than to their needs." If this committee receives the support of the people, it should effect some good results. There is a larger percentage of per-sons engaged in agricultural pursuits than in any other occupa-tion and it is only just that more attention should be given to their needs. The demands for better highways, better railway and trolley service are being universally agitated, and surely the commis-sion will concentrate, its efforts towards their accomplishment thus increasing the facilities of the farmer for better profits. At the Farmers' Convention held in Madison last October scientific crop raising and the need of teaching agriculture in the schools were among the principal topics approved by that orga-nization. It is just as essential that agriculture be taught in the rural schools as manual training and trades in the city schools. Here again if such a desire could be met by the gov-ernment it would not only benefit the farmers economically but the nation also. It remains to be seen just what this investigation will amount to, but nevertheless we can surmise that the educational advant-ages in some districts will be improved, that there will be bet-ter facilities for the transaction of business and that the social, educational and economic conditions will be bettered. T H E HERCURV Entered at the Postoffice at Gettysburg as second-class Matter. VOL. XVI GETTYSBURG, PA., DECEMBER, 1908 No. 7 Editor-in-Chief Assistant Editor P. F. BLOOMHARDT, '09 CHARLES F. V. HESSE, '09 Exchange Editor Associate Editors H. REY WOLF, '09 SAMUEL FAUSOLD, '10 Business Manager EDWARD N. FRYE, '10 CHABLES L. KOPP, '09 Advisory Board Ass't Bus. Managers PROF. C. F. SANDERS, A. M. G. U. KNIPPLE, '10 PROF. P. M. BIKLE, PH.D. PAUL S. MILLER, '10 PROF. C. J. GRIMM, PH. D. Published each month, from October to June inclusive, by the joint literary societies of Pennsylvania (Gettysburg) College. Subscription price, one dollar a year in advance ; single copies 15 cents. Notice to discontinue sending THE MERCURY to any address must be accompanied by all arrearages. Students, Professors and Alumni are cordially invited to contri-bute. All subscriptions and business matter should be addressed to the Business Manager. Articles for publication should be addressed to the Editor. Address THE MERCURY, GETTYSBURG, PA. such is often the case. EDITORIALS. THE question has often been asked how a small college, with a limited number of students and a corresponding limitation of tal-ent can successfully conduct nearly as many student enter-prises as the larger univeristies— and conduct them, too, in such a way that they frequently rival similar organizations in their larger sister institutions. But Our own college may be taken as suffici- "28 THE MERCURY. ent proof. Our five varieties of athletic teams, our three publi-cations, two literary societies, debating and oratorical teams, musical clubs, and dramatic society, etc., have often been re-spected rivals to similar teams of other and larger schools. But the mere fact of the numbers of these enterprises does not neces-sarily have to affect the quality of the results accomplished. We are inclined to think that men with just as great ability and as large capacity for work are to be found in the smaller college as in the larger ones,—not as many, to be sure, but the ratio is about the same. Furthermore, the smaller college offers oppor-tunities to every one of such calibre, while in the larger schools, •only a comparatively few can take part. LAST year Gettysburg was disappointed in not being enter-tained by her dramatic society, the Mask and Wig. Presumably this was due to the lack of time for rehearsals. Nevertheless the loss was felt. This year it has been decided that no musical club trip will be taken. It has been suggested that the time, talent, and energ}', usually devoted to this organization be turned into another channel; that is, into the perfecting of a good play or minstrel show which might be allowed to take a trip, similar to the Triangle Club of Princeton. IN a few days the first term of the present collegiate year will be closed. After an arduous week's work in examinations, the Christmas vacation will be the more appreciated and enjoyed. Its rest and pleasure has been anticipated by all, but especially has it been longed for by the Freshmen. Christmas has been written about so often, and from so many different viewpoints, that little that is new is left to say. To the college student it is a joyous season to be looked forward to, but in its actual enjoy-ment, he no longer thinks of college and its surroundings for it is a vacation season at home. So, with its last issue for 1908, the MERCURY wishes all its readers a Merry Christmas and a Happy New Year. THE MERCURY-. 29 BOOK REVIEWS. INDER the Crust, by Thomas Nelson Page, Phrena. This volume is composed of original stories. Each story has a philosophical side. They were evidently written to stimulate thought and the author has succeeded admirably. One of the stories, "A Brother of Diagones" is especially commenda-ble. In this story, great wealth is pointed out as a stumbling block rather than an aid to happiness. The simple life, too, is contrasted to the hustle and bustle of the metropolis. Other stories of the volume effectively contrast altruism and egoism. The Biography of Thomas Jefferson, by John T. Morse, Phrena. This biography is very impartially written. The au-thor gives us the facts indulging in neither unmerited praise nor criticism. He seems to have an insight into the man's very nature and thus vividly portrays the actions of the statesman both at home and in the blaze of public life. The biography not only enumerates the achievements of Mr. Jefferson with their causes and effects but also those of contemporary statesmen. The biographer shows Mr. Jefferson as a visionary, shrewd politician and a far-sighted statesman. The book is very readable and valuable. Tides of Bamegat, by P. Hopkinson Smith, [Philo 11:6.] This is a book which one can scarcely afford not to read. It presents a very impressive picture of life. It is an account of how one member of a noble and respectable family brought shame and disgrace to the family name There is seen the secret sufferings of the sister through false modesty. Her life would have been made happy indeed, if she had only opened her heart to her lover. It shows how one sister may give advantages and culture to another and instead of receiving gratitude, have her head bowed in shame while the other, seemingly soulless, is not af-fected. There is also brought out the yearning and love of a father for his son whom he has driven from home in a fit of anger for the evil he has done when he refuses to do right. The story is somewhat overdrawn, but otherwise one can find no fault. It is nevertheless very instructive. Although somewhat tedious at times it is generally interesting. The language is clear and wholesome. The Brass Bowl, by Louis Joseph Vance, [Philo, 11:8.] The so THE MEECURY. title of the book is somewhat fanciful as the bowl has practically the least connection with the story. Anyone wishing to read a book for entertainment and recreation will find this romance suited to his purpose as it is very interesting, simple and full of action. The thread of the story seldom breaks and the climax is near the end. The reader will be pleased with the happy ter-mination. No characters are used except those which are neces-sary to the plot. The principal parts are played by persons of high social rank, and they seem to be somewhat magnified. There is no place in the book that is tedious. The narration is clear, animated and well balanced. The language is simple and vigorous. The author has handled 'the plot very well. He shows broadmindedness, independence, the possession of a vivid imagination and a pleasant sense of humor. He has an ac-quaintance with high social life. The reader will be very much pleased with "Mad Maitland's" spirit as he makes his wild flights and also with Miss Sylvia Graeme who comes into Mait-land's life in a very peculiar way. EXCHANGES. JE are glad to have with us again most of our old ex-changes. There are a few that have not arrived yet. We trust that all will soon respond. It seems necessary again to call attention to the con-tent of the MERCURY. The MERCURY, we are trying to make a literary journal, and not a paper combining literary, athletic and the other departments of college activities. The "Gettysbur-gian," our weekly publication, contains the news of the various departments of college life. Among the good things in the "College Student" we would call attention to "Lowell's 'Biglow Papers'" and "Eelation of Diction to Character." The former is a critical essay which brings to notice many interesting facts concerning this import-ant contribution to American literature. The latter shows how the ideals and characteristics of the individual are reflected in hie writings. THE MERCURY. 31 We are glad to welcome "The Thielensian" to our exchanges. In the article entitled "Greek and Eoman Influences" the writer reminds us of some of the beauties of Athens and Borne. The beginning of philosophy was in Greece. Then from the Eomans we can learn the lesson of patriotism. Their motto was, "Dulce et decorum est pro patria mori." The Eomans understood mili-tary matters, and we can also learn much from their sculpture and architecture. "Luther in the Eeformation" is also worthy of perusal. The character sketches of Taft and Bryan in the "Otterbein Aegis" are brief but very interesting. We all admire the teachings and doctrines of Socrates, the great Greek philosopher. He busied himself by trying to teach men the truth, and even though he greatly emphasized truth, he was especially eager that men should become happy and useful citizens. To be a good citizen he regarded the "summum bonum" of the individual's life. Indeed in our present age of political corruption, we can not over-emphasize high ideals of citizenship. "Making an American Citizen" in the'Thiloma-thean Monthly" presents this subject in a forceful manner. The writer gives some qualifications of the ideal American citizen. First, he must exercise the right of franchise. It is not only his right, but his duty, to vote. Secondly, he must vote intelligently and not allow himself to be bribed by a paltry farthing. Again, he must be a doer, and not depend upon party leaders. And lastly he must have strong moral convictions. As to the prob-lem of attaining this ideal, the author says, "If I were to offer a solution of this vital problem, it would be: the continual, untir-ing moral and civic training in home and school." All scholars have more or less knowledge of epic poetry. They all know something of Homer's Iliad and Odyssey, Virgil's Aeneid and Milton's Paradise Lost, but often the epics of less renown are neglected. "The Sketch Book" contains an article entitled "Sita," which tells us of India's epics. The Eamayana and the Mahabharata are India's chief epics. "Sita" is the im-portant character in the Eamayana. She is to the Eamayana what Helen of Troy is to Homer's Ilaid. The article gives a brief summary of the epic and closes with a few ethical com-ments on the character of "Sita." 32 THE MEKCUKT. We wish to comment on two articles in the "Albright Bulle-tin." "The Character of Satan in 'Paradise Lost,'" and "Work; Man's Opportunity." The writer regards Satan as the princi-pal character of the epic, and speaks of him from that stand-point. In the latter essay, we have a very practical exposition on work and its blessings to the individual. Lovers of German literature will find pleasure in reading "Two Representatives of German Epic and Lyric Poetry" in the "Lesbian Herald." Of our High School exchanges, the "Eed and Black" (Read-ing High School) deserves special mention. The departments are well represented and as a whole the paper makes a pleasing appearance. We gratefully acknowledge the usual exchanges. "PXYK iKT2« r>rv. M3VSUT13ER5. There's no pen that gives such all-round satisfaction i Conklin's Self-Filling Fountain Pen. It's the best pen for College Men. When an ordinary fountain pen runs dry in the middle of a word, it means you've got to stop right there, hunt up a rubber squirt gun, fill your pen to overflowing, clean both pen and dropper, wash your hands, and then endeavor as best you can to collect your lost Crescent f'f train of thought. It's different with Filler Jr-l 9 FILLING "THE PEN WITH THE CRESCENT-FILLER" To fill, iust dip it in any ink, press the Crescent-Filler, and the Conklin is filled and ready to write instantly. You can't over-fill it. Hence no inky fingers, no loss of time, no ruffled temper. The feed of the Conklin is No waiting for ink to come—no jerking—no slips, blots. ng dealers handle the Conklin. IE yours does not, order direct. Look tor the Crescent-Filler and refuse substitutes. Prices, $3.00 and up. Send at once (or handsome new catalog. T3E OOHZLIH PEH CO., 31 Itiahattsn Bnildiag, Toledo, Ohio. PATRONIZE OUR ADVERTISERS. FUfOTTUfjE Mattresses, Bed Springs, Iron Beds, Picture Frames; Repair Work done promptly. Under-taking a specialty. - Telephone No. 97. 3=3L ZB_ 23eri-d.ex, 37 Baltimore Si., *-tttt/xhurg;, FA EDGAR C. TAWNEY BAKER West Middle Street. J. B. WINEMAN, DEALER IN CHOICE FAMILY GROCERIES, PROVISIONS AND FRUITS, BOARDING CLUBS A SPECIALTY. SUNDAY SCHOOL LESSON HELPS AND SUPPLIES, P. ANSTADT & SONS, Publishers, Book and Job Printing of all Kinds ttrtte for Prices. YORK, PA. ■> PATRONIZE OUR ADVERTISERS. EMIL ZOTHE ^MEMS ENGRAVER, DESIGNER, AND MANUFACTURING JEWELER 722 Chestnut St., Phila. SPECIALTIES : MASONIC MARKS, SOCIETY BADGES, COLLEGE BUTTONS, PINS, SCARP PINS, STICK PINS AND ATHLETIC PRIZES. All Goods ordered through G. F. Kieffer, CHARLES S. MUMPER, MtKALER MJV TTTTTS "KFTTTTT? 15! PICTURE FRAMES OF ALL SORTS * W *■*" * * *» *fc*Hf REpA|R WORK DONE PROMPTLY I WILL ALSO BUY OR EXCHANGE ANY SECOND-HAND FURNITURE NO. 4 CHAMBERSBURG STREET, GETTYSBURG, PA D. J. SWARTZ DEALER IN COUNTRY PRODUCE, GROCERIES, CIGARS AND TOBACCO. GETTYSBURG. SHOES KEPA1UHI> —BY— 115 Baltimore St., near Court House. GOOD WORK GUARANTEED. -IS-Your Photographer ? If not, why not? 41 BALTIMORE ST., GETTYSBURG, PA. 8EFT0N I FLEMMING'S LIVERY, Baltimore Street, First Square, Gettysburg, -Pa. Competent Guides for all parts of the Battlefield. Arm »» Filbert St. A convenient and homelike place to stay while in the city shopping. An excellent restaurant where good service combines with low prices. ROOMS §1.00 PER DAY AND UP. The only moderate priced hotel of reputation and eonsequenee in > 3Pla.ila.cLe2pla.ISL • » J 1 i SQ *. • • » ,atindry . . OF YORK . . Offers tfte COLLEGE STUDENTS first-dass work; at Special Low Prices. E. C. STOUFEER, Local Agt. C. D. SMITH, Prop. MEANS TASTY WOEK SAEEFULLY DONE. MfcNU CARDS. LETTER HEADS, WINDOW POSTERS ENVELOPES, DANCE CARDS TICKETS, Programs of all kinds. Everything the College Man wants in Paper and Ink. Specially designed work. Latest Effects in Paper, clone in Colors along lines of College Men's Associations. Catalog and Book work. The Gettysburg Compiler will keep old and new students in touch with town and college life. HELP THOSE WHO HELP US. The Intercollegiate Bureau of Academic Costume. Cotrell & Leonard, ALBANY, N. Y. ™2li2^! CAPS AND GOWNS To Utttyi-buri? College Lafayette. Lehigh. Dickinson. State College, Univ of Penn sylviinin, Hnrviird, Yale. Princeton. Wellesley, Bryn Mnwrnnd the others. Class Contracts a Specialty. Correct Hoods i. Degrees. Mr. College Man We are already lining up our clients for nextSpring. With our National Organization of 12 offices we will need over 2000 college men for technical, office, sales aud teaching positions throughout the United States. We can also use at any time college men who are in the market for a position. Let us explain to you NOW. Write for the "College Man's Opportunity." It tells how Hapgoods, a great organization built up by college men has placed many thousand youngmen, has raised the standard of college meu as a business factor throughout the world. State age, education, location desired. THE JV\iTIOJVJIZ, OBGjrjVTZJlTjrOJV OF BIlJlIJV BHOHKBS. Commonwealth Trust Building, Philadelphia, Pa. HOTEL GETTYSBURG, Headquarters for BANQUETS. Electric Lights, Steam Heat, All Conveniences. Free Bus to and from station. Convenient for Commencement Visitors. RATES $2.00 PER DAY. -livery CLi'ta.c'ked. Jot]i] P. JV^tH Proprietor. BECKER & CO., DEALERS IN All kinds of Fresh and Smoked Meats Chambersburg St., Gettysburg, Pa. WE RECOMMEND THESE FIRMS. Established 1867 by Allen Walton. ALLEN K. WALTON, Pres. and Treas. ROBT. J. WALTON, Supt. flummelstown Brown Stone Company, QUARRYMEN and Manufacturers of BUILDING STONE, SAWED FLAGGING and TILE. Wa/l/fcoTwille, ]£)a.-u,pT-vlr\, ^o. Pa. CONTRACTORS FOR ALL KINDS OF CUT STONE WORK. Telegrapn and Express Address, Brownstone, Pa. Parties visit-ing quarries will leave cars at Brownstone Station on the P. & R-R. R. For Artistic Photographs Go To T{PTON The Leader in PHOTO FASHIONS Frames and Passapartouts Made to Order. PATRONISE OUR ADY$RTI$$RS Come and Have a Good Shave or Hair Cut -AT-Harry B. Sefton's BARBER SHOP. 35 Baltimore St. Barber's Supplies a Specialty. Also choice line of Cigars. SHOES REPAIRED —BY— Charles Hartdagen, Middle St., Opp. Court House, GUARANTEE ALL WORK. GETTYSBURG DEPARTMENT STORE, Successors to the L. M. Alleman Hardware Co., Manufacturer's Agent and Jobber of HARDWARE, OILS, PAINTS AND QUEENSWARE, GETTYSBURG, PA. Tb.p only Jobbing House in Adams County. PATRONIZE OUR ADVERTISERS. s * * » ** *»« * ft * «« « «»* ** « « * »* « * * « **«* ***« aa »« « ***** a »*« »* * *** Seligrqciq Are Gettysburg's Most Reliable TAILORS «* And show their appreciation of your patronage by giving- you full value for your money, and closest attention to the wants of every customer. ■ T' ■,f T &.WirX'z?&/&teM$&^.'^*fc?ttvte*&^ Students' Headquarters —FOR— HATS, SHOES, AVD GENT'S FURNISHING. Sole Agent for WALK-OVER SHOE EGBERT'S STORE. Prices Always Right T|e Lutheran PubliGOlioii Society No 1424 Arch Street, PHILADELPHIA, PA. Acknowledged Headquarters for anything and everything in the way of Books for Churches, Colleges, Families and Schools, and literature for Sunday Schools. PLEASE REMEMBER That by sending your orders to us you help build up and develop one of the church in-stitutions with pecuniary ad-vantage to yourself. Address HENRY 8. BONER, Supt

Ladies and GentlemenGood morningAt the outset of my speech, I'd like to personally welcome all the respected attendees, from our home country Iran and abroad, respected invitees from ISESCO and the Ministry of Science, Research and Technology, researchers and scientists from Iranian universities, editor-in-chiefs of ISC-indexed journals from Iran and the regional countries, my colleagues from ISC and RICEST and all those who participated in one way or another to make this unique event come true. I firmly believe that bringing inspired people together in a forum like this would ensure that ISC always remains at the cutting edge.Before I commence I tend to name those humble people for whose association and help we here at ISC are so proud as well as grateful. To me, such public thank you is a veiled declaration of intimacy with those who have been in a position to lend assistance to ISC since its establishment in 2008.First, my sincerest thanks go to H, E, Dr.Othman Altwijiri, Director General of ISESCO for the key role His Excellency played in the establishment of the Islamic World Science Citation Center (ISC).Second, I am much indebted to Dr.Faiq Bilal, Director of Science Directorate of ISESCO, for his contribution to the holding of this conference.Third, my appreciations Vahid Ahmadi, the MSRT's Vice-Minister for Research and Technology, for full support of ISC and its programs. Also, I am appreciative of the helps we received from Dr, Salar Amoli for producing Visa for our respected guests from the OIC countries.Finally, I thank my colleagues at the ISC and RICEST, the editor-in-chiefs of ISC-indexed journals, researchers and colleagues from Iranian universities and all the attendees without whose presence this whole program could be nothing but a fail.The idea of founding a citation center to assess research performance of OIC countries' research output was first conceived in the third Islamic Conference of Ministers of Higher Education and Scientific Research, held in Kuwait City, State of Kuwait, between November 19-21, 2006. There, the delegate from the Islamic Republic of Iran took the initiative and put forward the idea of founding such a center to assess OIC countries research performance. This idea was welcomed by all members of ISESCO and was hence included in the agenda.The proposal was worked on successfully and put on the table during the fourth Islamic Conference of Ministers of Higher Education and Scientific Research, held in Baku, Capital of the Republic of Azerbaijan, in October, 2008. During that meeting, the proposal was discussed and verified with absolute majority and the I. R. of Iran was bestowed with the responsibility to establish such a citation center. And that is in brief how ISC was established in Shiraz, south of Iran.ISC seeks to assess research performance of OIC countries. Great strides have been made by the directing body of ISC to provide the infrastructure required for the successful fulfillment of this objective.I am obliged here to avow here that ISC's achievements during its short life have been phenomenal, in need, owing to the constant help and support received from Iran's Ministry of Science, Research and Technology as well as Iran's High Council for Cultural Revolution. These two supporting bodies guaranteed ISC's accomplishments by adopting scientific, administrative and financial policies required.Assessment of research performance is a complicated phenomenon involving an array of variables and indicators. In general, citation systems – like ISI, Scopus and ISC - undertake various types of assessments and rankings through a number of indicators including researchers, scientific journals, subject fields, universities, research institutions and countries. Currently, ISC ranks third, after ISI (from Thomson Reuters with a history of more than half a century) and Scopus (in the Netherlands, with a history of about two decades) in the whole world. Both ISI and Scopus are well known citation systems embodying a number of interesting products and services of which the scientific community can avail it. Despite these advantages, they fail to cover local languages and concentrate only on English resources. In contrast, ISC, despite its short history, has endeavored to cover languages other than English as well. The long term objective has of course been to cover all national languages in OIC has been produced such that it can be expanded, on demand to cover OIC languages. No doubt, this is time-taking process due to the linguistic difficulties embedded in such practices. This difficulty is well justifiable when we observe that even global ranking systems like ISI and SCOPUS have avoided local languages despite the long time and better resources they have had for development.I would like to announce here that ISC currently processes journals in three languages, i.e. Persian, Arabic and English and seeks to cover French shortly since it is used in a number of OIC countries. This is a non-stop process and having covered French we will seek to include other languages from the OIC region.Having OIC region as its scope has not acted of course as a restriction for the realm of our activities. Interestingly, we have been receiving requests from non-OIC countries (including America, England, Finland, Poland, Russia, India, …) as well to have their journals indexed in ISC. So, the regional ISC has now upgraded into a global ranking system ranking universities, journals, etc. from all over the world.To date, 1117 Arabic journals, 1056 English ones and 403 journals from other languages are indexed in ISC. The number of Iranian journals indexed in ISC is also remarkable – 1046 journals affiliated to the Ministry of Science, Research and Technology, 331 journals from the Ministry of Health, Treatment and Medical Training, and 250 journals affiliated to the Islamic Azad University.This simply means that ISC currently indexes more than 4000 journal titles from Iran, OIC and of course non-OIC countries. Of course, this sum is a fraction of the whole journals available in the international scientific community, and hence not that bulky in its present status, nevertheless it provides good ground for implementation of various types of scientometrics analyses and will provide more information as we move on.It is axiomatic that development of citation systems is time taking process. By this I am not focusing on issues like budget, building, etc. since such requirements have always been provided to ISC by the Iranian government with ease and on demand. Rather, I would like to focus on the time required to develop the software needed and of course the need for man power who have a good grip on scientometrics analysis.Regarding ISC's software, it has been developed by our own staff here. We consistently improve and enrich it by adding new features and new products. Regarding the staff, the M.S. program for Scientometrics was commenced at RICeST last year. Currently 12 students are studying in this program and this trend will be continued to train the man power required to fill-in-the-gap between ISC and ISI (and Scopus) in the shortest time possible.An important scheme here at ISC is to open up its branches in ISESCO member states to accelerate the enlargement of ISC database. This will, of course, require training of expertise in Scientometrics for which I am honored to introduce our M.S. program for Scientometrics. This program, in the long run, intends to train staff from the OIC countries to represent ISC branches in their relevant countries. I invite here the respected participants from the OIC countries to assist by introducing to us, through their universities, interested students who wish to attend the program.An important point I wish to share here on the present conference is that not many journals from OIC countries are indexed in ISI and Scopus. From among those which are indexed, journals with an IF from only a minority. Since the establishment of ISC, citation analysis has come under focus not only in Iran but also in OIC countries. Journal seek to publish original research with the objective to promote the status of science in the society, to increase scientific and research collaboration among research and scientific institutions in Iran and the OIC countries and expand knowledge frontiers. Attaining this objective depends greatly upon the scientific and research infrastructure of each member state.As specified in its charter, ISC has been bestowed with the responsibility to hold workshops and seminars to improve the status of ICS-indexed journals and, of course, facilitate journal submission by interested bodies to ISC. The present conference is indeed the second of this type- the first one was held two years back- which is being held for editor-in chiefs of scientific journals from Iran and the OIC region.The respected editor-in-chiefs here are invited to make the best use of the potential available in universities, research institution and societies to enhance the status of their journals. To enhance the quality of journals, a number of steps need to be taken:The editor-in-chiefs as well as the editorial boards of scientific journals should be picked up from among outstanding scientific figures. These people are those whose effort cans most contribute to the enhancement of scientific journals.Another point of great moment in enhancing the status of academic journals goes back to the nature of the peer-review process. Qualified and experienced referees can guarantee the quality of articles – and their originality as well.Yet another important issue pertains to the referencing mechanism used in journals. Studies undertaken on the referencing issue reveal that journals quite often do not follow in-text and out-text citation standards. Inconsistencies are observed among journals, even between different issues of a given journal and even at times between different articles of a single journal issue. To ease indexing in ISC, journals need to abide by citation standards. Mismatch in out-text citation may not cause any problem in information databases but they can be a big problem in citation systems like ISC. Hence, it is highly recommended that ISC-indexed journals move towards adapting sort of citation standards. One further point contributing to the quality of journals goes back to the issue of author affiliations. In general, author affiliation is drawn on in a number of research areas including ranking of universities and research institutions, production of science maps, assessing research quality, ranking authors, departments, etc.During the past few years, the increase in the volume of journals has been astronomical. We witness that journal editors are showing ever increasing tendency towards e-publishing. The reasons for such tendency are two-fold: First, journals try to keep abreast of the recent trend in publishing namely the open access movement. Second, journals are faced with budgeting problems and such constraints have forced them to adopt e-publishing as a substitute policy. E-publishing is today deemed as a routine in many countries of the world especially emerging scientific countries.Today, electronic copies of a large number of scientific journals are freely accessible. E-publishing is easier, faster and requires less budgeting. An inherent advantage of e-publishing is that it provides the grounds needed for crawlers to retrieve journals and to use the data for indexing purposes. For e-publishing to perform maximally, there is of course a need for an online journal submission system by the use of which journals can receive articles, send them for peer-review and also form their own online archives for later reference and use.Plagiarism is also deemed as an important issue in the scientific community today as it has been for so long. This phenomenon can harm the quality and status of journals. Indexing systems are apt to exclude journals from their systems due to plagiarism traces observed in them. Thus, it is a must for editor-in-chiefs of journals to be familiar with plagiarism, plagiarism detecting software and the strategies needed to avoid or at least minimize this problem in scientific production process thereby guarantee the copyright issue.Before closing my speech, I would like to make some proposals:1- To establish a publishing agency, with international scope, to publish scientific and research journals from the OIC countries. This will facilitate their indexing in ISC substantially and will be a great help to journals financially.2- To establish ISC local branches in different OIC countries.3- To encourage consistent interaction between ISC and journals with the aim of enhancing the quality and status of ISC-indexed journals.4- To schedule regular visits to ISC (for ISC-indexed editor-in-chiefs) and to OIC countries (for ISC directing body or staff to mark the problems and to make proposals for their removal).5- To hold ISC's conferences in OIC countries. ISC will help financially to hold such conferences.6- To use ISC for citation analyses, science mapping and scientific and research performance assessments in the OIC countries.7- To hold workshops at national and international levels to publicize research and scientific potential of the OIC countries, especially their universities and research institutions. Thank You

Contemporary Ukrainian state and society pass through complicated and contradictory period of transformation of socio-economic, political, spiritual and moral relations. The youth, as subject and object of policy, social and cultural relations, mirrors the features of Ukrainian political system's evolution and cultural evolution in its vital activity. The youth is an important part of Ukrainian society, the medium of its intellectual potential, a main factor of socio-economic progress. Process of state building largely depends on capability of youth to be an active creative power.Nevertheless, it should be noted, that significant part of youth has no reliable political and socio-cultural reference points, civic consciousness isn't formed, spiritual and moral ideals are lost, increasingly the youth regards with negative to socially useful activities and becomes most separated from society and state than previous generations.Meantime effective socialization of youth is a necessary condition for a constant development of Ukrainian political system, largely depictures the future of the country. Perspective of society's further development primarily depend on the features of formation of the political culture of youth, its political values, socio-political orientation, political choice, attitude to power.In this regard, necessity of studying processes, what spread across youth subculture, political analysis of youth subcultural differentiation, production technologies and mechanisms for prevention deviant behaviour and crises among young people, appears.The socio-economic and spiritual development of Ukraine is impossible without concentration on resolving the problems of the youth as future of our country, a guarantor of social and economic progress, because an immutable truth is that further development mostly depend on providing young generations with decent conditions for life. In despite of declared realization of this truth, a majority of countries in the world starts new millennium with a significant burden of unsolved problems of youth, most of them, for a example, imparity of youth, unemployment, marginalization of young people, propagation of illegal social practices and asocial manifestations among young people, youth health problems and some marital and family problems etc., now shows tendency to intensification.Under conditions of deep economic and demographic crisis, crisis of culture and ideology, of post-Soviet countries, including Ukraine, youth problems in different areas of life become more specific, they entail hard and prolonged consequences, therefore, they need be analyzed deeply and regulated, realistic and balanced youth policy must be developed.The term "youth" is treated diversely in many branches of science - philosophy, sociology, political science, pedagogy, psychology etc. Its generalized version is suggested in encyclopedias and determines the youth as a separate socio-demographic group that differs in a complex of age characteristics, features of social status, that are determined by social system, culture, regularity of socialization, education in terms of a particular society.The youth, within the meaning of current age ranges of youth in Ukraine (according to national legislation an age range of youth is 15 - 34 years), makes up the significant part of the population of Ukraine. Now the youth contingent in Ukraine is demographically heterogeneous, because the youth unites in itself groups of rather a broad age range – from teenagers (15-17 years), post teenagers (18-19 years old) to much more experienced in age and socially persons and adults, that are over 30 years old (30-34 years).It should be considered that the youth is socially heterogeneous. Yong workers, villagers, students, political leaders, representatives of the business community, migrants, young specialists, marginal people with different degree of success adapt to market economy, frequently orient themselves on contradictory political and spiritual values.The position of youth political culture, as well as society generally, is largely fragmented. The separate groups of the youth differ from each other in the interest to policy, level of inclusion in the political life, orientations on different ideological and political currents of modern Ukraine. All this differences haven't characterized as acute antagonism and haven't led to excessive politicization yet.The young people significantly differ from older generations, because they almost got rid of illusions that somebody can solve their own problems. They are individualistic and pragmatic, relate to the modern authority rather neutrally and don't connect any positive changes with it.The young generation perceives the policy and the authority as entity that cause neither admiration, nor especially acute negative emotions. First of all, it proves in removal of a large number of the youth from political life. In some measure apathy of youth, first of all, appears because the reforms that take place in Ukraine impact on the youth most painfully, and because of absence of understanding policy towards youth as an independent socio-demographic group, also because the youth, on the one hand, doesn't see necessity to change something cardinally in environment, but, on the other hand, doesn't consider political activity as something important, it finds most perspective methods and forms of self-fulfillment. As a result – total alienation of the youth from the authority, that can be transformed into active rejection at any time.Today state only declares principles of political culture of participation and public culture. During period of formation of the youth generation it is necessary to examine the situation, to explore the depth and sharpness of social problems, to establish monitoring of youth life.Modern problems such as crisis of relationship of generations, impairment of vital parameters, formation of specific youth subculture and counterculture etc., demonstrate that all structures of socialization together – family, environment and even education, become not enough to solve the problems of society when new generations come on and it is not enough to solve the problems of youth, that takes on its historical subjectivity.Liberal views of youth are often formed under the influence of education, cultural environment, family socialization, but are not the result of a «rational» choice. State youth policy, as an innovative Institute, has it own particularities and the main one of them is that it is specialized and was built on innovative forms of activity. These forms are associated with deep process of knowledge and management. They need political will and great resources to be realized. The payment for that are guaranteed results of activity, without what society can't exist and develop no longer.As a result of new situation, what appeared because political activity in labor and educational groups had been prohibited, the policy moved on from industrial and academic areas to the sphere of free time of youth and led new youth organizations on the competition with traditional structures of free time. The youth structures could gain neither recognition, nor authority on broad stratums of the rising generation.The perspective of further development of society connects, first of all, with features of the formation of political culture of youth, its political values, a socio-political orientation, political choice and attitude towards the authority.The formation of consciousness of the category of population is strategically important for the state, because working politically active forces will be replaced exactly by today's youth. Now it is hard to manipulate the young people, they are very sensitive and note everything that takes place in society. May be, some part of them go to policy in order to make money, but for the most of them is important to realize their own opinions.The current political situation in Ukraine makes the youth think about a lot of questions: how can I, young man, decide something and affect the situation in the country (the region); how much does my vote weigh in elections etc. One of the most important factors that can push these people into active public deeds is confidence of an opportunity that something can be changed by their choice and decision.The modern politicians come to understanding that the slogans are ineffective and the youth can't be conquered with appeals on TV. The new generation is more independent than previous one and, the most important of this, that it has a choice. The votes of youth will not be cast without any reason – someone must work with it. The experience of last decades proves that only when countries pay much attention on work with youth they will success in policy and economy. A sustainable progress is demonstrated by societies that have looked over the system of traditional opinions about new generation and it importance for political and socio-economical development (for example, Germany, Sweden).In Ukraine a program of state and public actions in this sphere and mechanisms of solving these problems is determined by modern national policy. The especial attention should be paid to solving problems of youth self-realization and formation of young citizens.There is 367 003 persons (30,67 percent of all population of the region) of young people from 14 to 35 years old in Mykolaiv, including citizens - 251 712 persons and villagers - 115 291 persons. The youth needs permanent protection and help of state. However to give support to the youth doesn't mean to solve all its problems. First of all, it means to give the youth an opportunity to solve problems by itself.The Regional Program "The Youth of Mykolaiv Region" on 2011-2015 years becomes a strategic document. The conception determines directions of relationship's development between the state and the youth at the regional level. The most optimal way and method of solution are:to develop the scientifically argumentative strategy of implementation of public policy towards the youth of region;to popularize efficiency, availability and creation of extensive network of youth social infrastructure, a directing on activity that will satisfy needs and create the necessary conditions for effective socialization of young people;to promote youth occupation by introduction the system of career-guidance, creation the conditions for secondary employment, provision with fist job, stimulation to make business, outspread of youth information field concerning existing professions and demand for them; to promote youth employment and youth entrepreneurship by expansion of employment, professional training of youth, giving an opportunity to realize youth projects;to involve the youth in realization of social programs and projects of state youth policy that are directed on solving problems according to Program;to create a complex system of social protection for representatives in special categories of youth community, to render social assistance and support for the youth that is in crisis;to create conditions for providing social assistance and modeling healthy lifestyle among all groups of youth in Mykolaiv;to encourage the creative self-realization and total evolution of youth, to support the youth initiatives and activities at different spheres of life, to implement incentives in order to improve the cultural level of youth;to implement the mechanism how to inform youth community by mass media and Internet-resource;to implement measures to create conditions for youth loans;to promote the youth integration towards world and European community, the exchange of experience and joint activities of the youth at the regional and the national levels;to promote spiritual and physical development of young people in Mykolaiv region, a high patriotic consciousness, a national pride, a formation and development of motivation that is directed to preparation for doing public and constitutional duty in order to protect the national interests of Ukraine.Now it is possible to use young people in realization of youth police by enlisting them in youth and children public organizations. These organizations are one of the most important social institutes that promote a formation of civil society. The public organizations have exclusive opportunities for political socialization of youth, because they are not only a key-note subject of youth policy that affects its formation and realization, but also are good staff reserve for the public authorities and local government. The social movement is the force that can't be ignored and should not be ignored.So, it is important to create legal and other conditions for cooperation of the authority, youth public organizations and active representatives of this part of population. The principal revolution in youth attitude to policy will take place only when it feels itself a real member of process of transformation and development in Ukrainian society. ; Статья посвящена исследованию особенностей формирования политической куль-туры молодежи, ее политических ценностей, социально-политических ориентиров в период трансформации украинского общества, анализируется роль государства в формировании и реализации современной молодежной политики. ; Статтю присвячено дослідженню особливостей формування політичної культури молоді, її політичних цінностей, соціально-політичних орієнтирів у період трансформації українського суспільства, проаналізовано роль держави у формуванні та реалізації сучасної молодіжної політики.

La palabra "pampa" en el sudeste de América del Sur se refiere a las amplias llanuras, a veces levemente onduladas, cubiertas de pastizales. Las pampas junto con otros pastizales de similares características abarcan parte de las provincias políticas de Buenos Aires, Córdoba, Corrientes, Entre Ríos, La Pampa, Misiones, San Luis, Santa Fe en la República Argentina, el estado de Rio Grande do Sul y áreas pequeñas de los estados de Santa Catarina y Paraná en la República Federativa de Brasil, los departamentos de Misiones, Itapuá, Paraguarí y Caazapá en la República del Paraguay y toda la República Oriental del Uruguay. El enorme territorio abarcado por estos pastizales, con más de 760000 km2, lo convierte en uno de los mayores y más variados del mundo, con gradientes climáticos, edáficos y topográficos amplísimos y distintas unidades de vegetación. Diversas comunidades edáficas, como bosques, selvas marginales, vegetación casmófita y comunidades psamófilas, se intercalan en esta matriz de pastizales conformando "islas" y corredores biogeográficos. Los pastizales de las pampas y campos constituyen ambientes muy frágiles. Las invasiones biológicas en las planicies y el desplazamiento de la fauna y flora más delicada ya se advertían desde el siglo XIX. Los pastizales pampeanos constituyen la zona de producción agrícola-ganadera más antigua de Argentina y han sufrido gran pérdida de paisajes, hábitat y biodiversidad naturales por los cambios de uso de la tierra. Lo que antes era una matriz de pastizal natural con parches de cultivo, se transformó en una matriz de cultivo de la cual paulatinamente han desaparecido los parches de pastizal natural. Esto pone en riesgo la sobrevivencia de flora y fauna nativa por la destrucción, fragmentación o pérdida de calidad del hábitat original, la introducción de competencia de animales domésticos, la caza y la contaminación con agroquímicos. A pesar de estas problemáticas solo está protegida una proporción ínfima de los pastizales pampeanos. Los pastizales pampeanos han sido delimitados biogeográficamente como Provincia Pampeana (PP) por autores como Cabrera y Willink en 1973, Soriano et al. en 1992 y Morrone en 2014, con divergencia de opiniones en cuanto a los límites de la PP y de sus unidades internas denominadas distritos. Por ejemplo, algunos consideran que el límite oeste de la PP está dado por el inicio de los bosques de la Provincia del Espinal mientras que otros consideran que el Espinal forma parte de la PP. También algunas comunidades edáficas como los bosques y humedales del sistema fluvial del Plata, las dunas costeras marinas, o las sierras de Ventania, han sido objeto de discusión por su difícil ubicación biogeográfica en los distritos de la PP dado que su biota es muy diferente a la de los pastizales. Algunos autores incluso sugirieron la posibilidad de que pertenezcan a otras provincias biogeográficas. Para superar todas estas limitaciones se propone en esta tesis una nueva delimitación de la PP y de sus distritos, y la identificación de áreas de la PP que sean prioritarias para su conservación. Para la delimitación de la PP y sus unidades se propuso un nuevo abordaje que implica tratar los taxones por separado: (1) analizar la distribución de los taxones animales y vegetales netamente pampeanos, es decir, de pastizales y bosques xerófilos (Espinal), estén presentes o no también en las comunidades edáficas; (2) analizar la distribución de los taxones animales y vegetales que habitan exclusivamente las comunidades edáficas. Posteriormente, se integran los resultados en un esquema de regionalización. Para la conservación de áreas prioritarias se utilizó el mapa de Áreas Valiosas de Pastizal (AVP´s) en el que se ubican las áreas de pastizal en buen estado de conservación de la región. Los objetivos de esta tesis son: 1) Definir y delimitar la provincia Pampeana (PP) como un área de endemismo (ADE) mediante la superposición de la distribución geográfica de sus taxones endémicos. 2) Establecer distritos biogeográficos como ADE menores anidadas dentro de la PP sobre la base de métodos biogeográficos basados en la división del área de estudio en polígonos (Análisis de parsimonia de endemismos, Análisis de agrupamientos, NMDS). 3) Establecer el grado de pertenencia de ciertas comunidades edáficas de la PP (e.g., bosques y humedales de la Baja Cuenca del Plata, dunas costeras marinas, sierras de Ventania) y otras áreas problemáticas (caldenal y brazo de pastizales Puntano-Pampeanos) sobre la base del método de superposición de sus taxones endémicos y el análisis de la proporción de corotipos. 4) Integrar toda la información obtenida en los ítems anteriores (e.g., nueva regionalización, endemismos, conexión entre las poblaciones, fragilidad ecológica, grado de fragmentación de ciertos ambientes) para identificar si existen ADE que quedan fuera del sistema actual de áreas protegidas en la PP. Las hipótesis que sustentan esta tesis son: 1. La superposición de la distribución geográfica de diversos taxones permite establecer un ADE que se corresponde con la unidad biogeográfica denominada Provincia Pampeana (PP). Los límites de esta ADE no necesariamente coinciden en toda su extensión con los esquemas biogeográficos vigentes. 2. Los métodos biogeográficos basados en polígonos permiten establecer ADE menores que se corresponden con unidades biogeográficas dentro de la PP (distritos, subdistritos, sectores). Los límites de estas ADE no necesariamente coinciden en toda su extensión con los esquemas biogeográficos vigentes. 3. El método biogeográfico de superposición permite establecer que algunas comunidades edáficas actualmente incluidas en la PP están más relacionadas con otras provincias biogeográficas y, por lo tanto, deberían ser excluidas de la PP. 4. Toda la información obtenida en este estudio es relevante para fijar los objetivos de conservación de futuras áreas protegidas y para establecer áreas que son prioritarias para conservar. Algunas de estas áreas no están contenidas dentro del sistema actual de áreas protegidas. La primera etapa del trabajo consistió en un análisis exhaustivo de las principales regionalizaciones previas de la PP para delimitar el área inicial de estudio, la cual se subdividió en 217 hexágonos de 50 km de lado. Utilizando criterios muy rigurosos, se seleccionaron los taxones a utilizar en la tesis: plantas vasculares, insectos, arácnidos y vertebrados. Se recopiló la información distribucional de los taxones seleccionados a partir material bibliográfico, bases de datos, ejemplares de colecciones y numerosos viajes de campo incluyendo lugares poco explorados. En cada uno de esos datos se aseguró la confiabilidad de la identificación taxonómica. En total se compilaron 2449 registros de 208 taxones que sirvieron para construir la matriz básica de datos de hexágonos por especie. La matriz se analizó con métodos biogeográficos modernos que emplean polígonos: a) métodos jerárquicos como Análisis de Simplicidad de Endemismos y Análisis de Agrupamientos; y b) métodos no jerárquicos de ordenación como Escalado Multidimensional no Métrico (NMDS, nonmetric multidimensional scaling). En los dos casos se usó el programa de computación R v. 4.0.2. A estas técnicas se sumó el método de superposición que consiste en el solapamiento de las distribuciones geográficas de especies sobre un mapa para reconocer las áreas de coincidencia entre dos o más de ellas. En la segunda etapa, se evaluó qué áreas de la PP tienen escasa protección de su biodiversidad. Para ello se mapearon las unidades preexistentes de conservación de la biodiversidad de los sistemas nacionales o provinciales de áreas protegidas en la PP, se las comparó con el mapa de distritos y subdistritos que resultó de los pasos anteriores y se evaluó en qué zonas haría falta establecer más unidades de conservación. Para evaluar cuáles son las áreas prioritarias para la conservación de la biodiversidad en la PP, se utilizó el mapa de Áreas Valiosas de Pastizal (AVP´s) en el que se ubican las áreas de pastizal en buen estado de conservación de la región. Se señalaron: A. Aquellas AVP´s ubicadas en hexágonos de mayor riqueza de endemismos (hexágonos con registros de más de diez especies de las que fueron utilizadas en la matriz básica de datos. B. Las AVP´s ubicadas en hexágonos en donde se registran microendemismos. Se consideró que una especie es microendémica en los casos en que la distribución geográfica es de menor extensión areal que el hexágono en el que se ubica. Las AVP´s que cumplen con los dos criterios, A y B, se consideran de mayor prioridad que las que suman solo uno de ellos o ninguno. Los resultados arrojaron una nueva delimitación de la PP, con tres distritos biogeográficos y 11 subdistritos: Provincia Pampeana Distrito Pampas Argentinas Subdistrito Pampeano Occidental Subdistrito Pampa Deprimida e Interserrana Subdistrito Pampa Pedemontana Subdistrito Pampa Ondulada y Entrerriana Subdistrito Pampa Cordobesa Distrito Uruguayo-Mesopotámico Subdistrito Campos Gaúchos Subdistrito Cuchilla de Haedo Subdistrito Campos Australes Subdistrito Campos Misionero-Correntinos Subdistrito de los Ñandubayzales Subdistrito del Espinal Perideltaico Distrito Dunas Atlánticas Este nuevo esquema fue comparado con las regionalizaciones anteriores, con la historia geológica y climática y con la ecología de la región, hallando similitudes y diferencias con los autores previos. Desde el punto de vista de la conservación de la biodiversidad, se detectaron AVP's con un alto número de taxones endémicos: los pastizales de Chasicó a Villa Iris, la Laguna Salada Grande de Madariaga (Buenos Aires), Cerrilladas – llanura periserrana del Sistema de Tandilia (Buenos Aires), el Refugio de Vida Silvestre Morro Santana (Rio Grande do Sul), los Campos de la frontera oeste (Rio Grande do Sul) y los Pastizales intersticiales del litoral del Río Uruguay (Uruguay). Estas áreas poseen pastizales bien conservados, alta riqueza de endemismos pampeanos y especies microendémicas. Al comparar las áreas resultantes con el actual mapa de áreas protegidas de la PP, se halló que estas últimas son insuficientes y no representan adecuadamente la biodiversidad de esta provincia. Existe actualmente un mayor énfasis en la protección de humedales mientras que la biota de la PP, en su mayoría, no es una biota de zonas húmedas, sino que está adaptada a la estacionalidad hídrica y térmica, y en algunos casos a los incendios periódicos. ; The word "pampas" in southeastern South America refers to the wide, sometimes slightly undulated plains covered with grasslands. The pampas along with other grasslands of similar characteristics cover part of the political provinces of Buenos Aires, Córdoba, Corrientes, Entre Ríos, La Pampa, Misiones, San Luis, Santa Fe in Argentina, the state of Rio Grande do Sul and areas of the states of Santa Catarina and Paraná in Brazil, the departments of Misiones, Itapuá, Paraguarí and Caazapá in Paraguay and the entire Uruguay. The enormous territory covered by these grasslands, with more than 760,000 km2, makes it one of the largest and most varied in the world, with very wide climatic, edaphic, and topographic gradients and different vegetation units. Diverse edaphic communities, such as forests, marginal forests, casmophyte vegetation and psamofilic communities, are interspersed in this matrix of grasslands, forming "islands" and biogeographic corridors. The grasslands of the pampas and fields constitute very fragile environments. Biological invasions and the displacement of the most delicate fauna and flora had already been noticed since the 19th century. Pampa grasslands constitute the oldest agricultural-livestock production area in Argentina and have suffered great loss of landscapes, habitat, and natural biodiversity due to changes in land use. What was previously a natural grassland matrix with crop patches, has been transformed into a crop matrix from which the natural grassland patches have gradually disappeared. This puts the survival of native flora and fauna at risk due to the destruction, fragmentation, or loss of quality of the original habitat, the introduction of competition from domestic animals, hunting and contamination with agrochemicals. Despite these problems, only a tiny proportion of the Pampas grasslands are protected. The Pampean grasslands have been biogeographically delimited as Pampean Province Pampeana (PP) by authors such as Cabrera and Willink in 1973, Soriano et al. in 1992 and Morrone in 2014, with differing opinions regarding the limits of the PP and its internal units called districts. For example, some consider that the western limit of the PP is given by the beginning of the forests of the Espinal Province, while others consider that the Espinal is part of the PP. Also, some edaphic communities such as the forests and wetlands of the Río de La Plata system, the coastal marine dunes, or the Ventania mountain ranges, have been the subject of discussion due to their difficult biogeographic placement in the districts of the PP since their biota is very different from that of the grasslands. Some authors even suggested the possibility that they belong to other biogeographic provinces. In order to overcome all these limitations, a new delimitation of the PP and its districts is proposed in this thesis, together with the identification of areas of the PP that are a priority for their conservation. For the delimitation of the PP and its units, a new approach was proposed that involves treating the taxa separately: (1) to analyze the distribution of Pampean animal and plant taxa, that is, of grasslands and xerophilous forests (Espinal), whether they are present or not also in the edaphic communities; (2) to analyze the distribution of animal and plant taxa that exclusively inhabit edaphic communities. Subsequently, the results are integrated into a regionalization scheme. For the conservation of priority areas, the map of Valuable Grassland Areas (AVP's) was used, in which the grassland areas in a good condition of conservation in the region are located. The objectives of this thesis are: 1) To define and delimit the Pampean Province (PP) as an area of endemism (ADE) by overlapping the geographical distribution of its endemic taxa. 2) To establish biogeographic districts as minor ADE's nested within the PP on the basis of biogeographic methods based on the division of the study area into polygons (Parsimony analysis of endemicity, Cluster analysis, NMDS). 3) To establish the degree of belonging of certain edaphic communities of the PP (e.g., forests and wetlands of the Lower Plata Basin, coastal marine dunes, Sierra de Ventania) and other problem areas (caldenal and Puntano-Pampean grasslands) on the basis of the method of superposition of their endemic taxa and the analysis of the proportion of chorotypes. 4) To integrate all the information obtained in the previous items (e.g., new regionalization, endemisms, connection between populations, ecological fragility, degree of fragmentation of certain environments) to identify if there are ADE's that fall outside the current system of protected areas in the PP. The hypotheses that support this thesis are: 1. The overlapping of the geographical distribution of multiple taxa allows establishing an ADE that corresponds to the biogeographic unit called Pampean Province (PP). The limits of this ADE do not necessarily coincide completely with current biogeographic schemes. 2. Polygon-based biogeographic methods allow establishing smaller ADEs that correspond to biogeographic units within the PP (districts, sub-districts, sectors). The limits of these ADE's do not necessarily coincide completely with the current biogeographic schemes. 3. The biogeographic method of overlapping allows establishing that some edaphic communities currently included in the PP are more related to other biogeographic provinces and, therefore, should be excluded from the PP. 4. All the information obtained in this study is relevant for setting the conservation objectives of future protected areas and for establishing priority areas to conserve. Some of these areas are not contained within the current system of protected areas. The first step of this work consisted of an exhaustive analysis of the main previous regionalizations of the PP to delimit the initial study area, which was subdivided into 217 hexagons of 50 km on each side. Using very rigorous criteria, the taxa to be used in the thesis were selected: vascular plants, insects, arachnids, and vertebrates. The distributional information of the selected taxa was compiled from the literature, databases, collection specimens and numerous field trips including poorly explored places. In each of these data, the reliability of the taxonomic identification was ensured. In total, 2449 records of 208 taxa were compiled that were used to build the basic matrix of hexagons by species. The matrix was analyzed with modern biogeographic methods that use polygons: a) hierarchical methods such as Parsimony Analysis of Endemicity and Cluster Analysis; and b) non-hierarchical ordering methods such as Non-Metric Multidimensional Scaling (NMDS). In both cases, the R v. 4.0.2. computer program was used. It was also employed the overlapping method that consists of superimposing the geographic distributions of species on a map to recognize the coincident areas of two or more of them. In the second step, the areas of the PP that have little protection of their biodiversity was evaluated. The pre-existing units of biodiversity conservation of the national or provincial systems of protected areas in the PP were mapped, they were compared with the map of districts and sub-districts that resulted from the previous steps, and it was evaluated in which areas it would be necessary to establish more conservation units. To evaluate which are the priority areas for the conservation of biodiversity in the PP, the map of Valuable Pasture Areas (AVP's) was used, in which the grassland areas in good conservation status of the region are located. There were highlighted: A. Those AVP's located in hexagons with the highest endemic richness (hexagons with records of more than ten species). B. AVP's located in hexagons with microendemisms. A species was considered as microendemic when its geographic distribution area is minor than the hexagon in which it is located. The AVP's that meet the two criteria, A and B, are of higher priority. The results yielded a new delimitation of the PP, with three biogeographic districts and 11 sub-districts: Pampean Province Distrito Pampas Argentinas Subdistrito Pampeano Occidental Subdistrito Pampa Deprimida e Interserrana Subdistrito Pampa Pedemontana Subdistrito Pampa Ondulada y Entrerriana Subdistrito Pampa Cordobesa Distrito Uruguayo-Mesopotámico Subdistrito Campos Gaúchos Subdistrito Cuchilla de Haedo Subdistrito Campos Australes Subdistrito Campos Misionero-Correntinos Subdistrito de los Ñandubayzales Subdistrito del Espinal Perideltaico Distrito Dunas Atlánticas This new scheme was compared with previous regionalizations, with the geological and climatic history and with the ecology of the region, finding similarities and differences with previous authors. From the biodiversity conservation point of view, the AVP's with a high number of endemic taxa were detected: the grasslands from Chasicó to Villa Iris, the Laguna Salada Grande de Madariaga (Buenos Aires), Cerrilladas - periserrana plain of the Tandilia System (Buenos Aires), the Morro Santana Wildlife Refuge (Rio Grande do Sul), the fields of the western border (Rio Grande do Sul) and the interstitial grasslands of the Uruguay River coast (Uruguay). These areas have well-preserved grasslands, high richness of pampean endemisms and microendemic species. When comparing the resulting areas with the current map of protected areas of the PP, it was found that the latter are insufficient and do not adequately represent the biodiversity of this province. There is currently a greater emphasis on the protection of wetlands while the PP biota, for the most part, is not a hygrophylous biota but is adapted to hidric and thermal seasonality, and in some cases to periodic fires. ; Facultad de Ciencias Naturales y Museo

Desde que a comienzos del siglo XXI se fijó en Lisboa el plan estratégico de la Unión Europea (Lisboa, 2000), tendente a conseguir que esta zona sea la más competitiva en la conocida Sociedad del Conocimiento (SC) (Bell, 1973; Drucker, 1969, 1994; Faure et al., 1972; Stehr, 1994; UNESCO, 2005), uno de los términos que más interés está despertando es el de Gobierno Electrónico (e-Gobierno). Este concepto se encuentra en constante estado de evolución y se ha convertido en una expresión que abarca multitud de actividades e intentos de innovación y modernización en el campo de la gestión pública (Wimmer, 2002). Layne and Lee, (2001) afirman que un objetivo importante del e-Gobierno es la prestación de servicios e información más rápidos y más baratos para los ciudadanos, socios comerciales, empleados, otros organismos y agencias gubernamentales. Estos autores también propusieron una evolución del gobierno electrónico de cuatro etapas: (1) la catalogación; (2) la transacción; (3) la integración vertical y (4) la integración horizontal. Los representantes elegidos por el pueblo deben aprovechar el uso de las TIC para acercarse a la sociedad, fomentar la participación democrática, contribuir a una buena administración y mejorar la efectividad, la eficacia y la eficiencia de las Administraciones Públicas. En abril de 2010, Moreno-Jiménez propuso la aproximación EF3 (EF3-approach) a la hora de abordar el comportamiento de los sistemas, la cual contempla las siguientes ideas: a) la efectividad, asociada a la planificación estratégica o comportamiento a largo plazo y a la detección de los criterios relevantes para la resolución de un problema (hacer lo correcto); b) la eficacia asociada a la planificación táctica o comportamiento a medio plazo y a la consecución de las metas marcadas para los objetivos fijados y c) la eficiencia asociada a la planificación operativa o comportamiento a corto plazo y a la consecución de las metas con la mejor asignación de recursos posibles (hacerlo correctamente). En síntesis, lo que se postula es lograr un nuevo tipo de gestión de lo público empleando convenientemente el uso de las TIC y que, además de garantizar la eficacia (satisfacer las necesidades de los ciudadanos), y la eficiencia (optimizar los recursos) del sistema, los modelos de intervención democrática se centren en su efectividad. Aprovechando el continuo desarrollo de la tecnología, también es necesaria una profunda reflexión sobre la orientación que debe tener la democracia en el futuro y las posibilidades que ofrece la red. En los últimos años, la consideración del ser humano en un contexto holístico y sistémico y la utilización de la búsqueda del conocimiento como criterio esencial que guíe el comportamiento de los individuos y de los sistemas, han llevado a la búsqueda de alternativas democráticas que recojan estas ideas (Moreno-Jiménez, 2006). Para construir ese futuro es preciso la mejora de las democracias actuales o habilitar nuevos modelos democráticos que, aprovechando el potencial de la Sociedad del Conocimiento, puedan dar respuesta a los nuevos retos y necesidades que en ella se plantean. En este sentido, la e-Cognocracia (Moreno-Jiménez 2003, 2004, 2006; Moreno-Jiménez y Polasek, 2003, 2004, 2005), es un nuevo modelo de democracia que combinando la democracia representativa y la directa permite: i) la co-creación en las diferentes etapas de la metodología científica utilizada en la resolución de los problemas planteados en el ámbito de las decisiones públicas referidas al gobierno de la sociedad, ii) la co-decisión entre ciudadanos y representantes a la hora de seleccionar la mejor opción, y iii) la cognición a través de la formación continuada de la ciudadanía mediante la democratización del conocimiento derivado de la resolución científica del problema . Este nuevo sistema democrático utiliza la decisión multicriterio como soporte metodológico, la red como soporte de comunicaciones y el sistema democrático como elemento catalizador del aprendizaje. Además, pretende potenciar la participación y el control de los ciudadanos en las decisiones públicas, así como mejorar la transparencia de los procedimientos seguidos. Las decisiones siguen siendo tomadas por la mayoría de la ciudadanía, pero a diferencia de lo que ocurre en la democracia representativa, la e-Cognocracia, además de no excluir ninguna idea del proceso de resolución, potencia la creatividad e innovación de los ciudadanos (Moreno-Jiménez, 2003). Durante la última década, la inclusión de los ciudadanos en la toma de decisiones políticas a través de la participación electrónica (e-Participación) ha recibido mucha atención. Macintosh (2004) definió este concepto como el uso de las TIC para ampliar y profundizar la participación política de los ciudadanos, para que puedan conectarse entre sí y con sus representantes electos. Con el uso de las TIC en la participación ciudadana se ha empezado a ver un cambio en la misma. Es un cambio de cultura y de hábitos cotidianos, un cambio en la manera de relacionarse y de observar el mundo que les rodea. En el marco de esta tesis, la e-Participación puede aplicarse, en general, a los dos ámbitos contemplados en la Administración Pública (Moreno-Jiménez, 2009): (i) provisión de servicios (e-Administración) y (ii) participación política en los procesos democráticos (e-Gobernanza). No obstante, tradicionalmente, la e-Participación se ha venido asociando exclusivamente al último ámbito de los dos considerados: la participación política o e-Gobernanza en su sentido más amplio (participación en la toma de decisiones públicas relativas al gobierno de la sociedad). Con esta interpretación de la e-Participación, la e-Cognocracia puede considerarse como un nuevo modelo de participación, y por lo tanto incluida en la misma, pues uno de sus objetivos es una toma de decisiones pública colaborativa. Cada vez se habilitan más espacios donde los ciudadanos pueden participar en la definición, gestión y desarrollo de la agenda institucional. Este hecho ha provocado que la participación ciudadana se esté convirtiendo en uno de los grandes desafíos a los que se enfrentan los gobiernos del XXI. Es por ello, por lo que las Administraciones deben, necesariamente, incrementar el nivel de información disponible, y al hacerlo ponen a disposición de la ciudadanía más herramientas para el segui¬miento, el control y la evaluación de las políticas públicas. La participación ha de tener una traslación en términos prácticos, de manera que los ciudadanos puedan constatar su incidencia y sus resultados. De esta manera, es conveniente desarrollar procedimientos de evaluación conjunta y participada, para poder medir el alcance y el impacto de una experiencia de e-Participación. La evaluación no sólo permite visualizar los resultados de una iniciativa y el grado de cumplimiento de los objetivos propuestos sino que expresa una voluntad de rigor, transparencia, análisis y mejora continuada que refuerza la consis¬tencia y credibilidad de las experiencias participativas. Con la evaluación se pretende realizar un análisis lo más riguroso posible acerca de las distintas etapas y resultados alcanzados por las experiencias de e-Participación, de tal forma que se pueda determinar, entre otros aspectos, la efectividad, la eficacia, la eficiencia (EF3-approach) así como el impacto económico, social y ambiental de las acciones. Aunque la importancia de la evaluación de una iniciativa de e-Participación es reconocida por el gobierno y el mundo académico, las evaluaciones rigurosas de e-participación son difíciles de encontrar (Macintosh and White, 2008). La evaluación ex-post de un experiencia de e-Participación nos permite analizar el impacto que ha tenido ésta, así como el análisis de la utilización práctica de los instrumentos de participación. Además, nos sirve para conocer qué modificaciones podrían ser necesarias a efectos de poder mejorar, desde el punto de vista de la efectividad, eficacia y eficiencia, las actividades futuras. Además, estas iniciativas participativas, llevan asociado un coste económico, que en la mayoría de los casos está financiado con fondos públicos, por lo que sería conveniente la valoración de las mismas, con el fin de ser, ante todo, transparente y consecuente con los objetivos estratégicos perseguidos, ya que éstos, deberían ser verificables y demostrables económica y socialmente. De esta manera, se presenta la necesidad de cuantificar, monetariamente, tanto los aspectos económicos, sociales y ambientales, como el valor añadido generado de la aplicación práctica de este tipo de iniciativas de e-Participación (Pérez Espés et al., 2012). Para poder dar una respuesta apropiada a los nuevos retos y necesidades que en el ámbito de las decisiones públicas relativas al gobierno de la sociedad, plantea la Sociedad del Conocimiento, se propone el desarrollo de esta tesis Doctoral: Efectividad de la e-Cognocracia. Una aproximación económica-social. El principal objetivo de esta tesis es establecer un marco general que permita la evaluación, en términos de efectividad, eficacia y eficiencia, de una experiencia de e-Participación basada en la e-Cognocracia. Así mismo, se extenderá para la evaluación de cualquier experencia de e-Participación. Además de valorar, en términos monetarios, los aspectos económicos, sociales y ambientales, de la implementación y el desarrollo de una experiencia de e-Participación basada en la e-Cognocracia. Esta valoración permitirá, disponer de información ecónomica y social relativa al verdadero valor añadido que aportan estas iniciativas a la sociedad en general. A continuación, en los dos apartados siguientes, se detallan la metodología aplicada para abordar los objetivos propuestos y la estructura seguida en el desarrollo de esta tesis. Metodología: Para la elaboración de esta tesis se va a emplear una metodología mixta, a través de los desarrollos teóricos basados en los resultados obtenidos de nuestro caso de estudio: la experiencia real llevada a cabo en Cadrete (Zaragoza, España). A continuación, se presenta el caso de estudio y las técnicas aplicadas. Caso de estudio: Para la consecución y el logro de los objetivos propuestos, se utiliza como caso de estudio: la experiencia de e-Participación (basada en la e-Cognocracia) para el diseño de políticas públicas llevadas a cabo en Cadrete. Esta iniciativa fue realizada a lo largo del 2010 dentro del proyecto investigador multidisciplinar ¿Gobierno Electrónico, e-Participación y Democratización del Conocimiento¿ que, bajo la dirección del profesor Moreno-Jiménez fue ejecutado por un grupo de 41 personas, entre las que se encuentra la autora de esta tesis. Este municipio forma parte, junto al Gobierno de Aragón y el Ayuntamiento de Zaragoza, del conjunto de instituciones que habitualmente colaboran en la línea investigadora del Grupo Decisión Multicriterio Zaragoza. La justificación de la elección de esta experiencia de e-Participación como caso de estudio, se centra, fundamentalmente, en que es la única experiencia completa de aplicación de la e-Cognocracia (tema principal de la tesis) y que fue elaborada por el GDMZ por lo que disponemos de los datos de la misma. Técnicas aplicadas: i) Modelos de Ecuaciones Estructurales (MES): Se crea un marco téorico basado en la EF3-approach para la evaluación de la e-Cognocracia. Este marco llamado teórico EF3-marco (theoretical EF3-framework) es evaluado a través de una encuesta implementada en la experiencia real llevada a cabo en Cadrete usando MES. Debido al número limitado de respuestas, no fue posible validar el marco teórico propuesto (Moreno-Jiménez, Pérez Espés and Rivera, 2013) para la evaluación conjunta de todos los aspectos definidos en el theoretical EF3-framework. Sin embargo, esto nos ha permitido aprovechar las ideas extraídas para extender el marco para evaluar cualquier experiencia de e-Participación no sólo la e-Cognocracia. ii) Grupo de expertos: La extension del theoretical EF3-Framework ha sido evaluada por un grupo de expertos internacionales a través de un cuestionario. EF³-framework es el nombre del marco validado por los expertos. iii) Técnicas de Decisión Multicriterio El EF³-framework se aplica a nuestro caso de estudio (la experiencia de Caderete). Para valorar esta iniciativa se utiliza la técnica de decisión multicriterio denominada Proceso Analítico Jerárquico (AHP). iv) Aproximación económico-social (SROI- Social Return on Investment ) Se realiza una aproximación social-económica a través de la metodología del SROI, la cual nos permite cuantificar, monetariamente, los aspectos económicos, sociales y ambientales, de la implementación y desarrollo de una iniciativa de e-Participación basada en la e-Cognocracia. Así como, disponer de información económica y social relativa al valor añadido que aportan estas experiencias. Estructura y conclusiones Esta tesis doctoral está dividida en dos partes. La primera se compone de dos capítulos donde se analiza el marco teórico para el estudio del gobierno de la sociedad y los modelos de democracia. El primer capítulo analiza el impacto que han tenido las TIC en el gobierno de la sociedad y en la gestión pública, así como el desarrollo que está teniendo la aparición del concepto del e-Gobierno en la Administración Pública y el alcance en la sociedad. Mientras que el segundo capítulo se centra en los diferentes modelos de democracia existentes hasta la fecha, haciendo más hincapié y explicando de manera detallada el nuevo modelo de democracia propuesto por José Mª Moreno en el año 2003 bajo el nombre de e-Cognocracia. La segunda parte está formada por dos capítulos empíricos. En el tercer capítulo, se estudia la relación entre e-Participación y e-Cognocracia y se presenta un marco (EF3-framework) para la evaluación, en términos de efectividad, eficacia y eficiencia, de cualquier experiencia de e¬-Participación. La iniciativa de Cadrete es evaluada y valorada siguiendo el marco EF3 propuesto en dicho capítulo. Y en el cuarto y último capítulo se valora, monetariamente, la implementación y el desarrollo de la experiencia de Cadrete. Esta valoración nos permite, a través de la comparación de los beneficios económicos y sociales con la inversión realizada, tener una visión global sobre el verdadero valor añadido que aportan las iniciativas de e-Participación a la sociedad. Referencias Bell, D. (1973). The Coming of Post-Industrial Society. N.Y. Basic Books. Drucker, P. F. (1969). The Age of Discontinuity. Guidelines to our Changing Society. New York: Harper & Row. Drucker, P. F. (1994). The age of social transformation. The Atlantic Monthly, 273(11) (Boston, http://www.theatlantic.com/election/connection/ecbig/soctrans.htm). Faure, E., Herrera, F., Kaddoura, A., Lopes, H., Petrowsky, A., Rahnema, M., et al. (1972). Learning To Be. The World of Education Today and Tomorrow. Paris/London: UNESCO/Harrap. Layne, K. and Lee, J. (2001). Developing fully functional E-government: A four stage model, Government Information Quarterly, 18 (2) 122-137. Lisboa (2000). http://www.europarl.europa.eu/summits/lis1_es.htm Macintosh, A. (2004). Characterizing E-Participation in Policy-Making, In the Proceedings of the Thirty-Seventh Annual Hawaii International Conference on System Sciences (HICSS-37), January 5 ¿ 8, Big Island, Hawaii. Macintosh, A. and Whyte, A. (2008). Towards an Evaluation Framework for eParticipation. Transforming Government: People, Process and Policy, 2(1), 16-30. Moreno-Jiménez, J.M. (2003). Los Métodos Estadísticos en el Nuevo Método Científico. In Casas, J.M. y Pulido, A.: Información económica y técnicas de análisis en el siglo XXI. INE, 331-348. Moreno-Jiménez, J.M. (2004). E-cognocracia y Representación Democrática del Inmigrante. XVIII Anales de Economía Aplicada. León (CD). ISBN: 84-609-4715-7. Moreno-Jiménez, J.M. (2006). E-Cognocracia: Nueva Sociedad, Nueva Democracia. Estudios de Economía Aplicada 24(1-2), 559¿581. Moreno-Jiménez, J.M. (2009). Participación Ciudadana Electrónica en el Diseño de Políticas Públicas Locales. Universidad de Zaragoza (http://aragonparticipa.aragon.es/dmdocuments/Resumen%20e-cognocracia.pdf). Moreno-Jiménez, J.M., Pérez-Espés, C. and Rivera, P. (2013). Notes on an EF3-evaluation of e-Cognocracy. Proceedings 5th World Summit on the Knowledge Society 2012, Roma (Italia), June 2012. Moreno-Jiménez, J. M. and Polasek, W. (2003). E-democracy and Knowledge. A Multicriteria Framework for the New Democratic Era, Journal Multicriteria Decision Analysis, 12, 163-176. Moreno-Jiménez, J. M. and Polasek, W. (2004). E-cognocracy: combining e-democracy with knowledge networks. En Padget, J.; Neira, R. y Díaz de León, J.L. (Eds.) Research on Computing Science 8, 165-175. Méjico. Moreno-Jiménez, J. M. and Polasek, W. (2005). E-cognocracy and the participation of immigrants in egovernance. En Böhlen y otros (eds.): TED Conference on e-government 2005. Electronic democracy:The challenge ahead. University Rudolf Trauner-Verlag, Schriftenreihe Informatik, 13, 18-26. Pérez-Espés, C., Moreno-Jiménez, J.M. and Altuzarra, A. (2012). Algunas notas sobre la valoración económica de los procesos de participación ciudadana. Aplicación a la e-Cognocracia. Anales de Economía Aplicada 2012 ISBN: 978-84-15581-10-9. Stehr, N. (1994). Knowledge Societies: The Transformation of Labour, Property and Knowledge in Contemporary Society. London: Sage. UNESCO (2005). Towards Knowledge Societies. UNESCO World Report (available at http://unesdoc.unesco.org/images/0014/001418/141843.pdf) Wimmer, M. A. (2002). A European perspective towards online one-stop government: the eGOV project, in Electronic Commerce research and Applications, 1(1) 92-103.

Territorial dynamics are the result of a games of actors within a given geographical area. Understanding them involves identifying the actors' strategies and their relationship to the territory. The gradual investment of at the frontier of civilization to the tourism economy induces significant socio-spatial changes. What are the socio-geographical logics that characterize the tourism transformation of the nature borderlands? The dynamics of tourism destinations are extensively studied but those of nature's borderlands are not. Marginal, peripheral or frontier places are strong in the traveler's imaginaries, they are exotic and constitute geographical objects of their own [part I]. In an ever more urbanized world, the lesser-known areas of nature, defined as Wilderness in the Anglo-Saxon culture, are attracting evermore tourists of all origins.The analysis of the physical particularities, statistical and cartographic data of Touristic Nature Borderland shows the spatial relevancy of the notion. A critical analysis of nature tourism actors' speeches shows their the social-cultural attributes and the imaginaries associated to them. Nature territories are social constructs, they result of a unique cultural organization. Different social representations, individual or collective, generate actor's speeches and actions. They build different Tourism Development Forms that have different logics; state, industrial, traditionalist, entrepreneurial, ecological, alternative or recreational [Part II].The appearance of a form depends on historical and cultural conditions of a territory. It is possible to identify them on a nature area by analyzing tourism actor's speeches and the spatial materiality which result from their actions. The dynamics at work in a recreational area are the result of the existing relationships between group of actors with different conceptions of development. Confrontations and agreements between Tourism Development Forms arise in time and space [part III]. Despite distinct representations of nature and economical justifications, they can unite against a threat to their interests. This is the case, for example, during environmental conflicts, around the industrial use of water resources. On the other hand, public policies wanting to promote the economic development of the territory tend to support only one form of development and thus favor ideological confrontations. The analysis of public and private projects in the region of Aysén in Chilean Patagonia, shows that these favor in partial manner certain actors of the territory. Only some projects, such as scientific tourism, manage to unite actors. This is made possible by empowering them trough a territorial project, cultural rather than commercial, based on the sharing of knowledges and the specification of the tourism resources. The work of a facilitator and mediator, in charge of territorial engineering, insures the collective initiative.An analysis through the lens of Tourism Development Forms proves particularly relevant for emerging systems. The study of the existing conflicts in nature based borderlands reveals processes that are characteristic of modern societies, tourism being at the heart of the contradictions of our civilization anchored in the metropolis. ; Las dinámicas territoriales son el resultado de una interacción entre actores en un área geográfica determinada. Comprenderlos implica identificar las estrategias de estos actores y su relación con el territorio. El arraigo gradual de un espacio en la frontera del ecúmene a la economía del turismo, induce cambios socio-espaciales significativos. ¿Qué lógicas socio-geográficas caracterizan por ende la puesta en turismo de los confines de naturaleza? Las dinámicas de los destinos turísticos han sido ampliamente estudiadas, pero los confines de naturaleza no lo son. Lugares marginales, periféricos o fronterizos, están omnipresentes en el imaginario del viaje, cargados de alteridad y constituyen objetos geográficos pertinentes en sí [parte I]. En un mundo cada vez más urbanizado, las áreas naturales menos conocidas, llamadas Wilderness por los anglosajones, atraen cada vez a más a los turistas de todos los orígenes.El análisis de las características físicas, de los datos estadísticos y cartográficos de los Confines Turísticos de Naturaleza muestra la relevancia espacial de la noción. La interpretación de los discursos de los actores del turismo de naturaleza permite especificar los atributos socioculturales y los imaginarios asociados a ellos. Los territorios de la naturaleza son constructos sociales, producto de una organización cultural singular. Diferentes representaciones sociales, individuales o colectivas producen discursos y lógicas de actores. Nace de estas diferentes Formas de Desarrollo Turístico que son estatales, industriales, tradicionalistas, empresariales, ecológicas, alternativas o recreativas [Parte II].La aparición de una forma depende de las condiciones históricas y culturales en un territorio. Es posible identificarlos en un espacio de la naturaleza gracias al análisis los discursos de los actores del turismo y las materialidades espaciales que resultan de sus acciones. Las dinámicas existentes en un territorio de prácticas recreativas dependen de las relaciones que establecen los colectivos de actores con concepciones distintas del desarrollo. Confrontaciones y compromisos entre las Formas de Desarrollo Turístico se establecen en el tiempo y el espacio [parte III]. A pesar de tener representaciones de la naturaleza y justificaciones económicas disimiles estas pueden unirse frente a una amenaza a sus intereses. Este es el caso, por ejemplo, durante los conflictos ambientales vinculados a usos industriales de los recursos hídricos. Por otro lado, las políticas públicas, que quieren promover el desarrollo económico del territorio, suelen apoyar solo una forma de desarrollo y por ende incrementar los enfrentamientos ideológicos. El análisis de proyectos públicos y privados en la región de Aysén, en la Patagonia Chilena, muestra que los proyectos de estado favorecen de manera parcial a ciertos actores del territorio. Solo ciertos proyectos, como el de turismo científico, logran unir a los actores. Esto ha sido posible gracias a un proceso de participación real en un proyecto territorializado, más bien cultural que comercial, mediante el intercambio de conocimiento y la especificación del recurso turístico. La acción de un facilitador, o mediador, a cargo de la ingeniería. territorial, asegura la puesta en marcha de la iniciativa colectiva.Una lectura mediante las Formas de Desarrollo Turístico parece particularmente relevante para caracterizar las dinámicas de los sistemas emergentes. El estudio de las tensiones existentes en los confines de la Naturaleza revela procesos característicos de las sociedades contemporáneas por ser el turismo central en las contradicciones de nuestra civilización anclada a las metrópolis. ; Les dynamiques territoriales sont le résultat des jeux d'acteurs au sein d'un espace géographique déterminé. Les comprendre suppose de cerner les stratégies d'acteurs et leurs rapports au territoire. L'ancrage progressif d'un espace à la frontière de l'écoumène dans l'économie du tourisme induit des changements socio-spatiaux importants. Quelles logiques sociogéographiques caractérisent alors la mise en tourisme des confins de nature ? Les dynamiques des destinations touristiques sont abondamment étudiées, mais celles des confins de nature ne le sont pas. Lieux marginaux, périphériques ou frontaliers, ils sont omniprésents dans les imaginaires du voyage, car chargés d'altérité, et constituent des objets géographiques à part entière [partie I]. Dans un monde toujours plus urbanisé, les confins de nature les moins connus, qualifiés de Wilderness par les Anglo-saxons, attirent de plus en plus les touristes de toutes origines.L'analyse des spécificités physiques, des données statistiques et cartographiques des confins touristiques de nature montre la pertinence spatiale de la notion. L'interprétation des discours d'acteurs du tourisme de nature permet d'en préciser les attributs sociaux culturels et les imaginaires qui s'y rattachent. Les territoires de nature sont des construits sociaux, le produit d'une organisation culturelle singulière. Différentes représentations sociales, individuelles ou collectives, produisent des discours et des logiques d'acteurs. Il en résulte différentes formes de développements des espaces touristiques, qui sont étatiques, industrielles, traditionalistes, entrepreneuriales, écologiques, alternatives ou récréatives [partie II]. L'apparition d'une forme dépend de conditions historiques et culturelles sur un territoire. Il est possible de les identifier sur un espace de nature grâce à l'analyse du discours des acteurs du tourisme et aux matérialités spatiales qui résultent de leurs actions. Les dynamiques à l'œuvre sur un territoire de pratiques récréatives sont tributaires des rapports qu'entretiennent des collectifs d'acteurs ayant des conceptions différenciées du développement. Des confrontations et des compromis entre des formes de développement touristique s'établissent dans le temps et dans l'espace [partie III]. Malgré des représentations de la nature et des justifications économiques distinctes, celles-ci peuvent s'unir face à une menace affectant leurs intérêts. C'est le cas, par exemple, lors des conflits environnementaux, autour de l'usage industriel des ressources hydriques. En revanche des politiques publiques voulant favoriser le développement économique du territoire tendent à n'appuyer qu'une forme de développement et attiser alors les affrontements idéologiques. L'analyse des projets publics et privés dans la région d'Aysén en Patagonie chilienne montre que les projets d'États favorisent de manière partiale certains acteurs du territoire. Seuls certains projets, tels que celui du tourisme scientifique, parviennent à fédérer les acteurs. Ceci est rendu possible par un processus de participation active à un projet territorialisé, culturel plus que commercial, basé sur le partage de connaissances et une spécification de la ressource touristique. L'action d'un animateur et médiateur, responsable de l'ingénierie territoriale, assure la mise en œuvre de l'initiative collective.Une lecture par les formes de développement touristique apparait comme particulièrement pertinente pour caractériser les systèmes émergents. L'étude des tensions à l'œuvre dans les confins de nature révèle des processus caractéristiques des sociétés contemporaines, le tourisme étant au cœur des contradictions de nos civilisations ancrées dans les métropoles.